Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning &amp Bms

SPECIFICATION S040804D1MA
HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING & BMS
PROJECT 040804
UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES &
DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE
PREPARED BY
VOS Group Pty Limited

Level 2, 10-18 Cliff Street
MILSONS POINT NSW 2061
AUSTRALIA
Tel: +61 2 9956 8080

Fax: +61 2 9956 8101
Email: vosadmin@vosgroup.com.au
VOS Group Consulting Engineers

PO Box 46649
Dubai, UAE
Tel: +971 4 397 9645

Fax: +971 4 397 9643
Email: vosadmin@vosdubai.ae
Tender Issue
S040804DIMA 19 July 2006
SPECIFICATION AUTHORISATION
Verified by: John O’Leary Signed:__________________________ Date: 19/07/2006

(Senior Engineer)
Approved by: Geoff Taylor Signed:__________________________ Date: 19/07/2006

(Project Team Leader)
REVISION STATUS
Rev No. Description of Revision Date Approved

A Tender Issue 19/07/2006
Please Note # Recipients are responsible for eliminating all superseded documents in their possession.
S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 2

Mechanical Services – Tender Issue – 19 July 2006
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.00.00 HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND BMCS 14

23.01.00 GENERAL CONDITIONS 14
23.01.01 INTRODUCTION AND INTENT 14
23.01.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS 14
23.01.03 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT 15
23.01.03.01 Sub-Contractor to Inform Himself 15
23.01.03.02 Drawings and Information Supplied by the Engineer 15
23.01.03.03 Definitions 15
23.01.03.04 Obvious Work 16
23.01.03.05 Equipment Variations After Tendering 16
23.01.03.06 Standards, Quality of Work and Materials, Submittals and Approval 16
23.01.03.07 Protection 17
23.01.03.08 Tests 17
23.01.03.09 Provisional Sums 18
23.01.04 NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES (NOCs) 18
23.01.05 AUTHORITY PERMITS, FEES, INSPECTIONS AND NOCs 18
23.02.00 DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES 19
23.02.01 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT 19
23.02.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS 19
23.02.03 DRAWINGS BY ENGINEER 19
23.02.04 SCOPE OF WORK 20
23.02.04.01 Preliminaries 20
23.02.04.02 Chilled Water Systems 21
23.02.04.03 Air Conditioning Units (Air Handling Unit (AHU), Fan Coil Unit (FCU)) 22
23.02.04.04 Ventilation Systems 23
23.02.04.05 Ductwork and Accessories 23
23.02.04.06 Electrical 24
23.02.04.07 Controls Including: 25
23.02.04.08 Commissioning and Certification including: 25
23.02.05 ASSOCIATED WORKS 26
23.02.05.01 Building Trade Work 26
23.02.05.02 Electrical Trade Work 27
23.02.05.03 Hydraulic Trade Work 27
23.02.05.04 Fire Trade Work 28
23.02.05.05 Lift Trade Work 28
23.02.06 PERFORMANCE & GUARANTEE 28
23.02.06.01 Performance Criteria 28
23.02.07 PRESSURISATION PHILOSOPHY 30
23.02.07.01 Fire Philosophy and Smoke Management 30
23.02.07.02 Air Intake System 30
23.02.08 BUILDING DETAILS 30
23.02.09 GENERAL 31
23.02.09.01 Co-Ordination 31
23.02.09.02 Electrical 31
23.03.00 EQUIPMENT 32
23.03.01 GENERAL 32
23.03.01.01 Site Climatic Conditions 32
23.03.01.02 Layout 32
23.03.01.03 Plinths 32
23.03.01.04 Fastenings 32
23.03.01.05 Lubrication 33
23.03.01.06 Shafts 33
23.03.01.07 Bearings 33

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.03.01.08 Couplings 33
23.03.01.09 Gaskets, Sealants and Mastics 34
23.03.01.10 Direct Drives 34
23.03.01.11 Belt Drives 34
23.03.01.12 Guards 34
23.03.01.13 Installation 34
23.03.01.14 Lifting Lugs 34
23.03.02 GENERAL AIR HANDLING UNIT(AHU) 35
23.03.02.01 General 35
23.03.02.02 Casing 35
23.03.02.03 Vibration Isolation 36
23.03.02.04 Filter Section 36
23.03.02.05 Fan Assembly 37
23.03.02.06 Chilled Water Cooling Coil 38
23.03.02.07 Drain Tray 38
23.03.02.08 Motor Mounting 38
23.03.02.09 Motors 38
23.03.02.10 Electric Heaters 39
23.03.03 HYGIENIC TYPE AIR HANDLING UNITS (HAHU) 39
23.03.03.01 General 39
23.03.03.02 Construction and Access to Components 39
23.03.04 FAN COIL UNITS (FCU) 40
23.03.04.01 General 40
23.03.04.02 Construction 40
23.03.05 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 41
23.03.05.01 General 41
23.03.05.02 Precision Air Conditioning Systems 41
23.03.05.03 Cabinet Construction 42
23.03.05.04 Chilled Water Coil 42
23.03.05.05 Fans 42
23.03.05.06 Floor Stands 42
23.03.05.07 Service Area 42
23.03.05.08 2-Stage Operation 42
23.03.05.09 Filtration 42
23.03.05.10 Controls 42
23.03.06 AXIAL FANS - DIRECT DRIVE 43
23.03.06.01 General 43
23.03.06.02 Bearings 44
23.03.06.03 Motors 44
23.03.06.04 Impellers 44
23.03.06.05 Casings and Assembly 44
23.03.06.06 Factory Finish 44
23.03.07 CENTRIFUGAL FANS 44
23.03.07.01 General 44
23.03.07.02 Performance and Type 44
23.03.07.03 Bearings 45
23.03.07.04 Drives 45
23.03.07.05 Motors 45
23.03.07.06 Guards 45
23.03.07.07 Assembly and Mounting 45
23.03.08 IN LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS 46
23.03.09 PROPELLER FANS 46
23.03.10 SILENCERS - ACOUSTIC ATTENUATORS 47
23.03.10.01 General 47
23.03.10.02 Silencers - Duct Mounted Type 47

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.03.11 FILTERS 47
23.03.11.01 General 47
23.03.11.02 Dry Media Filters - Deep Bed Type, Medium Efficiency 48
23.03.11.03 Dry Media Filters - Dry Media, Panel Type 48
23.03.11.04 Panel Filters - Grease Type 48
23.03.11.05 Absolute Filters – HGPA Filter Module 49
23.03.12 ROOM PRESSURE STABILISATION MONITORING 49
23.03.13 Electric Motors 49
23.03.14 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES 50
23.03.14.01 General 50
23.03.14.02 Ceiling Diffusers - Linear Slot 51
23.03.14.03 Ceiling Diffusers - Louvre Face 51
23.03.14.04 Registers (Universal Type - Aluminium) 51
23.03.14.05 Return Air Grilles - Wall Mounted (Visible one side only) 51
23.03.14.06 Return Air Grilles - Door or Wall Mounted (Visible from both sides) 51
23.03.14.07 Ceiling Mounted Return Air and Exhaust Grilles 51
23.03.14.08 Car Park Supply and Exhaust Grilles 52
23.03.14.09 Exhaust Air Louvres 52
23.03.14.10 Sand Trap Louvre for Air Intake 52
23.03.14.11 Birdscreens 52
23.03.15 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS 52
23.03.15.01 General 52
23.03.16 OPEN TYPE EXPANSION TANKS 53
23.03.17 chilled WATER PUMPS 53
23.03.17.01 General 53
23.03.17.02 Materials 54
23.03.17.03 Drives 54
23.03.17.04 Motor and Impeller 55
23.03.17.05 Seals 55
23.03.18 VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS 55
23.03.19 COILS (RUN AROUND AND COOLING) 56
23.03.20 emergency air cooled screw chiller 56
23.03.21 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS 59
23.03.21.01 Construction and Materials 60
23.03.22 CARBON MONOXIDE MONITORING SYSTEM 60
23.03.22.01 General 60
23.03.22.02 Carbon Monoxide Monitoring 60
23.03.22.03 Carbon Monoxide Sensors 61
23.03.22.04 Field Wiring Connections 61
23.03.22.05 Control Signal/Interface 61
23.03.22.06 Certification 61
23.04.00 SHEETMETAL WORK 62
23.04.01 DUCTWORK AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS 62
23.04.01.01 Sheetmetal Ductwork 62
23.04.01.02 Pitot Holes in Ductwork 62
23.04.01.03 Flexible Fan Connections 63
23.04.01.04 Flashing Collars 63
23.04.01.05 Duct Access Hatches 63
23.04.01.06 Vertical Discharge or Intake Ducts 63
23.04.01.07 Toilet Exhaust Ductwork 64
23.04.01.08 Flexible Ductwork 64
23.04.01.09 Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork 64
23.04.01.10 Circular and Oval Sheetmetal Ductwork 64
23.04.02 PVC DUCTWORK 65

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.04.02.01 Material 65
23.04.03 DAMPERS 65
23.04.03.01 General 66
23.04.03.02 Motorised Damper Sets 66
23.04.03.03 Manually Adjustable Damper Sets 66
23.04.03.04 Non-Return Dampers 67
23.04.03.05 Smoke Control Dampers 67
23.04.04 FIRE DAMPERS 67
23.04.04.01 Fire Dampers - Fusible Link Type 67
23.04.05 TECHNICAL SUBMISSION 69
23.05.00 REFRIGERATION PIPING 70
23.05.01 GENERAL 70
23.05.01.01 Fire Precautions 70
23.05.02 PIPING MATERIALS 70
23.05.03 HANDLING, PREPARATION, INSTALLATION 70
23.05.04 JOINTS 70
23.05.05 BENDS 71
23.05.06 TEES 71
23.05.07 SUPPORTS 71
23.05.08 SLEEVES 72
23.05.09 ESCUTCHEON PLATES 72
23.05.10 VALVES AND FITTINGS 72
23.05.10.01 Muffler 72
23.05.10.02 Strainer 72
23.05.10.03 Dryer 72
23.05.10.04 Sight Glass 72
23.05.10.05 Thermostatic Expansion Valves 73
23.05.10.06 Refrigerant Distributors 73
23.05.10.07 Solenoid Valves 73
23.05.10.08 Pressure Tappings 73
23.05.10.09 Valves 73
23.05.10.10 Thermometer Wells 73
23.05.10.11 Drain Piping 73
23.06.00 PIPEWORK 74
23.06.01 GENERAL 74
23.06.02 PIPING MATERIALS 74
23.06.02.01 Chilled Water Pipework 74
23.06.02.02 Condensate Piping 74
23.06.03 HANDLING, PREPARATION, INSTALLATION 75
23.06.04 JOINTS 75
23.06.04.01 Brazing 76
23.06.04.02 Flanges 76
23.06.04.03 Screwed Unions 76
23.06.04.04 Flared Fittings 77
23.06.04.05 Joints between Dissimilar Metals (Dielectric Isolators) 77
23.06.05 BENDS 77
23.06.06 TEES 77
23.06.07 CHANGE IN DIAMETER 77
23.06.08 SUPPORTS 77
23.06.09 EXPANSION, CONTRACTION 78
23.06.10 SLEEVES 79
23.06.11 ESCUTCHEON PLATES 80
23.06.12 TESTING OF PIPING 80
23.06.12.01 General 80

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.06.12.02 Testing of Water Pipework Systems 80

23.06.12.03 Testing of Drains 80
23.06.13 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING 81
23.06.14 PIPE CLEANING 81
23.06.15 ABS PIPING 81
23.06.15.01 Jointing 81
23.06.15.02 Support 82
23.07.00 VALVES 83
23.07.01 GENERAL 83
23.07.02 ISOLATING VALVES 84
23.07.02.01 Ball Valves 84
23.07.02.02 Butterfly Valves 84
23.07.03 FLOW CONTROL VALVES 85
23.07.03.01 Automatic Flow Control Valves 85
23.07.03.02 Butterfly Valves 85
23.07.03.03 Double Regulating Valves 85
23.07.03.04 Eccentric Plug Cocks 86
23.07.03.05 Manometer Connections 86
23.07.04 CHECK VALVES 86
23.07.05 GAUGE VALVES 87
23.07.06 AIR ELIMINATORS 87
23.07.06.01 Specifications 87
23.07.07 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES 88
23.07.07.01 Specification 88
23.07.08 STRAINERS 88
23.07.09 GAUGE AND INSTRUMENT FITTINGS 88
23.07.10 ABS PIPEWORK VALVES 89
23.07.10.01 Isolating Valves (Up to 50mm) 89
23.07.10.02 Isolating Valves (65mm to 200mm) 89
23.07.10.03 Isolating Valves (over 200mm) 89
23.07.10.04 Check Valves (All Sizes) 89
23.07.10.05 Strainers 90
23.08.00 INSULATION 91
23.08.01 GENERAL 91
23.08.02 SCOPE OF WORK 92
23.08.03 DUCTWORK - EXTERNAL INSULATION 92
23.08.04 FIRE RATED DUCTWORK 93
23.08.05 REFRIGERATION SUCTION GAS PIPEWORK 93
23.08.06 SMALL REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK 94
23.08.07 CHILLED WATER PIPEWORK 94
23.08.08 SAMPLES 95
23.09.00 WATER TREATMENT 96
23.09.01 GENERAL 96
23.09.02 FLUSHING 96
23.09.03 SYSTEMS OPERATED WITHOUT WATER TREATMENT 96
23.09.03.01 Hydrostatic Pressure Testing 97
23.09.04 WATER TREATMENT 97
23.10.00 CORROSION PROTECTION, PAINTING & LABELLING 99
23.10.01 GENERAL 99
23.10.02 PAINTING, GENERAL 99
23.10.03 SURFACE PREPARATION 100
23.10.03.01 Degreasing 100
23.10.03.02 Hand Cleaning 100

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.10.03.03 Blast Cleaning 100

23.10.03.04 Pickling 100
23.10.03.05 Hand and Machine 100
23.10.04 PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS 101
23.10.04.01 Galvanising 101
23.10.04.02 Painting of Metal (Enamel Finish) 101
23.10.04.03 Painting of Concrete 101
23.10.05 PAINTING MATERIAL 101
23.10.06 PAINTING SCOPE 101
23.10.07 LABELLING 102
23.11.00 PIPED MEDICAL GASES, VACUUM, MEDICAL AIR AND ANAESTHETIC GAS
SCAVENGING SYSTEMS 103
23.11.01 MEDICAL GAS 103
23.11.01.01 Extent of Work 103
23.11.02 ASSOCIATED WORKS 103
23.11.03 STANDARDs AND LOCAL Regulations 104
23.11.04 EQUIPMENT AND UNIFORMITY 104
23.11.05 PIPEWORK, FLANGES AND SUPPORTS 104
23.11.05.01 General 104
23.11.05.02 Handling, Preparation, Installation 104
23.11.05.03 Brazing 105
23.11.05.04 Flanges 105
23.11.05.05 Change in Diameter 106
23.11.05.06 Supports 106
23.11.05.07 Expansion, Contraction 106
23.11.05.08 Sleeves 106
23.11.05.09 Escutcheon Plates 107
23.11.06 Pipeline Shut Off Valves & zone isolation valve box (zivb) 107
23.11.07 Terminal Units 109
23.11.08 Pressure Gauge, SWITCHES, REGULATIONS AND SAFETY VALVES 110
23.11.08.01 Pressure Gauge 110
23.11.08.02 Pressure Switches 110
23.11.08.03 Pressure Control Regulators 110
23.11.08.04 Pressure Safety Valve 110
23.11.09 Medical VACUUM PLANT 110
23.11.09.01 General 110
23.11.09.02 Vacuum Pumps 110
23.11.09.03 Vacuum Receiver 111
23.11.09.04 Control Panel 111
23.11.09.05 Bacterial Filters/Drainage Trap Assembly 112
23.11.09.06 Exhaust System 112
23.11.10 Medical compressed air plant (4 BAR) 112
23.11.10.01 General 112
23.11.10.02 Air Compressors 113
23.11.10.03 Air Receivers 113
23.11.10.04 Air Dryers, Filter Dryer Assembly & After Coolers 113
23.11.10.05 Control Panels 115
23.11.10.06 Duplex Pressure Reducing Station 116
23.11.11 surgical compressed air plant (7 BAR) 116
23.11.11.01 General 116
23.11.11.02 Air Compressors 116
23.11.11.03 Air Receivers 116
23.11.11.04 Air Dryers, Filter Dryer Assembly & After Coolers 116
23.11.11.05 Control Panels 118

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.11.12 Anaesthetic gas scavenging disposal system 119

23.11.13 Alarm system 119
23.11.13.01 General 119
23.11.13.02 Area Alarm Panels 120
23.11.13.03 Medical Gas Central Plantrooms Alarms. 120
23.11.14 modular manifold supply system & manifold control panel 121
23.11.14.01 General 121
23.11.14.02 Oxygen and N2O Manifold Control Panel 122
23.11.14.03 Emergency Supply Manifolds (ESM) 123
23.11.15 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION 123
23.11.15.01 General 123
23.11.15.02 Testing of Pipework Systems 124
23.11.16 IDENTIFICATION, COLOUR CODING AND LABELLING 124
23.12.00 ELECTRICAL ASSOCIATED WITH HVAC WORKS 125
23.12.01 EXTENT OF WORK 125
23.12.02 WORK BY BUILDER 125
23.12.02.01 Electrical Trade 125
23.12.02.02 Fire Trade 125
23.12.03 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCAL RULES 126
23.12.04 EQUIPMENT AND UNIFORMITY 126
23.12.05 CONTINUITY OF SUPPLY 126
23.12.06 BALANCE OF LOAD 126
23.12.07 TESTS 126
23.12.08 IDENTIFICATION, COLOUR CODES, LABELLING AND WIRING DIAGRAMS 126
23.12.09 FORM OF ELECTRICAL SUPPLY 127
23.12.10 EARTHING 127
23.12.11 WIRING METHODS 127
23.12.12 CONDUIT INSTALLATION 128
23.12.13 CABLE DUCTS 131
23.12.13.01 Metal 131
23.12.13.02 Plastic 131
23.12.13.03 Cable Trays 131
23.12.14 TPS CONDUCTORS INSTALLATION 132
23.12.15 TPI CONDUCTORS 132
23.12.16 SHIELDED CABLES 132
23.12.17 MOTORS 133
23.12.18 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR TO BE USED 133
23.12.18.01 Switchboards 133
23.12.18.02 Schedule of Switchboard Equipment 134
23.12.18.03 Cabinet Construction 135
23.12.18.04 Finishes 136
23.12.18.05 Busbars 137
23.12.18.06 Links 137
23.12.18.07 Hardware 138
23.12.18.08 Mounting of Equipment 138
23.12.18.09 Installation of Switchboards 139
23.12.18.10 Switcgear and Controlgear to be used 139
23.12.18.11 Switchgear and Controlgear 139
23.12.18.12 Switches and Isolators (Switchboard Mounted) 140
23.12.18.13 Combination Fuse Switches (CFS UNITS) 140
23.12.18.14 HRC Fuses 141
23.12.18.15 HRC Fuse Cartridges 141
23.12.18.16 Contactors 141
23.12.18.17 Overload Protection 141

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.12.18.18 Local Isolating Switches 143

23.12.18.19 Time Switches 143
23.12.18.20 Current Transformers 143
23.12.18.21 Meters 143
23.12.18.22 Auxiliary and Control Switches 144
23.12.18.23 Indicator Lights 144
23.12.18.24 Control Relays 144
23.12.18.25 Auto-Transformer Starters 144
23.12.18.26 Star-Delta Starters (Closed Transition) 145
23.12.19 SPEED CONTROLLERS 145
23.12.19.01 General 145
23.12.19.02 Performance 146
23.12.19.03 Control and Monitoring 150
23.12.19.04 Protection And Monitoring 153
23.13.00 CONTROLS 156
23.13.01.01 GENERAL 156
23.13.02 EXTENT OF WORK 157
23.13.02.01 Associated Works 158
23.13.03 FUNCTIONAL BUILDING MANAGEMENT CONTROL SPECIFICATION 159
23.13.03.01 General 159
23.13.03.02 Emergency Chilled Water Pant 159
23.13.03.03 Building (Secondary) Chilled Water Pumps 160
23..04 Air handling units for pre conditioning of O/A (dedicated outside air units) 161
23.13.03.04 Chilled Water Fan Coil Units 162
23.13.03.05 Computer Room Air Conditioning System 163
23.13.03.06 Kitchen Exhaust System 164
23.13.03.07 Garbage Room Exhaust Fan 164
23.13.03.08 Car Park Ventilation 164
23.13.03.09 Operating Sequence 164
23.13.03.10 Fire Mode 165
23.13.03.11 Run and Fault Lights 165
23.13.03.12 After Hours Air Conditioning Requests 165
23.13.03.13 Other Mechanical Ventilation Systems 165
23.13.04 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY 165
23.13.05 BMCS POINT SCHEDULE 166
23.13.05.01 Mechanical Services 166
23.13.05.02 Electrical Services 169
23.13.05.03 Fire Services 170
23.13.05.04 Hydraulic Services 170
23.13.06 RETURN FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION 170
23.14.00 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMCS) 171
23.14.01 GENERAL 171
23.14.02 OPERATOR INTERFACE 172
23.14.02.01 General 172
23.14.02.02 Printer(s) 173
23.14.02.03 Modem 173
23.14.03 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (LAN) 173
23.14.03.01 Controller LAN 173
23.14.03.02 Commercial LAN 173
23.14.04 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM 174
23.14.04.01 Communication Techniques 174
23.14.04.02 Network Support 174
23.14.04.03 Network Trees & Summaries 174
23.14.04.04 Fibre Optic Pathways 174

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.14.05 FIELD HARDWARE 175

23.14.05.01 DCU Global Communications 175
23.14.05.02 DCU Field Input/Output Capability 176
23.14.05.03 DCU Point Scanning 176
23.14.05.04 DCU Upload/Download Capability 176
23.14.05.05 DCU Diagnostics 176
23.14.05.06 DCU Test Mode Operation 176
23.14.05.07 DCU Local Operator Console 176
23.14.05.08 MicroController Interface 177
23.14.05.09 Application Specific Controllers 177
23.14.05.10 Micro Controller Field Input/Output Capability 177
23.14.05.11 Distributed Lighting Control Panel 178
23.14.05.12 ViewCon 178
23.14.05.13 Temperature Sensors 179
23.14.05.14 Intelligent Sensors 179
23.14.06 BMCS SOFTWARE 179
23.14.06.01 General 179
23.14.06.02 Dynamic Graphic Flow Chart Programming 180
23.14.06.03 Zoom 181
23.14.06.04 Input/Output Capabilities 181
23.14.06.05 Operator Access 183
23.14.06.06 Command Functions 183
23.14.06.07 Database Functions 183
23.14.06.08 Database Creation and Support 183
23.14.06.09 Operator Workstation 184
23.14.06.10 Alarm Processing 185
23.14.06.11 Event Processing 186
23.14.06.12 Automatic Restart 186
23.14.06.13 Messages 186
23.14.06.14 Free Form Historical Reports 186
23.14.06.15 Prepared Historical Report 187
23.14.06.16 Parameter Save/Restore 187
23.14.06.17 Data Collection 187
23.14.06.18 Graphic Display 187
23.14.06.19 Maintenance Management 188
23.14.06.20 Context Sensitive Help Screens 188
23.14.06.21 Application Sensitive Help Screens 188
23.14.06.22 Dedicated Function Keys 189
23.14.07 DCU/MCI APPLICATION ROUTINES 189
23.14.07.01 General 189
23.14.07.02 Demand Monitoring and Load Shedding 189
23.14.07.03 Automatic Time Scheduling (ATS) 190
23.14.07.04 "Distributed" Start/Stop Time Optimisation (SSTO) 190
23.14.07.05 Duty Cycle Control (DCC) 191
23.14.07.06 Night Setback/Setup Program 191
23.14.07.07 Calculated Points 191
23.14.07.08 Event Initiated Programming (EIP) 192
23.14.07.09 Direct Digital Control (DDC) Modules 192
23.14.07.10 Self Tuning PID Loops 192
23.14.07.11 Trend Logging 193
23.14.07.12 Override 194
23.14.08 PAGER INTERFACE 194
23.14.09 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS 195
23.14.09.01 Application Specific Controller Interface 195
23.14.09.02 Application Specific Controller - Common Requirements 195

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.14.09.03 HandHeld Console 196

23.14.09.04 Workstation 196
23.14.09.05 Room Sensor 197
23.14.10 FIELD DEVICES 197
23.14.10.01 General 197
23.14.10.02 Temperature Sensors 197
23.14.10.03 Current Transformers 198
23.14.10.04 Humidity Sensors 198
23.14.10.05 Differential Pressure Sensors (Low Pressure air) 198
23.14.10.06 Damper Actuators 198
23.14.10.07 Motor Speed Controllers 199
23.14.11 COMMISSIONING 199
23.14.12 STANDBY FOR OTHER SYSTEMS TESTING 200
23.14.13 ACCEPTANCE DEMONSTRATIONS 200
23.14.14 SYSTEM HAND-OVER 200
23.14.15 DOCUMENTATION 200
23.14.15.01 Operation and Maintenance Manuals: 200
23.14.16 SITE/USER TRAINING 201
23.14.17 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT 201
23.15.00 NOISE AND VIBRATION 202
23.15.01 GENERAL 202
23.15.02 NOISE MEASUREMENTS 202
23.15.03 NOISE RATING NUMBERS 203
23.15.04 INTERNAL NOISE LEVELS 203
23.15.05 EXTERNAL NOISE LEVELS 203
23.15.05.01 Property Boundaries 203
23.15.06 PLANT NOISE LEVELS 203
23.15.07 VIBRATION PRODUCED BY PLANT 204
23.15.08 TESTING ON COMPLETION 204
23.15.09 NOISE GENERATED BY THE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM 204
23.15.10 STRUCTURE BORNE NOISE AND VIBRATION 204
23.15.11 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTS AND ISOLATORS 205
23.15.11.01 Selection of Equipment Isolation Mounts 205
23.15.11.02 Piping Isolation Mounts 205
23.15.11.03 Isolation Mount Types 205
23.15.11.04 Isolation Hanger Types 206
23.15.12 EQUIPMENT BASES 206
23.15.13 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTS 206
23.15.14 PENETRATIONS 207
23.15.15 SILENCERS - GENERAL 207
23.15.15.01 Silencers 207
23.15.15.02 Silencers Exposed to Moisture 207
23.16.00 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING 209
23.16.01.01 GENERAL 209
23.16.02 TESTING 209
23.16.02.01 General 209
23.16.02.02 Medical Gases 210
23.16.02.03 Control, Instrumentation, Gauges 210
23.16.03 WITNESSING OF ACCEPTANCE TESTING BY THE ENGINEER 210
23.16.03.01 MSSs and Control Panels 210
23.16.04 COMMISSIONING 210
23.16.05 POST COMMISSIONING OPERATION 212
23.16.05.01 Capacity Tests 212
23.16.05.02 Final Checks 212

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page No.
23.17.00 WARRANTY AND SERVICE 213

23.17.01 GENERAL 213
23.17.02 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD 213
23.17.03 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS 213
23.17.04 AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS 215
23.17.05 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE 215
23.17.05.01 All Plant 216
23.17.05.02 Air Handling Units 216
23.17.05.03 Vibration Isolators 217
23.17.05.04 Fans (Supply, Return and Exhaust) 217
23.17.05.05 Pumps 217
23.17.05.06 Air Handling Units, Filters, Fans, Electrical Switchboards, Refrigeration Pipework
(Split Systems Only), Vibration Isolators, Controls, Condensers 218
23.17.05.07 Refrigeration Pipework 219
23.17.05.08 Controls 219
23.17.05.09 Electrical Switchboards, Electrical Wiring 219
23.17.05.10 Plantrooms 220
23.17.05.11 Water Treatment 220
23.17.05.12 Corrosion Protection 220
23.18.00 SCHEDULES OF PERFORMANCE 222
23.18.01 GENERAL 222
23.18.02 CHILLERS – AIR COOLED 223
23.18.03 CIRCULATING WATER PUMPS 224
23.18.04 AIR HANDLING UNITS (INCLUDING HEAT RECOVERY) 225
23.18.05 AIR HANDLING UNITS (INCLUDING HEAT RECOVERY) FAN SCHEDULE 226
23.18.06 AIR HANDLING UNITS (WITHOUT HEAT RECOVERY) 227
23.18.07 CHILLED WATER FAN COIL UNITS (FCU’s) 228
23.18.08 COMPUTER ROOM UNITS – CHILLED WATER 238
23.18.09 FANS 239
23.18.10 MEDICAL AIR (4 BAR) / SURGICAL AIR (7 BAR) COMPRESSOR SCHEDULE 240
23.18.11 MEDICAL VACUUM PUMP SCHEDULE (450mm Hg) 241
23.18.12 ANAESTHESIA GAS SCAVENGING SYSTEM SCHEDULE 242
23.18.13 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS (EDH) 243
23.18.14 Plate HEAT EXCHANGERS (WATER TO WATER) 244
23.18.15 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES (MCCS) 245
23.19.00 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE 269

23.00.00 HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND BMCS
23.01.00 GENERAL CONDITIONS
23.01.01 INTRODUCTION AND INTENT
This Division of the specification contains the Technical Specification for the Mechanical
Services Trade section of the Building Tender / Contract Documents for the proposed building
and associated works. (This division may be separately bound for ease of reference only).
Tenderers' attention is directed to other sections of the Main Documents which may contain
items relevant to the Mechanical Services Trade, particularly with respect to the General
Conditions of Contract and Conditions of Particular Application, Special Conditions of Sub-
Contract, Preliminaries and Associated Works including Procurement and Contracting
Requirements and General Requirements. Failure to refer to other sections will be at the risk of
the Tenderer.
It is the intent of the Specification to call for finished work, installed, tested, ready for operation
and of guaranteed performance.
Any materials, apparatus etc., not shown on the drawings but which are mentioned in the
Specification or vice versa, shall be supplied and installed at no extra cost. Any services, item
of work or small detail not usually specified but inferred and necessary for the satisfactory
operation of the system or installation, shall be provided by the Sub-Contractor without any
additional expense to the Proprietor.
All materials and apparatus required for the work shall be new and of first class quality and
shall be furnished, delivered erected, connected and finished in every detail. Where no specific
type of quality of material is specified, a first class standard article as approved by the Engineer,
shall be provided.
Plant, equipment and services shall be of approved design, make and construction and shall be
complete with all accessories and fittings as specified and shown on the drawings, together with
any additional accessories and fittings not specifically mentioned but necessary for satisfactory
performance and shall be so arranged as to allow sufficient service access and space and shall be
safely and securely attached to and supported from the building structure.
All equipment and machinery shall be standard, catalogued item of reputable manufacture and
shall have certified performance data.
The performance of each item of plant when operating under the as installed conditions shall be
such that the system as a whole meets the requirements of this Specification. All performance
requirements specified shall be regarded as minimum values.
All materials and equipment shall be provided by a manufacturer experienced in such

equipment, have spare parts available in the UAE and have technical data and service facilities
readily available in the UAE.
All work carried out shall be performed in accordance with the best trade practice by competent
tradesmen.
23.01.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
The successful Tenderer (hereinafter referred to as the Sub-Contractor) for the works included
in this specification shall perform the said works under a Sub-Contract to the Proprietor.

GENERAL CONDITIONS
The Building Contract (hereinafter referred to as the Contract) is binding between the Proprietor
and the Builder only. The Builder is required under certain clauses in the Contract to make such
clauses binding between the Builder and the Sub-Contractor.
The sub-contract documents comprise:
(a) Mechanical Specification Ref .S040804D1MA dated 19 July 2006 Pages 1 to 270.
(b) Mechanical Drawings. As listed in Clause 23.02.03
(c) Particular Conditions: Procurement, Contracting and General Requirements Refer to

MAIN Contract documents.
23.01.03 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT
23.01.03.01 Sub-Contractor to Inform Himself
The Sub-Contractor shall be deemed to have carefully examined the Sub-Contract Documents
and Particular Conditions, the Specification and drawings. If the Sub-Contractor has any doubt
as to the meaning of any portion of these documents, he shall, before submitting a tender, set
forth the particulars thereof and submit them to the Engineer in writing, in order that such doubt
may be removed.
The Sub-Contract drawings are for tendering purposes, are diagrammatic only and do not
purport to show all the structural and architectural details. Any information involving accurate
measurement of the building shall be taken from the architectural and structural drawings and at
the building. Drawings of detail do not purpose to show the exact presentation of components
and the Sub-Contractor shall check with component suppliers for accurate information on the
actual component to be provided.
The Sub-Contractor shall make, without variation in cost to the Sub-Contract, all necessary and
minor changes or additions to co-ordinate with all other services and the building structure.
The Sub-Contractor must carefully consider local conditions, visit the site of the proposed work
and make any field survey necessary for proper planning and execution of the work. Failure to
do so shall in no way relieve the Sub-Contractor of responsibility for changes or unanticipated
costs due to field conditions.
After a tender has been accepted, the responsibility for any misunderstanding or error shall rest
with the Sub-Contractor.
The Sub-Contractor shall arrange his own work in co-operation with other trades so that all
work is installed to the best advantage. Where equipment is installed by this Sub-Contractor
without due regard to other trades, work of relocation of such equipment shall be performed by
the Sub-Contractor at his expense.
23.01.03.02 Drawings and Information Supplied by the Engineer
The drawings as mentioned above shall not be departed from in any way whatsoever, except by
the written consent of the Engineer. During the execution of the work one of the sets of prints of
the Sub-Contract drawings shall be available for reference where the work is to be carried out.
23.01.03.03 Definitions

GENERAL CONDITIONS
Where equipment or materials are specified by a specific manufacturer's product trade name and
model number and the words 'OR APPROVED EQUAL' added, it shall be understood to mean
that any other manufacturer's equipment which is comparable in performance, quality of
workmanship and material shall be acceptable. The interpretation of the term 'APPROVED
EQUAL' shall rest entirely with the Engineer whose judgement shall be final.
Where equipment or materials are specified by a specific manufacturer's produce trade name
and model number and the words 'OR APPROVED EQUAL' are not added, it shall mean that
this Sub-Contractor shall allow in his base tender for this equipment or material only.
The terms 'approved', 'directed' and 'selected' shall mean respectively approved, directed and
selected by the Engineer.
23.01.03.04 Obvious Work
If neither the specification nor the drawings contain any particulars of minor parts, which are
nevertheless clearly to be inferred, or minor parts, which are necessary for the completion of the
work under the Sub-Contract, all such parts shall be supplied and executed by the Sub-
Contractor without extra charge.
23.01.03.05 Equipment Variations After Tendering
If the Sub-Contractor proposes variations in equipment after the Sub-Contract has been signed,
he shall apply in writing to the Engineer for approval of alternatives and shall include full
technical information of the proposed variations, together with the cost of adjustment to the
Sub-Contract.
The Builder, if instructed in writing by the Engineer and Project Manager, shall authorise the
Sub-Contractor to use products of other manufacturers or other alternatives as applicable instead
of those specified.
23.01.03.06 Standards, Quality of Work and Materials, Submittals and Approval
All materials, fittings, accessories, apparatus and equipment shall be new (unless the re-use of
existing materials, etc. is specified) and of the first grade design and manufacture and shall
comply with all authority regulations and be in accordance with the current edition at date of
tender and of the following standards and codes of practice where applicable.
. British Standards (BS) and Codes of Practice (BSCP)

. NFPA Standards
. National Health Services (NHS) Technical Health Memoranda
. CIBSE Design Guides
. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)
. DEWA By Laws and Regulations
. Dubai Municipality By Laws and Regulations
. Dubai Civil Defence Requirements
. DIC Regulations and Guidelines
. Etisalat Regulations and Guidelines
. TECOM Regulations, Guidelines and Requirements
The Sub-Contractor shall submit nominated samples and/or technical literature, catalogues, shop
drawings, calculations, Certificates and Compliance Statements, for all accessories, fittings and
apparatus and equipment proposed for use in the work of this Sub-Contract to the Engineer
through the Builder for approval in accordance with the Main Contract Conditions. Only such
items which are approved shall be installed. Failure to comply with this provision may result in
the unconditional rejection of such items when inspected on site. Any rejected materials,

GENERAL CONDITIONS
fittings, accessories or apparatus shall be removed from the site within 24 hours of such
rejection.
The workmanship shall be of a high standard throughout and only first class tradesmen shall be
employed on the works in their respective trades.
If the Sub-Contractor executes any defective work or supplies any plant inferior in quality or
deficient in quantity of those specified, notwithstanding that approval may have previously been
obtained for such work or materials and notwithstanding that a progress payment may have been
made in respect thereof, the Engineer under the terms of the sub-contract may give to the
Builder and the Sub-Contractor notice in writing setting forth the defect and deficiency and such
condemnation or refusal shall be conclusive. The Sub-Contractor shall, at his own expense and
without undue delay, alter or remove and reconstruct the work or supply the materials in
conformity with the Sub-Contract.
For the purpose of inspection of any portion of the work already assembled, the Engineer may,
at any time during the currency of the Sub-Contract, direct the Sub-Contractor by notice in
writing, to dismantle any portion of the work.
23.01.03.07 Protection
Until the work is taken over, the Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the protection of the
work and for the proper fencing, guarding, lighting, flagging and watching of all works
comprised in the Sub-Contract and for the provision of temporary footways, guards and fences
as far as may be rendered necessary by reason of the work for the accommodation and
protection of foot passengers, vehicles and animals and of owners and occupiers of adjoining
property and of the public.
The Sub-Contractor shall, during the progress of the work, properly cover up and protect any
part of the work liable to injury by exposure to the weather and shall take every reasonable
precaution against accident or damage to work from any cause.
23.01.03.08 Tests
When the Sub-Contractor requires tests to be made, the Sub-Contractor shall give seven
working days notice in writing to the Builder and copy to the Engineer of the date on which
such tests will be made or such other period of notice as may be reasonable in the
circumstances. Unless otherwise agreed, the tests shall be commenced on such date and shall be
carried out in the presence of the Engineer.
Where the Sub-Contract provides for tests at the premises of the Sub-Contractor, the Sub-
Contractor shall provide, free of charge, such labour, materials, electricity, fuel, water, stores,
apparatus and instruments as may reasonably be demanded to carry out such tests in accordance
with the Sub-Contract and he shall give such facilities to the Engineer to carry out such tests.
All major equipment tested and commissioned on site shall be undertaken by a

qualified/certified Manufacturer’s Representative.
The Sub-Contractor shall allow for all expenses for up to two people for any nominated
manufacturers factory performance witness testing of major equipment.
Where the Sub-Contract provides for tests on the site, the Sub-Contractor shall provide, free of
charge electricity, fuel and water and shall make available the apparatus to be tested.
Where nominated the Sub-Contractor shall provide a Independent Specialist Third Party for
testing and commissioning.

GENERAL CONDITIONS
23.01.03.09 Provisional Sums
Provisional Sums are included to cover work which is known to be required in certain areas but
for which the details are not available. These sums shall be expended only as directed in writing
from the Proprietor. The whole or any unexpended portion at the date of completion shall be
deducted from the Sub-Contract price.
23.01.04 NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES (NOCS)
Copies of NOCs received from Authorities are enclosed as Appendix “B” for reference. The
Engineer does not assume any responsibility for the accuracy of the information provided in the
NOC or that shown on the drawings. The Sub-Contractor shall carry out necessary exploratory
works and investigations to obtain sufficient information as required.
23.01.05 AUTHORITY PERMITS, FEES, INSPECTIONS AND NOCS
The Sub-Contractor shall obtain all necessary authority statutory permits for their works and:
. Arrange for all inspections by the local authorities as and where applicable on an ongoing
basis throughout construction to avoid delays to the project.
. Submit all documentation required by the authorities for checking and approval.
. Comply with any changes requested by the authorities and notify the Engineer
immediately of such changes and obtain his approval.
. Pay all fees/charges as levied by the authorities for inspections, approvals, temporary
services, connections, etc.
. Liaise with the authorities and co-ordinate in compliance with their dictates the relocation
or rerouting of any existing services that may be required.
. On completion of works and approval present final Authority Approval Certificates to the
Engineers.

23.02.00 DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES
23.02.01 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT
The works covered by this specification comprises the supply, installation, testing,
commissioning and defects liability of materials, labour and equipment for the mechanical
services at the new specialist Urology, Nephrology, Diabetes and Diagnostic Imaging Centre on
the combined Plot No’s B/P42 and B/P43 within the Dubai Health Care City (DHCC) in Dubai,
United Arab Emirates.
The hospital building will comprise of four (4) major structural elements:
. Building A (Ground, Levels 1, 2, 4 and roof)

. Building B (Ground, Levels 1, 2, 3, 4 and roof)
. Covered Link Bridges between buildings
. Underground Car Park (Levels B1 and B2)
23.02.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS
The mechanical services works broadly covered by this specification covers the following
specific areas:
. Air conditioning of Medical and Administration areas.

. Amenities ventilation (WC, dirty utilities, staff change, etc.
. Car park ventilation.
. Kitchen ventilation.
. Grease arrestor exhaust.
. General exhaust.
. Primary chilled water connection via DHCC district cooling system (EMPOWER Energy
Transfer Station (ETS)).
. Medical gas systems, including oxygen, nitrous oxide, vacuum, medical air (4bar),
surgical air (7 bar) and anaesthetic gas scavenging system, plus a monitoring and alarm
system.
. Building Management Control System (BMCS).
23.02.03 DRAWINGS BY ENGINEER
The design drawings show approximate locations of fittings and items of plant only and shall be
considered as diagrammatic and a guide only. The drawings, specification and other documents
are intended to be mutually explanatory and complete, but all work entailed by the one, even if
not by the other, shall be fully executed.
This Specification shall be read in conjunction with the services drawings, architectural
drawings and all revisions, amendments, annexures and instructions issued by the Architect.
The following drawings shall form part of this Specification
Drawing No. Title
M-01 Legend, General Notes and Drawing List – Mechanical Services

M-02 Site Plan – External Services – Mechanical Services
M-03 Building A/B – Basement 2 – Mechanical Services Layout
M-04 Building A/B – Basement 1 – Mechanical Services Layout
M-05 Building A – Ground Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

DESCRIPTION OF SERVICES
M-06 Building B – Ground Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

M-07 Building A – First Floor – Mechanical Services Layout
M-08 Building B – First Floor – Mechanical Services Layout
M-09 Building A – Second Floor – Mechanical Services Layout
M-10 Building B – Second Floor – Mechanical Services Layout
M-11 Building A – Third Floor – Mechanical Services Layout
M-12 Building B – Third Floor – Mechanical Services Layout
M-13 Building A – Fourth Floor – Mechanical Services Layout
M-14 Building B – Fourth Floor – Mechanical Services Layout
M-15 Building A – Roof Plant – Mechanical Services Layout
M-16 Building B – Roof Plant – Mechanical Services Layout
M-17 Building A – Air Schematic – Mechanical Services
M-18 Building B – Air Schematic – Mechanical Services
M-19 Chilled Water Schematic – Mechanical Services
M-20 Detail Sheet 1 – Mechanical Services
M-21 Detail Sheet 2 – Mechanical Services
M-101 Legend, General Notes and Drawing List – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-102 Building A – Ground Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-103 Building B – Ground Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-104 Building A – First Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-105 Building B – First Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-106 Building A – Second Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-107 Building B – Second Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-108 Building A – Third Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-109 Building B – Third Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-110 Building A – Fourth Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-111 Building B – Fourth Floor – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-112 Building A – Roof Plant – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-113 Building B – Roof Plant – Medical Gases Services Layout
M-114 Medical Gases Services Schematic (Sheet 1)
M-115 Medical Gases Services Schematic (Sheet 2)
M-116 Medical Gases Services Details (Sheet 1)
M-117 Medical Gases Services Details (Sheet 2)
M-118 Medical Gases Services Spare
23.02.04 SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of works comprises the manufacture, fabrication, supply, delivery, installation,
testing, commissioning, guarantee and twelve months defects liability of all plant, systems and
services associated for the complete Mechanical Services installation.
The work shall include all necessary minor and incidental work required to implement the intent
and meaning of this specification and associated works.
Whether or not the words “supply and install” appear in this Specification or on the drawings,
unless clearly excluded, all items of equipment for the complete installation are required and
shall be supplied and installed. The scope of work shall include but not necessarily be limited to
the following:
23.02.04.01 Preliminaries
. Provision of detailed shop drawings for the complete installation.

. Provision of detailed drawings showing locations and sizes of all access panels required
for access to volume control dampers, fire dampers, fans, valves and the like and for
access required for cleaning and monitoring equipment.
. Provision of detailed drawings showing locations and sizes of all penetrations for ducts,
pipes, grilles, cast-in pipe anchor points, piping trenches, plinths, drain points and any
other items required to be provided by other trades.
. Provision of all holding bolts, sleeves, conduits and any other fittings required to be built
in during construction and provision of drawings showing their accurate location.
. Hoisting of all equipment not hoisted by the Building Trade.
. Provision of all required scaffolding not provided by Building Trade.
. Provision of detailed schedule listing nameplate and consumed kilowatts for the
mechanical services plant and equipment and submission to the Engineer prior to
submission of switchboard shop drawings or the placement of orders.
. Provision of samples of all fittings exposed to view to the Architect and Engineer for
approval.
23.02.04.02 Chilled Water Systems
Primary chilled water system incorporating the following:
. The primary chilled water source serving the hospital shall be via connection to the local
DHCC district cooling system administrated by EMPOWER.
Note that EMPOWER guidelines and requirements are to be strictly followed.
. An Energy Transfer Station (ETS) is to be located on basement level B1. Within the ETS
the demarcation of EMPOWER responsible work and building Mechanical contractor
responsible work will be defined as:-
- EMPOWER to supply and install all primary chilled water pipework, valves and
fittings up to and including the heat exchangers on the “plant” side as defined in
the EMPOWER guidelines.
. Three (3) off chilled water pumps as shown in the schedules.
. Feed and expansion tank.
. Chemical dosing system and corrosion inhibitor dosing with auto bleed-off.
. From connections on the ETS heat exchanger building “customer” side, the Mechanical
contractor shall be responsible for the chilled water piping system comprising steel
reticulation insulated pipework, valves, strainers, hangers, fittings, automatic air vents,
expansion joints for temperature expansion compensation, etc. Note that pipework routes
indicated on the drawings are diagrammatic and sufficient offsets and bends should be
allowed to suit the site installation.

Standby chiller system incorporating the following:
. One (1) air cooled screw chiller comprising screw compressor, evaporator vessel, air
cooled condensers, electrical and controls to form a complete system and as shown in the
schedule.
. Two (2) off chilled water pump as shown in the schedules.
. Chilled water pipework system comprising steel reticulation insulated pipework, valves ,
strainer, hangers, fittings, automatic air vents, expansion joints for temperature expansion
compensation, etc.
Note that pipework routes indicated on the drawings are diagrammatic and sufficient offsets and
bends should be allowed to suit the site installation.
Piping Systems – General Items
. All miscellaneous drain, overflow and bleed off piping from equipment.
. All domestic cold water make-up piping from valves supply points provided by
Hydraulic Trade.
. Chilled water feed and expansion make-up tank.
. Escutcheon plates around all pipework penetrations exposed to view.
. Concrete inertia base for each spring mounted centrifugal pump.
. For inertia base requirements refer to “Noise and Vibration” section and Acoustic
Specifications.
23.02.04.03 Air Conditioning Units (Air Handling Unit (AHU), Fan Coil Unit (FCU))
Operating Theatre AHUs and Sterile Store
. Five (5) off factory assembled low pressure, horizontal, draw through supply air handling
units as shown on the drawings and schedules. Each unit shall comprise motorised
outside air dampers panel pre-filter, deep bed bag filter, run around heat recovery coil,
main cooling coil and fan section with centrifugal fan. Access hatches are to be provided
between each element of the AHU plus duct mounted electric reheater.
Operating Theatre Exhaust Air (AHU) and Sterile Store
. Five (5) off factory assembled low pressure, horizontal draw through exhaust air handling
units as shown on the drawings and schedules. Each unit shall comprise motorised return
air damper, panel filter run around coil and fan section with centrifugal fan. Access
hatches are to be provided between each element of the AHU.
General Outside Air Supply AHU
. Two (2) off factory assembled low pressure, horizontal draw through supply air handling
units as shown on the drawings and schedules. Each unit shall comprise motorised
outside air dampers, panel pre-filter, deep bed bag filter, heat recovery run around coil,
main cooling coil and fan section with centrifugal fan.

General Exhaust Air (AHU)
. Two (2) off factory assembled low pressure, horizontal draw through exhaust air
handling units as shown on the drawings and schedules. Each unit shall comprise
motorised return air damper, panel filter, run around coil and fan section with centrifugal
fan. Access hatches are to be provided between each element of the AHU.
Fan Coil Units (FCUs)
. Multiple ceiling mounted chilled water FCUs refer to drawings and schedules. Each
FCU shall comprise panel filter, chilled water cooling coil and centrifugal fan.
Computer Room Air Conditioning Units (CRACs)
. Two (2) off floor mounted, down blow chilled water CRAC units as shown on the
drawings and schedules. Each CRAC unit shall comprise floor mounting frame, cooling
coil and centrifugal fan filter plus integral controls.
23.02.04.04 Ventilation Systems
. Ventilation supply and exhaust systems including fans, anti vibration mountings, filters,
ductwork, air terminals, insulation and the like as applicable to serve the following:
- Garbage exhaust (1 off)

- Pump and valve room supply
- Toilet exhaust system (2 off)
- Kitchen exhaust (1 off)
- Dilution pit exhaust (1 off)
- Grease arrestor exhaust (1 off)
- IT room gas suppression exhaust (1 off)
- Batch washer exhaust (1 off)
- Safety cabinets (3 off)
Car Park Ventilation System
. Car Park Ventilation System comprising two (2) off exhaust air fan, two (2) off supply air
fan, ductwork, dampers, grilles, sound attenuators, motorised dampers, CO monitoring
system.
23.02.04.05 Ductwork and Accessories
. All low pressure sheetmetal ductwork (supply, return, exhaust and outside air) for the air
conditioning and ventilation systems including fittings such as fire dampers, balancing
dampers, modulating dampers, flexible connections, access panels, flashings, supports.
. Supply air diffusion shall be carried out by means of linear slot diffusers and louvre faced
grilles. Return air shall be via direct ducting to spaces through egg crate grilles.
. All necessary supply air diffusers and grilles, exhaust and return grilles, linear diffusers
and bar grilles, accessories, balancing dampers, cushion heads etc.
. The supply for installation by the Building Trade of all door grilles as shown on the
drawings.

. Electric duct heaters including flow switches and safety controls. All heater contactors
shall be installed in the mechanical switchboards. Power and control wiring of all
electric heaters including provision of safety thermostats.
. Sound attenuators as shown on the drawings and schedules.
. Acoustic and thermal insulation of ductwork, supply and return air plenums as shown on
the drawings and described in the acoustic specifications.
. If there are any discrepancies between the mechanical drawings and acoustic
specifications regarding acoustic treatment of mechanical services, the acoustic
specification shall take precedence.
. Vibration isolation equipment including inertia bases, springs, waffle pad and associated
fittings to eliminate vibration to the structure as shown on the mechanical drawings and
described in the acoustic specifications. If there are any discrepancies between
mechanical drawings and acoustic specifications regarding vibration isolation of
mechanical equipment, the acoustic specifications shall take precedence.
. Fire rating of ductwork where shown on drawings.
. Overflashing to all ducts, pipes and the like penetrating external walls and roof
(underflashing shall be by Building Trade).
. Trim angles around all ductwork penetrations exposed to view.
. Cutting and sealing airtight of holes in sheetmetal work for the installation of smoke
detectors, including access panels, gaskets and sash catches for these detectors (smoke
detectors shall be supplied by the Fire Trade).
. Galvanised metal plinth surrounds and fixing in position for concrete plinths (concrete
pouring shall be by Building Trade).
23.02.04.06 Electrical
. All electrical equipment, wiring and controls provided under the Mechanical Trade as
described under the Specification clause “Electrical” including:
- Mechanical services switchboards as shown on the drawings and schedules

connected to emergency supplies.
- All circuit breakers, fuses, starters, relays, switches, timers, pilot lights and
isolating switches, safety controls, required for the satisfactory operation and
maintenance of the systems.
- All power wiring between the main switchboard in plantroom to floor by floor
sub-switchboard and motors, starters, heater and ancillary equipment including
termination and final connections.
- All control and interlocking wiring required to form a complete and operating
control system.
- Final connection of incoming control wiring from the fire indicator panel to
terminals in the mechanical switchboards and fire fan control panel including
relays.

- Complete control system including wiring from fire fan control panel (FFCP) to
mechanical switchboards.
- All power and control wiring and switchgear between circuit breakers in the lift
distribution boards and lift motor room ventilation system.
23.02.04.07 Controls Including:
. A complete automatic Direct Digital Building Management Control System as described

under the “Controls” section. The control system shall be complete in all aspects,
including full co-ordination between the Mechanical, Electrical and Control Trades to
ensure the correct location and functionality including:
- Installation of wells and tappings supplied by the Controls Trade.
- Co-ordination of room temperature sensor locations to suit final architectural

layouts.
- Provision of all pressure switches for fan and pump indications.
- Installation of all valves supplied by the Controls Trade.
- Provision of segregated and covered terminals in mechanical services

switchboards for wiring by the Controls Trade to control equipment.
- Co-ordination to ensure correct interfacing of systems and accurate cross

referencing of drawings. Attendance as required to prove correct operation of
interface points.
23.02.04.08 Commissioning and Certification including:
- Balancing and commissioning of air and water systems as required.
- Complete witnessed demonstration of the air and water balance figures.
- Complete commissioning, validation and demonstration of all medical gas

systems.
- Testing and demonstrating the performance of all systems.
. Painting of the completed installation including labelling of equipment, piping and

services as specified.
. Painting of all ductwork, pipework and equipment exposed to view or the weather to
colours nominated by the Architect.
. Provision of twelve months defects liability.
. The instruction of personnel who will be in charge of operating the plant after
commissioning.
. Provision of Operating and Maintenance Manuals, together with as-installed drawings as

specified including CAD files in DWG format.
. Permanent reduced scale diagrams in the plantrooms as specified.

. All work and materials not specifically mentioned in this specification but obviously
necessary for the proper and complete installation and operation of the services as
envisaged shall be deemed to have been included in the tender.
. The Mechanical Trade shall make good or pay all costs in respect of patching, filling,
painting, etc of holes and chases or damage caused by him or his Trade Contractors in the
execution of the Works. Such making good shall be of a standard to restore the surface to
its original condition.
23.02.05 ASSOCIATED WORKS
The following is a list of work associated with the mechanical services which shall be provided
by the Building Trade at no cost to the Mechanical Trade.
The Mechanical Trade shall supply and bear the cost of all detail drawings required for the
guidance of the other trades and shall be responsible for checking the associated setting out.
23.02.05.01 Building Trade Work
. Provision of airtight plantrooms as shown on the drawings to house mechanical plant,

complete with acoustic seals on acoustic doors and hobs at bottom of doors.
. Provision of waterproofing to the plantroom floors properly graded to floor wastes.
. Provision of concrete plinths for AHUs, pumps, chillers, fans and MCCs. The
Mechanical Trade shall provide galvanised metal plinth surrounds and fix in position for
pouring by the Building Trade.
. The building in of all pipe sleeves in masonry. Sleeves in concrete walls and slabs shall
be fixed in the formwork by the Mechanical Trade. Coring for pipework passing through
existing walls and slabs shall be by the Mechanical Trade.
. The Provision of all openings and making good in the building structure for the passage
of ducts, pipes and conduits to locations and dimensions provided by the Mechanical
Trade.
. The provision of trimmed openings in walls, ceilings and doors for diffusers, louvres and
grilles.
. Concrete kerbs 150mm high around all plantroom floor penetrations. Detail drawings
shall be provided by the Mechanical Trade.
. Kerbs for roof mounted fans, discharges and intakes. Detail drawings shall be provided
by the Mechanical Trade.
. Perimeter kerbs around the cooling tower enclosure. Detail drawings shall be provided
by the Mechanical Trade.
. Under flashing for all roof and external wall penetrations.
. Openings in ceiling bulkheads, walls and at other positions as required for adjustment,
access and maintenance of equipment. Detail drawings shall be provided by the
Mechanical Trade.

. The provision and installation of all sand and weatherproof outside air louvres complete
with birdscreens. Louvres and screens resistance to air flow shall not exceed 50Pa at a
face velocity of 2.5m/s. Louvre face areas are nominated on the drawings. Blank off
unused sections of louvres in a workmanlike manner where indicated on the drawings.
. Airtight fire rated masonry shafts through the building for the vertical distribution of
supply and return air. Duct penetrations in the walls of these shafts shall be sealed
airtight around by the Mechanical Trade.
. Fire rated shafts through the building enclosure ductwork for the vertical distribution of
mechanical ventilation systems and piping.
. Provision of 25mm undercut on doors designated on the drawings “U/C”.
. Provision of lift shaft smoke vents.
. Provision of natural ventilation to substation.
. Supply and installation of airtight and vapour sealed underfloor plenums and peripheral
walls for each area where floor mounted computer room units supply air to the false floor
space.
. The supply and installation of ventilating floor tiles or floor air grilles for each area
nominated as having underfloor plenums. Required area of grilles to be nominated by the
Mechanical Trade
. Provision of a platform for the chilled water feed tank in the roof plantroom.
. Weatherproofing of shafts for car park exhaust, diesel generator exhaust.
23.02.05.02 Electrical Trade Work
. Supply and installation of all lighting and power outlets in the plantrooms.
. General lighting and temporary power for construction purposes.
. High impact general purpose outlets adjacent to each mechanical switchboard.
. Wiring for lights in kitchen exhaust hoods, terminating at an on/off switch located on the
hood exterior or other approved location.
23.02.05.03 Hydraulic Trade Work
The following hydraulic services works shall be provided:
. Domestic cold water supply to the following locations terminating with a stop valve
capable of delivering the water quantity shown:-
- Adjacent the chilled water expansion tank (0.2 l/s @ 200 kPa)
- Adjacent to run around coil expansion tank (0.1 l/s @ 200kPa)
Final connection shall be provided by the Mechanical Trade.
. Provision of hose cocks in the chiller plantroom.
. Provision of trapped floor wastes in the plantrooms as shown on the drawings.

23.02.05.04 Fire Trade Work
The following fire services works shall/will be provided:
. Provision of fire indicator board (FIB), fire fan control panel (FFCP) plus all necessary
wiring and signalling from these panels to terminal blocks in each of the mechanical
services switchboards (MCC).
. Wiring from this terminal block, subsequent control and status indication of the
mechanical plant required to operate in fire mode shall be provided by the Mechanical
Trade.
. Permanent fire extinguishers in plantrooms.
. Smoke detectors required to initiate Smoke Control Actions, including wiring back to
FIB. Space and access panels plus all cutting of duct to these detectors shall be provided
by the Mechanical Services Trade in all ducts etc.
23.02.05.05 Lift Trade Work
. An interface panel, located in the LMR incorporating all high level alarm contacts,
associated with the lifts systems, required to be connected to the BMCS. Wiring between
the interface panel and the BMCS shall be carried out by the Mechanical Trade.
23.02.06 PERFORMANCE & GUARANTEE
23.02.06.01 Performance Criteria
The Mechanical Trade shall guarantee that the installed performance of the plant shall comply
with the specified requirements, shall control within the limits of the plant capacity and
maintain conditions within the limits of the plant capacity and maintain conditions within the
limits specified and that all equipment supplied is suitable for the duty.
All plant and systems shall be selected, installed and commissioned to ensure safe, continuous
and unattended operation under the following design criteria:
Outdoor design conditions:

Summer: 46.1°C db/29°C wb
Winter: 14°C db
Indoor design conditions:

Operating Rooms and Category 1:
Summer / Winter: 23°C db + 0.5°C, 50% RH + 10% RH
Category 2:
Summer / Winter: 23°C db +1°C, RH virtue of cooling coil
selection
Category 3:
Summer / Winter: 26°C db + 1.5°C, RH virtue of cooling
coil selection
Plantrooms:
Summer / Winter: 28°C + 1.5°C

Maximum Ambient for air cooled 50°C db

devices:
Occupancy load: 1 person/10m2
Heat gain from lighting: 20 W/m²
Heat gain from office equipment: 15 W/m²
Ventilation requirements:
Fresh Air:
- General 10 l/s/person
- Operating Theatre 20 AC
Minimum Supply Air Rate 5 l/s/m2
Extract Air:
- Patient/Consulting Room Toilets 10 AC
- Dirty Utility 10 AC
For other areas, refer to CIBSE Guide Book B
Acoustic performance:
- Operating Rooms NC 30-35
- Wards NC 30-40
- Offices NC 35-40
- Laboratories NC 30-40
- Consulting Rooms NC 30-40
- Corridors / Public Area NC 35-40
- Private Rooms NC 30-35
- Toilets / Dirty Utilities NC 40-45
- Plantrooms NC 50-55
“Noise and Vibration” selection
At site boundaries mechanical plant noise
shall not exceed DHCC specified levels.
Chilled water coil inlet temperature: 5.5°C

Chilled water coil outlet temperature: 14.5°C
Zoning
Perimeter zone depth: 3.5m
Maximum Air Velocities: m/s
Ductwork:
- Supply 6.0
- Exhaust car park riser 7.0
- Car park distribution 6.0
- Kitchen 10-12
- Toilet 6.0
- Flexibles 4.5
Grille Neck:
- Supply 2.5

- Exhaust 2.0
- Car park exhaust 3.0
Space Air Movement: between 0.1 and 0.25 m/s between

to 1.5m above floor level
Air Filters 2.5
Louvre Face
- Intake 2.5
- Discharge 3.0
Air Filtration %
- Filter bed No. 1 * 40%
- Filer bed No. 2 * 85%
- HEPA 99.99%
Note: * Based on ASHRAE, Chapter 7.
23.02.07 PRESSURISATION PHILOSOPHY
Fresh air requirements to each zone shall be generally determined by the level of dirty extract to
the same zone, or to a value as required for the levels of occupancy in each zone.
Areas requiring no dirty extract shall be pressurised (+ ve) positive or maintained neutral as
recommended by ASHRAE, Standard for Health Care Facilities, Table 3 of Chapter 7.
Areas requiring dirty extract, shall be negatively pressurised (- ve).
The buildings generally will be (+ ve) positively pressurised to minimise hot air infiltration.
23.02.07.01 Fire Philosophy and Smoke Management
Fire dampers shall be positioned in all supply and exhaust air ductwork crossing fire walls/slabs
excluding fire rated kitchen exhaust ductwork to the same rating as the wall/slab. They shall be
triggered from fusible link connections sited in the damper.
23.02.07.02 Air Intake System
Fresh air intake to each air handling unit shall incorporate a sand trap louvre and/or in line
filters within a sheetmetal plenum chamber.
Air intake louvres shall, in general, be located as far away as practical from extract louvres,
medical gas discharge points, drainage vent stacks, generator engine discharges and the like, to
avoid short-circuiting of dirty air.
23.02.08 BUILDING DETAILS
Any aspects of or revisions to the building design which in the opinion of the Mechanical Trade,
may affect the capacity of any of the air conditioning equipment and/or require amendments to
the tender design shall be brought to the attention of the Architect in writing. This shall be done
as soon as the changes become apparent so as not to disrupt the building programme.

23.02.09 GENERAL
23.02.09.01 Co-Ordination
The Mechanical Trade shall arrange its work in co-operation with all other trades.
The Mechanical Trade shall take site measurements, check all Architectural, Structural,
Plumbing and Electrical drawings in relation to his work and co-ordinate all work with other
trades.
Any cutting, patching, modifications to other trades work, etc., required as a result of the
Mechanical Trade failing to co-ordinate with the construction/project programme shall be
carried out at the Mechanical Trade’s expense.
23.02.09.02 Electrical
Immediately upon being awarded contracted to carry out the works the Mechanical Trade shall
list all powered devices. This list, together with the Mechanical Trade’s estimate of maximum
demand, shall be forwarded to the Engineer for checking against the specified incoming cable
sizes.

23.03.00 EQUIPMENT
23.03.01 GENERAL
All equipment shall be new and suitable for the duty with due allowance being made for
dynamic loads, stress concentrations, the operating temperature, pressure range and the
environment at site.
Equipment shall be of service proven design and have spare parts available from stock for parts
required for routine servicing and in Australia for all other parts.
Equipment shall be suitable for safe, reliable operation under installed conditions of service and
be fitted with approved guards over all safety hazards.
In all cases, equipment shall be protected against operation in conditions which could cause
damage to the equipment, danger to personnel, or damage to the building or its contents.
Uniformity of type, life expectancy, protection and finish shall be preserved with practicable
limits throughout the installation.
23.03.01.01 Site Climatic Conditions
Equipment shall be suitable for climatic conditions as defined in this specification.
23.03.01.02 Layout
Equipment shall be designed, constructed and installed with provision for easy access for
operation, servicing and maintenance.
The Mechanical Trade shall satisfy themselves that the equipment offered can comply with the
above requirements when installed in the positions allocated. Should any additional space or
services or revised layouts be required the Mechanical Trade shall submit details of their
requirements at the time of tendering.
23.03.01.03 Plinths
Plinths shall be provided under all floor mounted equipment and shall be 100mm high unless
detailed otherwise on drawings.
23.03.01.04 Fastenings
Fastenings shall be of the same or more corrosion resistant material than the materials fastened,
of a minimum number of varieties and sizes and suitable for fitting with commonly available
tools.
Screw threads shall be lubricated with graphite grease or similar long life lubricant.
Washers shall be fitted under nuts.
Fastenings subject to vibration shall be locked tight.
Self tapping screws shall not be used where periodic dismantling is required.
Bolts and set screws shall have hexagonal or Allen-keyed heads and shall be cadmium plated.
Drilling of structural elements for fixings shall comply with the Engineer's instructions.

EQUIPMENT
Power fasteners shall not be used without the approval of the Engineer in writing.
Blind rivets shall be of the pressure tight type, i.e. Imex. Rivets shall not be used where loaded
in tension.
Dowels shall be of the threaded, tapered type.
23.03.01.05 Lubrication
All moving parts shall be lubricated before placing them into service.
Lubricants shall be compatible with the duty.
Equipment shall be selected to minimise the variety of lubricants required.
23.03.01.06 Shafts
Shafts shall be designed to avoid critical speeds within the speed range 0-130% of operating
speed and shall be stepped to provide easy removal of bearings and attachments.
Attachments shall be securely and positively fixed.
Shafts operating in corrosive environments shall be given a uniform fine ground surface finish.
23.03.01.07 Bearings
Bearings shall be of the rolling element type wherever possible. Bearings shall be selected to
suit the duty as installed, be grease lubricated, provided with lubrication nipples of a common
type and size and be fully accessible for servicing and replacement.
Alignment shall be to within limits specified by the manufacturer.
Bearings shall have a 90% probability of a minimum life of one hundred thousand hours
continuous operation at the installed duty.
Bearing housings shall incorporate means of automatically relieving excess lubrication pressure
and be sealed against entry of moisture, dust or vermin.
Where bearings are mounted in pillow blocks, the blocks shall be dowelled to the supporting
structure after bearings have been aligned. The blocks shall also fully enclose the bearings and
be provided with shaft labyrinth seals and a port to channel excess grease for collection.
23.03.01.08 Couplings
Couplings shall be of the flexible non-lubricated type keyed to shafts, sealed against entry of
dust or dirt and be suitable for the installed duty.
Couplings shall only be installed on shafts aligned within limits recommended by the coupling
manufacturer. Allowances shall be made for changes in alignment which may take place
between idle and operating conditions.
Couplings shall be dynamically balanced to comply with the Specification Section 'Noise and
Vibration' and shall run smoothly in either direction without undue noise or vibration.

EQUIPMENT
23.03.01.09 Gaskets, Sealants and Mastics
Gaskets shall be of Klinger or Bells manufacture, installed in all flanged joints and shall be
selected and applied in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
Sealants and mastics shall be 3M, Norton, Nonporite, Fosters or approved manufacture applied
in all joints in piping systems and shall be selected and applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's instructions.
Non-setting mastics or sealants shall be applied to components subject to movement in

operation.
23.03.01.10 Direct Drives
Following final alignment and acceptance by the Engineer all equipment mounting feet shall be
dowelled to their bases.
23.03.01.11 Belt Drives
Belt drives shall be 'V' belt type selected to match driving power multiplied by a service factor
of 1.5 and shall consist of not less than two matched belts.
Pulleys shall be keyed or fixed with keyed taper-lock bushes to shafts, have belt grooves
accurately profiled and smoothly finished and have a pitch circle diameter exceeding the
minimum recommended for the belts supplied.
Pulleys shall be accurately aligned and dynamically balanced to comply with the Specification
Section 'Noise and Vibration'.
Motors shall be mounted with provision for belt adjustment.
23.03.01.12 Guards
Removable guards shall be fitted over belts, couplings, exposed rotating or reciprocating parts
and other safety hazards.
Guards shall permit speed measurements taken with a tachometer at pulley shafts without
having to remove the guards.
23.03.01.13 Installation
Equipment shall be bolted down, installed plumb and level in the locations specified or shown
on the drawings.
All equipment shall be commissioned in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions as well
as test operated in all possible modes and have any defects discovered made good to approval.
23.03.01.14 Lifting Lugs
Equipment shall be fitted with lifting lugs permitting it to be lifted as an assembly and
additional lugs for lifting any items which require periodic removal for servicing or
maintenance and exceed 50 kg in weight.
Lugs may be removable and if supplied separately shall be packed and labelled for easily
identified storage.

EQUIPMENT
The pressure requirements nominated for equipment detailed in the Schedules of Performance
are for tendering purposes only. The Mechanical Trade shall undertake a detailed analysis of
each system making due allowance for the resistance of all his selected equipment and allow for
these requirements in his tender.
23.03.02 GENERAL AIR HANDLING UNIT(AHU)
23.03.02.01 General
The air handling units shall be as manufactured by Carrier, Flakt, York, Trane or approved
equal.
The Contractor shall calculate the head and flow requirements for all AHUs based on actual
layouts as approved shop drawings and shall submit calculations for Engineer’s approval.
Quality Assurance
The equipment manufacturer shall strictly adhere to the following standards and specification:
. ISO 9001 certificate required.
. Equipment shall have Eurovent – Certificate, to be submitted by AHU manufacturer.
. Air handling unit manufacturer shall strictly adhere to CEN standards (Committee
European de Normalisation). Air handling units shall meet the Eurovent Certification
requirements of:-
- Casing strength to CLASS 2A

- Casing air leakage minus 400 Pa to CLASS A
- Casing air leakage plus 700 Pa to CLASS A
- Thermal transmittance CLASS T4
- Thermal bridge factor CLASS TB3
23.03.02.02 Casing
Unit Construction
The unit casings shall be of double skinned insulated panels 50mm thick in plantrooms 25mm
thick where located within the building. Casing shall be assembled with self supporting
modular panel elements with an integrated base frame made of zincated steel and sections along
upper sides of the units.
Sheet metal thickness for all units with fibre glass insulation shall be not less than 1.5mm for the
inner skin and 0.8mm for the outer skin and shall be made from zincated steel sheets or
anodised aluminium alloy construction. The outside of the outer skin shall be plastic coated to a
thickness of 0.15mm for additional protection. Inside and outside of panel walls shall be
complete smooth. The overall heat thermal transmittance (Heat Transfer Coefficient) shall not
exceed k=0.59 W/m2k.
The units with polyurethane injected foam insulation, the inner and outer panel thickness shall
not be less than 1.0mm.
All casing panels shall be insulated with glass fibre layer of 50mm thick or (pressure injected
foam insulation) incombustible with class of inflammability:

EQUIPMENT
. A1 in accordance to DIN 4102

. O in accordance to ISO 1182.2
The base frame of the units shall be made from sendzimir galvanised sheet metal for size with
largest dimensions up to 2500mm and hot dip galvanised U-profile for larger units. Service
doors shall be provided with special gasket and locking device. Access doors 400mm and larger
shall be provided with hinges and handles for external and internal opening.
Access doors with width smaller than 400mm shall be removable type fitted with quick release
flap turn lock with spring pressure arrangement. Sealant between panels shall be an anti-
fungicide sealant material.
All air handling units installed outdoors shall be fitted with aluminium weather canopy.
The AHU manufacturer shall guarantee that no condensation shall take place on the exterior of
panels. In the even that any condensation problems appear after installation, the Contractor
shall undertake all remedial measure to rectify and to the satisfaction of the consultants. Any
stacked or double height coils shall have separate drain pans to reduce carry over.
Acoustical insulation through the panel:
HZ MID FREQUENCY OCTAVE BAND

125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
14 25 28 27 29 31 34
23.03.02.03 Vibration Isolation
The air handling unit shall have internal vibration isolation system by mounting fan, motor and
drive assembly on spring isolators. The fan discharge shall be connected to the air handling unit
casing through canvas connection to prevent vibration transfer. In addition to the above, the
entire unit shall be mounted on additional vibration isolators.
23.03.02.04 Filter Section
Filter cells shall be of standard sizes and shall be obtained from reputed European manufacturer.
The filters shall be sealed against the filter frame using a permanently elastic gasket to a
standard compatible with the filter efficiency.
Pressure drop tappings shall be fitted to allow manometer or filter monitor to be connected.
Filter materials shall be flame-retardant, incombustible, non-odorous and offer no sustenance to
vermin. Each filter section has to be provided with manometer.
Pre Filters (Panel Filter)
The pre-filter material shall be synthetic, pleated to provide a large effective area and shall be
supported by a wire mesh and galvanised metal frame. The filter cells shall be suitable for side
withdrawal on the inspection side. The filter class shall be G4 as per EN 779.
Bag Filters
Bag filters shall be high performance extended area disposable type filters Class F-9. The filter
media shall have an average efficiency of 95%. Each filter shall consist of high density glass
microfibre media with a chemically bonded backer, individual pockets and a corrosion resistant
galvanised steel enclosing frame. The filter unit shall be completely factory assembled and
shall be classified by underwriter’s laboratories.

EQUIPMENT
Pockets shall consist of glass micro fibres chemically bonded to a reinforced backing. They
shall be sewn with a tapered stitch which forms a ‘V’ or wedge shaped pocket resulting in
uniform velocity in the passages of the air entering and air exiting sides of the filter. The
pockets shall be equipped with a minimum of 40 support points per square foot f the filter
media.
All stitching points shall be complete sealed with foam seal or equivalent. The pockets shall be
chemically adhered around the periphery of the galvanised steel retainers. Retainers shall have
rolled edges to reduce possible cuts to media or lacerations to installers.
Enclosing frame shall be construction of ‘J’ return channel of galvanised steel.
HEPA Filters
The HEPA filters may not necessarily be located within the AHU, but elsewhere in the same
supply air system. The following requirements comply.
Each filter shall be individually tested and certified to have an efficiency not less than (99.99%)
when tested with 0.3 micron thermally generated particulates. Filter class shall be EU-13.
This test shall be run at the rated 25mm WG capacity of the filter with the upstream aerosol
concentration of 80 + 20 micrograms per litre. The test aerosol concentration of a mass median
particle size of 0.3 microns with less than 1% by mass under 0.12 or over 0.5 microns.
Filter shall be constructed of all glass water proof media. It shall have a minimum tensile
strength of 0.5Kg/cm of width and shall retain 50% of its tensile strength when folded flat upon
itself. Media shall be waterproof to withstand, with no water penetration at 500mm water
column raised at a rate of 300mm per minute.
Filter shall be factory constructed by pleating a continuous sheet of media into closely spaced
pleats with safe edge aluminium separators. The filter’s sealing system shall encapsulate the top
and bottom of the filter pack and frame joints in a completely leak tight manner. The adhesive
shall be a two (2) part urethan. The filter frame shall be all metal 16 gauge corrosion resistant
zinc coated steel which is capable of maintaining its structurally rigid shape without mechanical
fasteners such as bolts, screws or rivets.
Overall dimensions shall be correct to within –3mm, +0mm and squareness shall be within
3mm. Filters shall be supplied with closed cell neoprene gaskets.
Filters shall be UL certified or approved by an equal certification authority. Pressure drop

across all filters shall be monitored at the BMCS.
23.03.02.05 Fan Assembly
Fans shall be double inlet double width multiblade type. Forward curved bladed fan shall be
used for system up to 700Pa total static pressure and backward curved non overloading type for
above 700Pa total static pressure. Construction shall be of galvanised steel sheet, fan blades
shall be rivetted to the centre hub and outer rings. Fan wheels shall be keyed to the shaft. Fan
wheels shall be painted with rust inhibiting primer. Fans shall be tested in accordance with
AMCA 300 – 85 and shall conform to DIN323, VDI2060 and ISO 1940/L. All fan wheels shall
be statically and dynamically balanced prior to fitting to air handlers. Fan scrolls shall be
constructed from the same material as the fan wheels. The fan assembly shall be rigidly
supported to the unit base frame by folded galvanised steel rolled steel angle. All fan shafts
shall be solid high carbon steel, fully sized throughout, the maximum rated fan rpm shall be
below the first critical fan shaft speed. Bearings shall be of the flange mounted, self-aligning

EQUIPMENT
grease lubricated ball type mounted on the outside of the unit casing and provided with
accessible lubricators, with a minimum 200,000 hour bearing life. All bearings shall be sized
with a minimum service factor of 4.
The factory furnished and installed motors shall be mounted inside the fan section.
Fan and motor assembly shall be mounted on a common galvanised framework entirely isolated
from the unit by spring vibration mountings. The fan discharge shall be isolated from the casing
by an airtight flexible duct connection. Fans shall not exceed a maximum outlet velocity of
15 m/sec.
23.03.02.06 Chilled Water Cooling Coil
Coils shall be constructed with 16 mm OD copper tubes with aluminium ripple fins. Tubes
shall be arranged in a staggered pattern with respect to air flow. Fins shall have full drawn
collars to provide a continuous secondary surface cover over the entire tube length. Tubes shall
be expanded out to fins to provide continuous primary and secondary contact for maximum heat
transfer efficiency. Coils face velocities shall not exceed 2.5 m/s for cooling coils and 3.5 m/s
for heating coils. Where cooling and heating coils are required in the same unit the heating coil
face dimensions shall be the same as the cooling coil.
All coils shall be tested with 2100 kPa and designed to operate at 1600 kPa working pressure.
Coil performance duties shall match those shown in the schedules. All coils shall be arranged in
the air handler in a vertical position with the air passing horizontally through the coil to ensure
removal of the condensate from the coil. Where coil height (cooling) exceeds 1067 mm
multiple coils shall be used with intermediate drain trays between each coil. Coils shall be
sealed to the air handler casing to ensure no by-pass or air around the coil occurs. Coil headers
and distributors shall be contained within the air handler casing.
The coil shall be mounted on guide rails for side withdrawal.
23.03.02.07 Drain Tray
The drain tray shall be thermally separated from the casing and a positive deep gutter shall be
provided within the tray profile for the full width of the air handler with a positive fall to the
gutter and the drain tray connection. The drain tray shall be stainless steel grade SS-316 either
integrated in the insulated base or placed under the coil section. Drain trays shall have drain
connections to the service side.
23.03.02.08 Motor Mounting
Motors shall be mounted on an adjustable hinged galvanised sheet steel base plate of sufficient
strength not to distort under the weight and torque loading of the drive. The base plate shall be
such that easy adjustment of the belt tension can be obtained without misalignment of drive. All
air handlers are to be test run in the factory prior to delivery. Test readings on bearing panel
vibration and motor amp draw are to be recorded and supplied on request. A minimum of two
matched belts shall be fitted to all air handlers with a motor size greater than 1.1 kW. All
pulleys are to be secured to the shafts with taperlock bushes and shaft keys.
Belt guards or screen protection door in fan section shall be provided in accordance with CEN
Standards.
23.03.02.09 Motors
All fan motors shall be TEFC with minimum IP54 protection and located in the air stream.
Motors shall have adjustable slide rails and shall have adequate capacity to allow for speeds to

EQUIPMENT
be increased if necessary to provide air flow rates 10% more than the specified design air flow
rates against corresponding increases in system resistances. Thermistors shall be included in
windings for motors 11kW and larger.
The fan motor shall be suitable for operating 380V, 3Ph, 50Hz electrical power supply. The fan
motor shall be wired to the safety switch or connection box.
The fan and motor assembly shall be isolated from the casing by means of anti vibration
mountings selected to suit the speed of the fan and designed for 90% isolation.
23.03.02.10 Electric Heaters
Where electric heaters are provided within the AHU, they shall be factory installed. The
electric element shall be wired so it will not activate unless the AHU fan is running. The
element shall be controlled by thyristor and a manual reset over heating trip switch. The electric
heating coil shall be heavy construction of 304L stainless steel with absolute safety finned
tubes.
23.03.03 HYGIENIC TYPE AIR HANDLING UNITS (HAHU)
23.03.03.01 General
Hygienic type AHUs shall be installed to service all the hospital areas. The units shall be as
manufactured by Carrier, Flakt, York, Trane or equivalent. The unit capacity and sections detail
shall be as shown on drawing and schedules. The Contractor shall calculate the head and final
flow requirements for all AHUs, based on actual layouts as approved on ship drawings and shall
submit calculations for Engineer’s approval.
The unit must be specifically selected for use in hospitals.
The unit capacity and sections detail shall be as shown on drawings.
All equipment shall be covered by a report from a Specialist in Hospital Hygiene as suitability
to meet complete requirements of Hospital Hygiene.
23.03.03.02 Construction and Access to Components
Hygiene type AHUs generally shall be similar in construction to General AHUs listed under
earlier clauses, with the following exceptions:
. Hygienic type AHU components shall be capable of being easily removed through large
access doors. These doors shall have special rubber gaskets and aluminium handles with
position indicator.
. Doors shall open over the whole length of the section in order to allow the free flow of
disinfectant into the external drain (all sections shall be provided with such doors).
. The components inside the units shall be easily and safely accessible and removable by
one person. Access to all sections utilising simple manually operated hinged doors fitted
with quick release Cremorne bolting lock (espagnolette lock), except for coil section with
side connection removable panel with bakelite knobs and handles will be used. This
arrangement will facilitate the removal of all internal ports such as filters with pressure
seals, heating coils, moisture eliminator and splitters from silencer section, complete fan
assembly, etc.

EQUIPMENT
. The fan shall be flush mounted utilising special rubber connector to simplify removal of
complete motor and fan assembly for purpose of cleaning of unit. The fan and motor
shall be located on stainless steel assembly which can be slid out over stainless steel rails.
. Outside drain in the form of channel running the whole length of the unit shall be
provided to remove liquids used for disinfecting the unit.
. All internal surfaces of the air handling units shall be smooth. The units shall be double
skin construction with the inner skin of stainless steel Grade SS – 316. Also all internal
blanking plates, filter frames, etc. shall be made in stainless steel Grade SS - 316.
. Fan sections, filter sections shall be fitted with inspection ports and internal lighting
wired to external isolating switch.
. Coils shall be mounted on guide rails for side removal. Header connection shall be on
side with screwed flanges outside the units and easily removable side panels.
Coils shall be made with smaller face area than standard coil for facilitating removal and
cleaning of coil section.
. For silencers, the sound insulating material shall be moisture protected mineral wool.
. No material shall be used that encourages the growth of bacteria and fungi in the
presence of moisture.
. Units in this section should be covered by a report from a specialist in hospital hygiene as
to the suitability of these units to meet completely the requirements of hospital hygiene.
Units shall comply with DIN 1946 Part 4.
. Extended lube line for fan bearing will not be fitted.
. The AHU shall be controlled and monitored at the BMCS as indicated on the data point
schedule.
. Casing air leakage shall be Class B.
23.03.04 FAN COIL UNITS (FCU)
23.03.04.01 General
Fan coil units (FCU) shall be as manufactured by Carrier, Flakt, York, Trane or equivalent. The
capacity and selection details shall be as shown on drawings and schedules.
23.03.04.02 Construction
Units shall be complete with double skinned insulated casing panels 25mm thick filters(s),
chilled water coil(s), fan(s), motor(s), extended drain pan stainless steel Grade SS – 316 and all
required wiring, piping, controls and special features.
Horizontal base unit with plenum for concealed installation shall have a factory installed,
galvanised steel plenum section and throw away filter. The plenum shall be either bottom or
rear return, lined and include a removable panel to provide an access to the fan/motor assembly.
Horizontal cabinet unit for exposed installation shall be constructed of steel with champagne
beige re-coatable baked enamel finish. Cabinet shall be lined with 12mm thick glass fibre

EQUIPMENT
insulation and have removable bottom access panel. Unit shall include hinged bar type return
air grille on rear of unit with throwaway filter and integral double deflection supply grille.
Fans shall be direct driven, double width fan wheels shall have forward curved blades and be
statically and dynamically balanced.
Fan motors shall be 3-speed permanent split capacitor type with sleeve type bearings and over
sized oil reservoirs.
Standard base unit shall be equipped with a 4-row coil for installation in a 2-pipe system. Coils
shall have 12mm copper tubes, aluminium fins bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion
and have a working pressure of 16 bar. Each coil shall have a manual air vent and sweat
connections for copper tubes.
The drain pan shall be constructed of galvanised steel extending the entire length and width of
the coil(s) including below FCU control valve and isolating valve arrangement and pitched for
drainage. The inside surface of the drain pan shall be coated with closed cell fire retardant foam
insulation. An extension drain pan shall be provided for installation at the job site under the
valve package.
Unit manufacturers shall have ISO 9001 certification.
Insulation and adhesive shall meet NFPA-90A requirements for flame spread and smoke
generation. All equipment wiring shall comply with NEC requirements.
Unit capacity ratings shall be certified in compliance with industry Standard 441-66 for
equipment, testing and rating of fan coil air conditioners as administered at ARI Entire unit shall
be Underwriter’s Laboratory listed and comply with National Electric code. When units do not
have ARI certified ratings, the Contractor must perform capacity tests of the completed
installation which are witnessed by the Engineer, to confirm specified capacity is achieved
while not exceeding specified sound power levels.
Units shall be provided with 25mm thick throw away filters.
Control valves shall be modulating type two way.
For silencers, the sound insulating material shall be moisture protected mineral wood.
No materials shall be used that encourages the growth of bacteria and fungi in the presence of
moisture.
Units shall be monitored and controlled at the Building Management System.
23.03.05 COMPUTER ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
23.03.05.01 General
The CRAC units shall be as manufactured by Liebert, Stultz or equivalent. The unit capacity
and selection details shall be as shown on drawings and schedules.
23.03.05.02 Precision Air Conditioning Systems
The computer room air conditioning equipment shall be designed specifically for precision
environmental control.

EQUIPMENT
The units shall produce not less than the capacities nominated at the specified conditions as
tabulated.
23.03.05.03 Cabinet Construction
The frame and panels shall be constructed of heavy gauge zinc-anneal corrosion resistant sheet
steel.
The fan section shall be insulated with a minimum of 25mm insulation fire rated to Australian
Standard 1530 (indices 0,0,0,3).
The cabinet shall be powder coated with Dulux “grey nurse” colour and have a textured finish.
23.03.05.04 Chilled Water Coil
The chilled water coil shall be constructed of copper tubes and louvred aluminium fins, with the
frame and drip trays fabricated from heavy gauge aluminium. The drip trays must be easily
removable for cleaning. The cooling coil shall be a maximum of 5 rows deep. The distance
between the fins should be not less than 1.8mm and the face velocity shall be not more than
2.5m/s.
23.03.05.05 Fans
The fans shall be of the forward curved centrifugal type, double width, double inlet and
statically and dynamically balanced. Each fan shall be directly driven by a multi-speed high
efficiency motor.
23.03.05.06 Floor Stands
Each unit shall come with its own floor stand. The stand shall be:
- Suitable for the weight of the unit such that it is in no way distorted when supporting the
unit.
- Be constructed such that it is readily integrated into the false floor.
- Have height adjustable legs (minimum 15mm adjustment) to provide some tolerance if
the floor level is slightly uneven.
23.03.05.07 Service Area
The unit shall be serviceable from the front only with a maximum service space required of
600mm.
23.03.05.08 2-Stage Operation
The unit shall be capable of providing 0%, 50% or 100% cooling capacity.
23.03.05.09 Filtration
Filtration shall be provided by dry media disposable filters capable of filtering air to 20%
efficiency (AS1324) and withdrawable form the unit front.
23.03.05.10 Controls

EQUIPMENT
The standard controls shall be a microprocessor based, programmable logic controller. The
controls shall have separate indication of operating modes (cooling, heating, humidifying and
dehumidifying), alarm conditions for both units (high temp. alarm, low temp. alarm, high
humidity alarm, a/c units not operating, underfloor water detection), and numerical displays for
temperature and relative humidity. The display and indication shall be visible on the front
without removing any external panels. Local and remote alarms will be triggered if an alarm
condition is reached.
23.03.06 AXIAL FANS - DIRECT DRIVE
23.03.06.01 General
Axial fans shall be as manufactured by Woods, Nuaire or equivalent. The unit capacity and
selection details shall be as shown on drawings and schedules. The Contractor shall calculate
the head and flow requirement for all fans based on actual layout as approved shop drawings
and shall submit calculations for Engineer’s approval.
All fans shall be selected for maximum static efficiency and quiet operation. Each fan shall
have a minimum stable operating range exceeding plus or minus 20% from the design air
volume and estimated static point on the performance curve.
Fan tests and performance curves shall be in accordance with BSS-848. All performance
information shall be based on such tests.
Each fan impeller shall be fitted with its final drive pulley and then statically and dynamically
balanced at the manufacturer’s works at design speed. Any fan which is assembled at the site
shall be rebalanced after assembly.
All fans shall be designed, particularly in regard to critical shaft speeds, rotor design, bearing
selection V-belt drive selection and motor rating, to allow fan speeds to be increased to provide
air flow rates 10% more than the specified design air flow rates against the corresponding
increased system resistances.
All fans are to be mounted on or from vibration isolators. All ductwork connected to the fans
shall be attached via flexible canvas connections ensuring that no vibration is transmitted to the
structure, building or any associated ductwork and fittings.
Fan motors shall be provided with grease packed ball or ball and roller bearings designed for a
calculated life of 100,000 hours under the particular duty of the fan. Dust seals shall be
provided for all bearings. Low pressure, dustproof, grease caps to an accessible location shall
be provided on all bearings.
Motors shall be of the type, minimum horsepower and current characteristics specified. All fan
motors shall be capable of handling 10% more air than that specified against the increased
system resistance.
Non-overloading aerofoil fans shall be adjustable pitchcast aluminium alloy impellers or may
have adjustable pitch polypropylene impellers on fans up to 300mm diameter. All impellers
shall be statically and dynamically balanced and Certificate shall be forwarded.
Non-overloading aerofoil fans shall be fitted with inlet and/or outlet cones where shown on the
drawings and where required for satisfactory operation.
All axial fans shall be as manufactured by Fantech or approved equivalent.

EQUIPMENT
Fan motors shall be provided with grease packed close tolerance ball bearings designed for quiet
operation and a calculated life of 100,000 hours under the particular duty of the fan. Dust seals
shall be provided for all bearings. All bearings shall be fitted in housings that are provided with
identical grease nipples equal to Tecalamit type H. The grease nipples shall be located in
accessible positions and piped to the bearing housings.
23.03.06.03 Motors
Motor frame sizes and shapes shall be the same as those used by the manufacturer as a basis for
the catalogued air quantity and noise level data.
Each motor shall be of the type, minimum kW rating and current characteristics as specified in
the Motors and Starters Schedule. All fan motors shall be capable of delivering 10% more air
through the system than the quantity specified.
23.03.06.04 Impellers
Each fan shall have an aerofoil blade impeller and the blade pitch shall be readily and accurately
adjustable on site. All impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Certification of
balance shall be forwarded to the Engineer. The fan design shall be such that the adjustment of
the blade pitch on site shall not affect the static or dynamic balance.
23.03.06.05 Casings and Assembly
Each fan shall have a flanged casing extending for the length of the fan and motor (unless
specified or shown otherwise), complete with one or more airtight access doors suitably placed
for easy fan inspection. Fans 300mm diameter or less may have casings without access doors.
Each fan shall be fitted with inlet and/or outlet cones as shown on the drawings and these cones
where required shall be as supplied by the fan manufacturer. Open fan intakes and discharges
shall have heavy gauge galvanised wire mesh guards fitted.
Each guard shall be easily removable for access and shall be designed to prevent accidental
contact with moving parts under the full weight of a man. The guards shall be as supplied by
the fan manufacturer. Each fan assembly shall be supported by vibration isolators.
23.03.06.06 Factory Finish
Each fan shall be painted throughout with one coat of red lead and two finishing coats of grey
enamel.
23.03.07 CENTRIFUGAL FANS
23.03.07.01 General
Centrifugal fans shall be as manufactured by Woods Heliers Ventilation or equivalent. The unit
capacity and selection details shall be as shown on drawings and schedules. The Contract shall
calculate the head and flow requirements for all fans based on actual layout as approved shop
drawings and shall submit calculations for Engineer’s report.
23.03.07.02 Performance and Type
Each fan shall deliver the air quantity specified in the Fan Schedule against the resistance of the
installed system. Each fan shall be of either the S.I.S.W. or D.I.D.W. type as noted in the

EQUIPMENT
schedule and shall have angle of discharge as shown on the drawings. Each belt driven, single
inlet fan shall have an overhung impeller with the bearings accessible from the drive end similar
to arrangement 1. Each impeller shall be non-loading, backward curved flat blade type (or
backward curved aerofoil blade type) unless indicated in the Fan Schedule to be a forward
curved (F.C.) multivane type.
Each fan shall be provided with double row bearings designed for a calculated life of 100,000
hours under the particular duty of the fan. Dust seals shall be provided for all bearings. All
bearings shall be of the self-aligning spherical roller type where the wheel shaft diameter is
30mm or larger. Self-aligning ball bearings shall be provided where the wheel shafts are
smaller than 30mm diameter. All bearings, whether similar to those manufactured by S.K.F.
Ball Bearing Co Ltd. Housings with external mechanical grease valve fittings shall not be
acceptable and all bearing housings shall be fitted with identical grease nipples equal to
Tecalamit type H. The bearing housings shall be dowelled to the bearing support members in
the factory after test running of each fan.
23.03.07.04 Drives
Fans shall be belt driven by a minimum of two V-belts except where direct driven fans are
specified. Belts shall be sized for a minimum of 125% of the motor kW rating and shall be
sufficient to transmit the starting torque of the motor without slip. "A" section belts may be
used on motors up to 1.5kW. "B" section belts shall be used above 1.5kW. Belt sections shall
be in accordance with AS 2784. All vee belt pulleys shall be keyed to the shaft. Tapered bush
pulleys are preferred. Motor slide rails of an approved type shall be provided for easy
tensioning of belts as required.
23.03.07.05 Motors
Motors shall have a minimum kW rating as nominated in the Fan Schedule. Motor ratings are
nominated as a basis for tendering only and shall be checked before ordering to ensure that they
are sufficient for the duty. All fan motors shall be selected of sufficient kW rating to delivering
10% more air through the system than the quantity specified. Motors shall comply with all
requirements specified under ELECTRICAL.
23.03.07.06 Guards
A belt guard shall be fitted on each belt driven fan. S.W.S.I. fan drives shall be fitted with a
rigid sheetmetal belt guard. D.W.D.I. fan guards shall be similar but shall have sides of 1.6mm
x 18mm flattened expanded metal or 12mm x 1.6mm diameter woven wire mesh screens. The
fixed section of the belt guard shall be bolted to the fan scroll, pedestal or baseplate. The
removable section shall be screwed to the fixed section with hexagonal headed machine screws.
Self tapping screws will not be accepted. Accessible fan inlets and discharges shall be fitted
with wire mesh guards to the Engineer's approval. All guards shall be easily removable for
service and shall be designed for minimum restriction to air flow.
23.03.07.07 Assembly and Mounting
Where spring vibration isolators are specified in the schedule for a particular fan, the motor, fan
and drive shall be mounted on a rigid integral steel chassis and the whole assembly supported on
the spring isolators. No flexing of the chassis frame between motor and fan will be permitted.
Where rubber vibration isolators are specified, the motor may be mounted on the fan in a
manner approved by the Engineer and the entire assembly supported on the isolators. Vibration
isolators shall be sized for the deflections indicated in the Schedule. Spring isolators shall be
mounted on rubber pads and when loaded shall have a length approximately equal to their

EQUIPMENT
diameter. When installing fans on site, each support point shall be carefully shimmed to ensure
that the fan housings are not distorted. All fan wheel and shaft assemblies shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. Certification of balance shall be forwarded to the Engineer.
All fans having an impeller with a diameter greater than 1,200mm shall have a horizontally split
casing.
The air inlet/s shall b fully streamlined for minimal resistance with removable inlet ‘bells’.
Motorised inlet guide vanes shall be provided where scheduled.
The fan scroll shall be manufactured from heavy gauge sheet steel with reinforcement where
necessary, to achieve structural rigidity and prevent drumming and vibration during operation.
The fan impeller shall be constructed of steel, designed and constructed to withstand centrifugal
forces of rotational speeds at least 20% in excess of the duty specified.
The relative shapes and clearances between fan inlet bells and impeller shall be similar to the
tested prototype on which the manufacturer's ratings are based.
23.03.08 IN LINE CENTRIFUGAL FANS
In line centrifugal fans shall be Woods, Nuaire or equivalent.
Fans shall deliver air quantities specified against the resistance of the system as installed.
Fans shall be selected to ensure noise levels specified are not exceeded.
Each fan shall be provided with self-aligning ball bearings, sealed for life, or with accessible
grease nipples, designed for a calculated life of 100,000 hours under the particular duty of the
fan.
Impellers shall be backward curved centrifugal design and driven by speed controllable external
rotor motors with integral thermal protection.
Units shall incorporate soundless four-step speed control, enabling direct connection to any one
of the four speeds.
Fans shall be mounted on anti-vibration isolators to 95% efficiency.
23.03.09 PROPELLER FANS
All fans shall be as manufactured by Woods, Nuaire or equivalent. Each fan shall be a
resiliently mounted, direct driven propeller fan and shall deliver the air quantity specified in the
Fan Schedule against the resistance of its system.
The overall sound power level of the fan shall not exceed the level nominated in the Fan
Schedule at the specified duty. Where the fan noise level is not specified then the overall sound
power level shall not exceed the duty. Where the fan noise level is not specified then the overall
sound power level shall not exceed the level nominated in the manufacturer's catalogue data at
the specified duty.
Each fan impeller shall be statically and dynamically balanced and shall be driven by a totally
enclosed motor that satisfies the minimum power and current requirement as specified in the
Motors and Starters Schedule.

EQUIPMENT
All bearings shall be provided with dust seals and where grease nipples are provided they shall
be Tecalamit type H.
The fan and motor shall be isolated from the mountings by rubber isolators.
The fan and all its components and fixing shall be made from corrosion resistance materials or
provided with a suitable corrosion resistant finish.
23.03.10 SILENCERS - ACOUSTIC ATTENUATORS
23.03.10.01 General
Packaged type sound silencers shall be to size, numbers, length, location and type as shown on
drawings and listed in the Schedule of Performance to provide the necessary attenuation and
shall not exceed the pressure drops specified for the air quantity handled.
23.03.10.02 Silencers - Duct Mounted Type
The silencers shall be as manufactured by Gulf Acoustic or equivalent.
Each silencer shall comprise a galvanised steel case with internal sound absorbing panels. Each
panel shall consist of a fibreglass high density rockwool fill retained with fire proof fibreglass
scrim encased in a 0.6mm thick perforated galvanised steel casing. The case shall be made from
not less than 1.6mm thick galvanised steel with continuous welded or grooved seams and with
galvanised angle iron frames at each end fixed to the case. The case shall be suitably braced so
as to be completely airtight and free from drumming or distortion at all pressures up to 1.25 kPa.
Matching angle frames shall be supplied and shall be jig drilled so as to be interchangeable.
The casing and cells shall have a smooth, non moisture absorbent finish, with all edges neatly
butted. Raw edges, fixing straps or screws are not to protrude into the air stream.
Silencers selected shall have cross sectional dimensions as near as possible to the ducts to which
they join.
23.03.11 FILTERS
23.03.11.01 General
Air filters shall be installed where shown on the drawings and shall be of the types as scheduled.
Each filter shall be sized capable of handling the scheduled air quantity at the maximum
effective face velocity specified and its performance characteristics shall meet the requirements
specified hereafter for the scheduled filter type.
All filters and components shall be readily available in Dubai and shall be manufactured by
AAF or equivalent.
Filters shall comply with the requirements of ASHRAE Chapter 7 as appropriate and prototypes
shall have been tested by a NATA registered laboratory.
Filters shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations complete with all
accessories necessary for their proper performance. All filter connections to adjoining

EQUIPMENT
equipment, panelling or support framing shall be sealed airtight to prevent any air by-passing
the filter media.
Adequate access shall be provided to each filter for inspection and maintenance (and removal if
applicable).
Filter sizes where nominated in the schedule have been used on the drawings to indicate the
connecting sizes of the adjoining equipment, ductwork or apparatus housing. Make any
adjustment to accommodate filters sized differently to those scheduled.
23.03.11.02 Dry Media Filters - Deep Bed Type, Medium Efficiency
When tested in accordance with ASHRAE test dust numbers 1 and 4 each filter cell shall have a
clean resistance of 42 Pa, an initial arrestance efficiency of not less than 23% to no.1 test dust
and 90% average efficiency to no. 4 dust and no. 4 dust holding capacity at final resistance of
1200g at 125Pa. Certified test results by a NATA registered laboratory for the above test shall
be required to be produced before a filter will be accepted.
The filter media shall be mounted on a supporting frame of minimum 3.2mm wire which shall
clip into a steel holding frame to provide a positive seal with no air by-pass. The holding
frames shall be of minimum 1.2mm steel and shall be bolted together with a non-hardening
mastic bead or neoprene gasket applied between frames to form an airtight seal. Where
necessary to form a rigid assembly of holding frames, intermediate channel stiffeners shall be
installed. The entire assembly shall be sealed to prevent any air by-passing the filter media.
The steel holding frame and wire supporting frames shall be either hot dipped galvanised, epoxy
coated or given a high quality enamelled paint finish after proper etch priming.
A pressure gauge of approved design and with suitable scale range shall be installed on the
outside of each conditioner housing at the filter bank to indicate filter air resistance.
23.03.11.03 Dry Media Filters - Dry Media, Panel Type
Filters shall be fixed panel filter.
When tested in accordance with ASHRAE standard test dust numbers 2 and 4 each filter cell
shall have an initial arrestance efficiency of not less than 80% to no.2 test dust and 73% average
efficiency to no. 4 dust and a minimum dust holding capacity of 133 grams per 595 x 595 cell at
an initial resistance of 51Pa, final resistance of 177Pa when tested at 2.54 m/s face velocity.
Certified test results by a NATA registered laboratory for the above test shall be required to be
produced before a filter will be accepted
The filter media shall be mounted in a mounting frame of welded aluminium which shall clip
into a steel holding frame to provide a positive seal with no air by-pass. The holding frames
shall be of minimum 1.2mm steel and shall be bolted together with a non-hardening mastic bead
or neoprene gasket applied between frames to form an airtight seal. Where necessary to form a
rigid assembly of holding frames, intermediate channel stiffeners shall be installed. The entire
assembly shall be sealed to prevent any air by-passing the filter media.
The steel holding frame and wire supporting frames shall be either hot dipped galvanised, epoxy
coated or given a high quality enamelled paint finish after proper etch priming.
23.03.11.04 Panel Filters - Grease Type
Filters to be as manufactured by AAF or equivalent. At rated capacity the filter has an average
efficiency of 90% to the ASH and AE method of test.

EQUIPMENT
The filter media consists of a 50mm thick honeycomb of specially corrugated light gauge
aluminium sheet enclosed in an aluminium frame.
The filter must always be installed with its face at no more than 30° from the vertical to
minimise the possibility of grease dripping off the filter face.
Grease filters must be cleaned regularly to minimise the possibility of collected grease dropping
back in semi-liquid form off the cell. Cleaners containing caustic must not be used as they will
attack the aluminium from which the unit is made.
23.03.11.05 Absolute Filters – HGPA Filter Module
Filters to be as manufactured by AAF or equivalent.
Filter modules shall be manufactured to conform with ASHRAE standard. Modules shall be
tested by a NATA registered laboratory and the manufacturer shall provide a certificate showing
test results for the purpose of establishing compliance with ASHRAE standard. Filter modules
shall be individually tested by a NATA registered laboratory and filtering medium shall
conform with US MIL Standard 510790.
Absolute filter panels shall be capable of meeting (Class 350 air cleanliness).
The filter modules shall comprise an absolute filter housed in an attractively styled cabinet. The
combination shall ensure the effective removal of airborne contamination from air drawn in by
air conditioning system and passed through the filter to the working environment.
Construction of the filter shall be of zimcseal steel finished with white enamel.
The absolute filter shall carry the standard mark of Standards Australia certifying strict
conformity with ASHRAE standard. The filtering media should be pleated into separators. The
media pack is sealed to a sturdy metal frame with polyurethane foam.
23.03.12 ROOM PRESSURE STABILISATION MONITORING
Room pressure monitors shall be provided in operating theatres and in areas as indicated on
drawings to maintain positive and/or negative pressures within the relevant areas. The unit shall
have pressure sensor inside and outside the room to measure pressure difference and enable the
operation of the pressure stabilisation motorised dampers. The unit shall have temperature and
humidity sensor and the following features:
. The system could be activated for a desired mode (positive or negative) by a simple
switch.
. Display room pressurisation, temperature, pressure, humidity level and alarm conditions.
. Where indicated on drawings, this should be able to control air flow through the pressure
by-pass transfer duct to maintain the desired pressure.
. Shall be interfaced with the BMCS.
23.03.13 ELECTRIC MOTORS

EQUIPMENT
Unless otherwise specified in the equipment specifications, all motors supplied and installed as
a part of mechanical works shall confirm to the following requirements:
. Motors shall be of high efficiency and shall be constructed and type tested in compliance
with relevant sections of BS. 4999 and BS. 5000. These shall be of totally enclosed fan
cooled (TEFC) type to IP54 either with foot-mounting or flange-mounting suitable for its
application. Unless otherwise specified, motors shall be designed for continuous running
duty type S1 for operation during 3 years without maintenance. They shall be of such
size as to drive adequately their associated equipment under the range of operating
conditions, without overloading.
Windings shall be insulated with Class F insulation material to BS. 2757 and temperature rise of
windings shall be Class B.
23.03.14 DIFFUSERS, REGISTERS AND GRILLES
23.03.14.01 General
Diffusers, registers, grilles and other air terminal fittings shall be of the types, sizes, numbers
and positions as shown on the drawings and/or specified hereafter, for all air conditioning and
ventilation systems. The terminal fittings shall be as manufactured by Trox, Air Master or
equivalent.
The ceiling arrangement and type of tiles and suspension system, including type of air terminal
fitting shall be checked with the Engineer prior to ordering of equipment.
Diffusers shall be 1-way, 2-way, 3-way or 4-way blow as indicated on the plans and shall have
the necessary louvred core styles to give required direction of blow as shown on drawings and
draftless air distribution without the introduction of noise.
Volume control dampers shall be provided for all diffusers, registers and grilles.
Single blade stream splitter type volume controls shall be provided at the duct branch takeoffs to
individual outlets in which case VCD and/or OBD throttling dampers are not required behind
the outlet.
Multiblade VCD stream splitter volume controls shall be provided behind registers mounted on
the side of ductwork and at spigot takeoffs from duct branches serving more than one outlet.
OBD volume dampers shall be provided behind all return air and exhaust air grilles to regulate
the air flow over the face of the grille. Diffusers or registers which do not have multiblade VCD
dampers, and which have spigot connections between the duct and the outlet or less length than
the larger neck dimension of the diffuser or register, shall be fitted with equalising deflection
grids to ensure even air distribution from the outlet.
All volume controls where mounted behind grilles, registers and diffusers, together with any
visible ductwork or insulation shall be finished in matt black paint.
VCD and OBD dampers shall have blades linked together in sections for ganged operation from
adjusting screws. Where VCD or OBD dampers are mounted on the back of outlets or grilles
the screw shall be accessible through the blades of the outlet. Where the VCD or OBD is
mounted in the duct spigot back from the outlet, then the screw adjustment shall be accessible
through the removable core of the diffuser or by removing the register or grille.

EQUIPMENT
VCD dampers shall give volume control and even air distribution over the full face of the outlet
without the introduction of noise.
VCD dampers shall have a sheetmetal frame enclosure around the blades to give reasonably
robust construction and to ensure all the air diverted by the blades is directed through the outlet.
23.03.14.02 Ceiling Diffusers - Linear Slot
Linear slot diffusers shall be manufactured from extruded aluminium and/or pressed steel and
finished in baked enamel to a colour to be advised by the Architect. All diffusers shall have
directional control and volume control devices, accessible through the face.
23.03.14.03 Ceiling Diffusers - Louvre Face
Ceiling diffusers shall be manufactured from extruded aluminium and/or pressed steel and
finished in baked enamel to a colour to be advised by the Architect. All diffusers shall have a
removable core.
Ceiling diffusers, where shown on the drawings for air conditioning or ventilation supply air
shall be the types such that the border frame fits the ceiling tile/suspension system.
23.03.14.04 Registers (Universal Type - Aluminium)
All universal type registers shall be of aluminium and/or steel construction and shall have two
sets of vanes adjustable in the horizontal or vertical planes and shall be designed to give a
satisfactory distribution of air without the introduction of noise. A sponge rubber gasket shall
be supplied around the frame of each register. The front set of vanes of each register shall be
horizontal and the spacing of the horizontal and vertical blades shall not exceed 18mm. The
vanes shall have an aerofoil shape. The registers shall be finished in baked enamel to a colour
to be selected by the Architect.
The register frame and core shall be such that no screw heads are visible on the face of the grille
after fixing.
23.03.14.05 Return Air Grilles - Wall Mounted (Visible one side only)
Wall mounted return air grilles shall have a minimum 60% free area.
Grilles shall have extruded aluminium blades and frames and shall be provided with a baked
enamel finish to a colour nominated by the Architect.
23.03.14.06 Return Air Grilles - Door or Wall Mounted (Visible from both sides)
Door or wall mounted grilles visible on both sides shall constructed with extruded aluminium
inverted vee sight proof horizontal blades and extruded aluminium border frame fitting both
front and back of the door or wall.
Grilles shall have a free area of not less than 60% and shall be provided with baked enamel
finish to a colour nominated by the Architect.
23.03.14.07 Ceiling Mounted Return Air and Exhaust Grilles
Grilles shall be of all aluminium construction and shall be supplied in baked enamel finish in a
colour selected by the Architect. The louvres shall form a 12mm x 12mm grid and shall be
12mm deep. The grille frame and core shall be such that no screw heads are visible on the face
of the grille after fixing.

EQUIPMENT
23.03.14.08 Car Park Supply and Exhaust Grilles
Car park supply and exhaust grilles shall be linear bar grilles with integral volume control
damper. Grilles shall be of sturdy aluminium construction. The grilles shall be finished in a
baked enamel to a colour to be selected by the Architect.
23.03.14.09 Exhaust Air Louvres
Louvres shall be extruded aluminium frame with aluminium blades of not less than 2mm
thickness and shall be firmly fixed so as not to vibrate. Unsupported blade width shall not
exceed 1800mm.
Behind each louvre shall be an insect mesh screen 76 x 6mm made from 2mm diameter wire.
The screen will be clamped by a 20mm frame and will be firmly fixed to the outer edges of the
louvre. The screen and frame shall be hot dip galvanised after fabrication.
The connection to the louvre shall be flexible and shall ensure no duct load is transmitted to the
louvre.
Louvres shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of the Architect.
23.03.14.10 Sand Trap Louvre for Air Intake
Sand trap louvres shall have a double deflection inlet passage to separate sand from incoming
air by means of centrifugal forces.
Separation efficiency particle size 350-700 shall not be less than 90% at a face velocity of
1M/Sec and not less than 70% at a face velocity of 2M/sec.
Sand trap louvre shall be of aluminium construction, self cleaning and maintenance free. The
base of the louvre shall have self-emptying sand holes.
Pressure drop at 2M/sec average face velocity shall not exceed 120 pascals.
Insect mesh shall be included.
Sand louvres shall be provided with powder coated finish to the approval of the Architect.
23.03.14.11 Birdscreens
12mm x 12mm x 1.6mm diameter galvanised woven mesh or weld mesh birdscreens in rigid
galvanised iron frames shall be installed behind all external louvres and over all relief and
exhaust air openings to outside of the building.
23.03.15 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS
23.03.15.01 General
Heaters shall have the elements mounted on a galvanised steel terminal box, for insertion into a
rectangular hole in the one side of the duct and shall be arranged so as to evenly heat the air
without unduly restricting the air flow. The elements shall be equally balanced over three
phases and shall give the capacities, not less than that tabled in the Electric Duct Heater
Schedule. (Standard sized elements shall only be used.) The number of steps required is listed
in the Schedule.

EQUIPMENT
The complete heating section shall be easily removable from the duct. Power supply to each
heater shall be interlocked with the appropriate fan motor starter, such that the heater cannot
operate unless the fan motor is energised.
Wiring connections to heater element terminals shall be made in heat resistant insulated cabling
taken to a terminal strip mounted on insulating material and located clear of hot surfaces.
A duct safety thermostat with manual reset, shall be fitted in the duct adjacent to each heater as
a protection against overheating in the duct. If the temperature exceeds 120°C the interface with
the power supply shall shut down the elements within two (2) minutes after failure of the air
supply.
Where reset is inaccessible a reset facility is to be provided to enable easy reset of safety
thermostat.
An air supply failure switch shall be installed in the distribution system to interrupt the electrical
power supply to the heater when air flow through the duct heater ceases.
The thermally insulated case shall have a co-efficient of heat transfer not greater than 30 W/m²K
at 100oC, such as Kaowool board or approved equal to a distance of 300mm on either side.
23.03.16 OPEN TYPE EXPANSION TANKS
Feed and expansion tanks for chilled water systems shall be fabricated from 1mm thick copper
having a water expansion capacity to suit 5% of the system capacity without making up water or
overflowing. As an alternative PVC may be offered in lieu of copper.
Tank shall be complete with ball float valve for water make-up purposes, isolating stopcock on
make-up line and quick fill, overflow lines and drain lines as shown on schematic drawings.
Tanks shall be mounted at high level with a drip tray manufactured from 1mm thick copper with
a 100mm high reinforced upturn edge and 25mm dia. drain. The tank shall be supported via
75mm x 25mm galvanised steel channels.
The mounting height of the tank shall be such that its lowest operating level provides a static
head to the pump suction greater than the frictional losses between the tank and the pump and in
any case shall be not less than 600mm above the highest level of the reticulation system.
Ball float shall be adjusted to prevent overflow when expansion takes place.
Tanks shall be covered with a light gauge copper coned cover with breather holes and handles.
Ball valve used in tanks shall provide a constant level, shall be brass with extended cast brass
lever and copper or stainless steel ball and shall comply with the requirements of the Local
Water Supply Authority.
Stop cocks used on cold water make-up lines shall comply with the requirements of the local
Water Supply Authority.
23.03.17 CHILLED WATER PUMPS
23.03.17.01 General

EQUIPMENT
Chilled water pumps shall be as manufactured by Pullen, Holden and Brook, Armstrong or
equivalent.
The Contractor shall calculate the head and flow requirements for all pumps, based on actual
layouts as approved on shop drawings and shall submit calculations for Engineer’s approval.
Pumps shall be end suction or horizontal split casing type as shown on drawings and schedules.
The efficiency of the pumps shall be a minimum 80%.
Pumps shall comply with the Specification Sections "Equipment General", "Noise and
Vibration", "Corrosion Protection and Painting" and " Commissioning and Testing".
23.03.17.02 Materials
Materials to be used shall be:
Casing: Cast iron
Impeller: Bronze
Shaft: Stainless steel shall be 416 grade or equivalent.
23.03.17.03 Drives
Pumps shall be direct driven through flexible couplings by electric motors complying with the
Specification Section "Electrical".
Pumps shall be mounted on base as specified.
Pumps shall:
- be of the 'Back Pull' design;
- be supplied, complete with spacer coupling, so that the impeller and shaft can be removed
as a unit without disturbing pipe connections;
- have flanged connections;
- have a maximum speed of 24 rps or 48 rps as stated in the Pump Schedule.
Casings shall:
- be vertically split;
- have top horizontal or vertical discharge as shown on drawing;
- have replaceable wearing rings.
Impellers shall:
- be of the shrouded type;
- be fitted with replaceable wearing collars which run inside the casing wearing rings;
- be keyed and locked to the shaft.

EQUIPMENT
Shafts shall be fitted with replaceable bronze or stainless steel gland sleeves and water throw
rings.
Shaft seals shall be stuffing boxes packed with graphite impregnated fibre rings and liquid
sealed. The lantern ring shall be of bronze or approved plastic.
Two (2) rolling element bearings shall be provided.
23.03.17.04 Motor and Impeller
The motor shall be sized to operate continuously without exceeding the horsepower rating
regardless of the flow and head throughout the entire range of operation. Motors shall be TEFC,
1450 RPM. Windings shall have Class ‘F’ insulation and shall have thermistors in wingdings to
protect against excessive temperature rise. Motors shall be from Europe. Motors shall be
selected for the pumps to operate at any point of the pump curve.
The selected pumps shall have provision for site installing the next larger sized impeller without
having to upgrade the motor.
23.03.17.05 Seals
The mechanical seals shall be filtered discharge pressure water lubricated based on the pressure,
temperature and liquid being pumped, complete with brass housing bellows and seal gaskets,
stainless steel spring and be of carbon ceramic design.
23.03.18 VARIABLE SPEED PUMPS
The secondary chilled water pumps units shall be variable speed systems. The pumping system
shall include as a minimum, the programmable controller, adjustable frequency drives, remote
sensors, motors and pumps.
The pump manufacture shall take “Unit Responsibility” for the successful operation of the
system supplied by him.
The pump manufacturer shall supply the complete variable speed system and shall have a
minimum of ten years experience with variable speed pumping systems.
At the time of submittal for approval, the pump manufacturer shall provide a complete system
profile analysis which shall include as a minimum the pumps performance (variable speed pump
curves) and the operating characteristics in the system (system curve).
This system profile analysis shall include pump motor and adjustable frequency drive
efficiencies, load profile, staging points, horsepower and kilowatt / hour draw.
The pump manufacture shall supply and be responsible for the operation of a programmable
solid state variable speed pump controller. The controller shall prevent hunting. An internal
P.I.D or proportional, integral, derivative controller shall be furnished.
The controller shall control pump speed in response to one (1) remote set point sensor analogue
input. The set point shall be re-setable by the operator through keypad entry.
The variable speed pump controller shall be capable of performing diagnostics to verify sensor
input on the readout device.

EQUIPMENT
The readout device shall incorporate alpha/numeric ½ inch display in bright LED or fluorescent
characters. Operator interphase shall be through a sealed membrane type keypad. Operator
access shall be protected with key lock security to allow only authorised program changes.
Two-way communications from the building management system, host computer or monitor
shall be available, with standard terminal hook-up type RS232/422. Two-way communications
shall allow for remote adjustment of set point and remote readout of all display messages and
operating registers.
23.03.19 COILS (RUN AROUND AND COOLING)
Coils shall be constructed with 12mm OD copper tubes with aluminium ripple fins. Tubes shall
be arranged in a staggered pattern with respect to air flow. Fins shall have full drawn collars to
provide a continuous secondary surface cover over the entire tube length. Tubes shall be
expanded out to finds to provide continuous primary and secondary contact for maximum heat
transfer efficiency. Coils face velocities shall not exceed 2.5 m/s for run-around coils and for
cooling coils as well. Coil water pressure drops shall not exceed 25kPa, no device shall be used
inside the tubes to create turbulence and/or higher pressure drop.
All coils shall be tested with 1600 kPa air under 70°C water and guaranteed for 1050kPa
working pressure. Coil performance duties shall match those shown in the schedules.
Run-around coils shall be arranged in the ductwork in a vertical position with the air passing
horizontally through the coil to ensure removal of the condensate from the coil.
Where coil height exceeds 1067mm, multiple coils shall be used with intermediate drain trays
between each coil. Coils shall be sealed to the ductwork to ensure no by-pass of air around the
coil occurs. Coil headers and distributors shall be contained within the air handler casing.
Each run around coil system to include heat recovery coil, cooling coil, pump, water make-up
tank, insulated pipework, valves and fittings.
23.03.20 EMERGENCY AIR COOLED SCREW CHILLER
The air cooled chiller shall be as manufactured by Carrier, York, Trane or equivalent.
This chiller shall operate at times when the EMPOWER district coding system has failed.
Supply and install where indicated air cooled water chillers with screw compressors having
capacity not less than that scheduled, when rated at 14.5 to 5.5°C water temperatures and at
50°C ambient. The water pressure drop shall not exceed 48 kilopascals.
The unit shall operate on 380 volts, 50 Hertz, 3 phase electrical service.
The unit shall be completely factory assembled on a rugged channel steel base and be
individually performance tested at full and part load conditions. The unit shall be leak tested
and shipped with a full operating charge of refrigerant R134a environment friendly.
Construction and ratings shall be in accordance with the latest ARI Standard 590 and shall
comply with ANSI B 9.1 Safety Code, National Electrical Code and ASME Code of the USA.
Unit ratings shall be in both imperial and metric systems.
Unit casing and all structural member shall be fabricated of continuous galvanised steel and
rugged steel channel. Exterior casing shall be painted with a baked enamel finish minimum of
150 Microne.

EQUIPMENT
Screw compressors shall be accessible hermetic, direct drive, 2950 RPM. Bearing groups at
each end of rotors shall be separately housed with pressure lubricated rolling elements.
Capacity control shall be fully modulating by use of a slide valve in the rotor section of the
compressors positioned by hydraulic action. Fitments included shall be suction and discharge
service valves and pressure gauges, removable core filter dryer, sight glass with moisture
indicator, and oil strainer.
Compressor motors shall be refrigerant gas cooled, high torque, hermetic induction type with
inherent thermal protection in all three phases. Compressors shall be mounted on anti-vibration
spring isolators to minimise noise vibration transmission.
Cooler shall be direct expansion type with carbon steel barrel, water baffles and internally
finned copper through-tubes roll expanded into heave carbon steel tube sheets. The cooler shall
be constructed, tested and stamped in accordance with ASME Code (or equal) requirements,
with a refrigerant side rating of 1550 KPa and a water side rating of min. 1550 KPa and a water
side rating of min. 1035 KPa.
The condenser coil shall be constructed of min. 3/8” (9.5mm) O.D seamless copper tubes
mechanically expanded into plate type aluminium fins. Distance between two (2) fins shall not
be less than 2mm. Entire condenser coil must be factory tested for leaks at min. 3100 KPa. All
fins shall be with full drawn collars. A sub cooling coil shall be an integral part of the main
condenser coil.
Condenser fans shall be propeller type arranged for vertical discharge. The fans shall be direct
drive by separate fan motors. Fan blades shall be aluminium construction statically and
dynamically balanced. Each fan shall be protected by a heavy duty fan Class-F insulation
designed for high ambient temperature operation without sacrificing any reduction in shaft
output to avoid nuisance tripping at high ambient. All condenser fan motors must be protected
externally by means of sensitive ambient compensated thermal O/L relay located inside the
control panel for each access. The motor shall have permanently lubricated ball bearings.
Units shall be provided with automatic head pressure control to permit satisfactory operation at
low ambient air temperatures by cycling condenser fans in response to head pressure variations.
Unit shall be capable of operating at ambient temperatures of 55 degrees centigrade with a

capacity reduction without mechanical failure.
Field power connected, control interlock terminals and unit control system shall be centrally
located in a weatherproof enclosure. Panel access doors shall be key locked and include steel
rod door retainers to prevent flapping while open. Dead front panels shall protect service
personnel against accidental contact with live voltage components.
Power and starting components shall include individual circuit breaker for each compressor.
Circuit breaker for the control circuit, starting contactors, including individual contactors for
each fan motor, solid state compressor sequence start timers, solid state overload protection in
all phases for the compressor and a unit terminal block for field connection to a single
disconnect switch. Panel to be protected against direct sun to avoid temperature raise inside the
control panel.
Unit controls shall include the following minimum components:
. Microprocessor
. Power and Control circuit terminal blocks

EQUIPMENT
. ON/OFF control switch
. Replaceable solid state relay panel
. 8 Digit alpha numeric diagnostic display / set point panel
. Thermistors and / or pressure transducers
. Automatic compressor lead / lag
. Pumpdown at beginning and end of every circuit cycle
. Capacity control based on leaving chilled water temperature and compensated by rate of
change of return water temperature.
. Limiting of chilled water temperature pull down rate at start up to 0.56°C per minute to
prevent excessive demand spikes at start up.
. Leaving chilled water temperature reset.
Unit Safety Features
Unit shall be equipped with thermistors and / or pressure transducers and all necessary
components in conjunction with the control system to provide the unit with the following
protections:
. Loss of refrigerant charge protection.
. Low water flow detection.
. Low chilled water temperature protection.
. Low and high superheat protection.
. Low oil protection for each compressor.
. Low control voltage to unit protection.
. Ground current protection for each compressor which shuts down compressor when no
more than 2.5 amps are measure to prevent formation of acids.
. Compressors shall be provided with following manual reset type protections:-
- Pressure overload.
- Electrical overload through the use of definite purpose contactors and calibrated,
ambient compensated magnetic trip circuit breakers. Circuit breakers shall open
all three phase in the event of an overload in any one phase or single phasing
condition.
Diagnostics
Diagnostic display module shall be capacity of indicating the safety lockout condition by
displaying a code for which an explanation may be scrolled at the display. Protections included
for display shall be:

EQUIPMENT
. Compressor lockout.
. Loss of charge.
. Low water flow.
. Low oil pressure.
. Cooler freeze protection.
. High or low suction superheat.
. Thermistor or potentiometer malfunction.
. Entering and leaving water temperature.
. Evaporator and condenser pressure.
. All set points.
The module in conjunction with the microprocessor shall also be capable of displaying the
output of a run test to verify operation of every switch, thermistor, potentiometer, fan and
compressor before the chiller is started.
Multi-refrigerant circuits shall be completely independent of each other. Each unit shall have a
minimum to two (2) refrigerant circuits.
The units shall also include capacity reduction thermostats for operation up to 125°C (52°C).
The units shall have flow switches in all outlet line and shall have operating – hour meters.
The unit shall be monitored and controlled at the BMS as indicated in the data point schedule.
Chiller Plant Manager
Chiller plant manager shall be supplied as part of chiller manufacturer supply. Chiller supplier
shall provide integration and interconnection all chillers and provide cabling and controls up to
chiller plant manager. Chiller manufacturer shall supply gateway and translate to access all
parameters and controls through BMS.
23.03.21 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS
Heat exchangers shall be of the sandwiched plate type, consisting of gasketted heat exchange
plates, fixed end plate, removable pressure plate, upper carrying bar, lower guide bar, end
support column, clamping rods, lifting lugs, mounting feet and screwed drain connections.
Heat exchangers shall be of 'Alfa Laval' or approved equivalent manufacture.
Heat exchangers shall be selected to ensure that the pressure drop through each water circuit
does not exceed 50 kPa at specified design requirements.
Heat exchangers shall be factory pressure tested to a hydrostatic test pressure of not less than
2.0 times the working pressure through each water circuit. Certified pressure test details shall
be furnished by the manufacturer and shall include the test procedure, duration of test, and the
test pressures adopted.

EQUIPMENT
23.03.21.01 Construction and Materials
Heat exchanger plates shall be fabricated from 316 stainless steel with a press-formed
corrugated finish. Adjoining plates shall have their corrugations aligned in orthogonal
directions to produce a herringbone flow pattern and flow and return apertures between plates
shall be arranged to provide a single pass of each water circuit with full counterflow conditions
maintained throughout.
Flow passages between adjoining plates shall be fully gasketted to prevent intermixing or
external leakage. Gaskets shall be of nitrile rubber manufacture of grade suitable for the
working temperatures and pressures and shall be thermally bonded to the heat exchange plates.
End plates and pressure plates shall be of machined carbon steel fabrication. All external flow
and return pipe connections shall be made solely to the end plate which shall be provided with
flanged and gasketted nozzles for this purpose. The pressure plate shall mate to the upper
carrying bar and lower guide bar and shall be fitted with rollers to permit ease of withdrawal by
a single tradesperson.
Carrying bars, guide bars and end support columns shall be fabricated from rolled steel sections.
Carrying and guide bars shall have machined roller surfaces and shall be of sufficient length and
size to permit an additional 40% accommodation of heat exchange plates if required, without
restriction to the serviceability of individual plates.
Clamping rods and nuts shall be of high tensile steel fabrication and shall be readily removable
for access to heat exchange plates.
Except for heat exchanger plates and roller surfaces, all exposed steelwork shall be factory de-
scaled, prime coated with a rust and corrosion inhibitor and painted with an epoxy resin finish.
23.03.22 CARBON MONOXIDE MONITORING SYSTEM
23.03.22.01 General
The carbon monoxide monitoring systems shall serve the basement car park levels and ramps.
Systems shall be either Austech Micro 4000, Austech 2400 System Controller (or current model
at time of order) or equivalent, multi channel system with sampling points, as indicated on the
drawings in locations to provide adequate sensing. One off carbon monoxide sampling points
shall be provided on each level to control the exhaust and make-up supply systems. MODBUS
communication protocols shall be available to allow interface with Building Management
Systems (BMS). The car park supply and exhaust fans shall be provided with speed controllers.
23.03.22.02 Carbon Monoxide Monitoring
The carbon monoxide monitoring system shall continuously monitor sampling points in the
locations as indicated on the drawings, on an uninterrupted basis.
There shall be no time delays in measuring/controlling circuitry apart from the inherent sensor
response which shall be less than 60 seconds to 90% full scale deflection for any point. A
continuous analog output of 4-20mA shall be available for each monitored point to enable
continuous and uninterrupted signals for monitoring of carbon monoxide levels.
The system shall be so configured that the greatest time delay in sensing gas on any channel is
60 seconds, regardless of the number of channels in the overall system.

EQUIPMENT
The system shall be capable of sensing gas up to 25 metres from any sensor location to main
control unit, without any special modifications or additions. There shall be LCD and LED
indication provided on the front panel of the main control housing. Individual fault monitoring
circuitry shall be provided on each channel so that any fault will be indicated on the individual
channel module and via appropriate common fault output relay contacts. A fault on any one
channel shall not interfere with the operation of any other channel, and the alarm outputs from
the fault channel shall be inhibited whilst that channel is in fault condition.
23.03.22.03 Carbon Monoxide Sensors
The Carbon Monoxide sensors shall be Austech brand or approve equivalent. The measuring
principle shall be electro-chemical utilizing two electrode electrochemical cells each mounted in
a powder coated or painted aluminium, tamper proof wall mounted enclosure with a 4-20mA
output board fitted.
Mounting brackets shall be provided with the sensor to hold cell at 150mm from mounting
surface; the zero and span adjustments shall be made at the detector location to eliminate the
need for two persons to check and calibrate the system. Measuring range shall be 0-150 ppm
CO with a linear scale.
The carbon monoxide sensors have an inbuilt no-gas sensor test, which is enacted by applying a
magnet to the side of the housing, eliminating the need to apply a test gas at regular intervals to
ensure the system is operable.
The carbon monoxide sensors shall have a warranty of at least five years
The monitor shall be capable of accuracy to + 5% of full scale deflection, sensitivity of 1% full
scale deflection and repeatability of + 1% full scale deflection.
23.03.22.04 Field Wiring Connections
Wiring from each detector location shall be made with two-conductor, overall shielded data
cable of good quality, and shall be possible with equivalent quality multi-core cabling where
required.
All wiring shall be run in PVC electrical conduit run within the concrete structure where conduit
would otherwise be exposed within the space.
The Mechanical Trade shall ensure conduits are placed within slabs as required.
23.03.22.05 Control Signal/Interface
Refer to Control section.
23.03.22.06 Certification
Certification of system shall be carried out every 12 months.

23.04.00 SHEETMETAL WORK
23.04.01 DUCTWORK AND ASSOCIATED FITTINGS
23.04.01.01 Sheetmetal Ductwork
The material, or any composite material, employed in the construction of ductwork shall comply
with the fire performance requirements of Class O BS476 Part 6 and 7 and with the
S.M.A.C.N.A. Low Velocity Duct Manual 5th Edition 1976 except the Snap Lock seams will
not be acceptable.
The following minimum metric thicknesses shall be used for the sheetmetal gauges nominated
in the S.M.A.C.N.A. Manual:
24 U.S. gauge - 0.6mm

All sheetmetal ductwork shall be manufactured from lock forming quality galvanised sheet
steel. Galvanising shall be 275 gms/m2.
Ductwork shall be installed using supports, as described in DW144 and according to

manufacturers requirements.
All flanges, stiffener angles and supporting frames on ductwork installed outside the building or
exposed to weather shall be hot dip galvanised. Flanges and angles shall be rivetted to the
sheetmetal duct. Spot welding is not acceptable in this case.
All ducts shall be carefully designed and provided with all necessary anchoring and flexible
connections to prevent damage to either the ducts or the building structure due to thermal
expansion and/or contraction of the ducts and to obviate transmission of vibration from any
motive or noise generating equipment as fans, air handling units, valves etc.
Drive slide cross-joints shall be sealed airtight at corners using metal tongues and Silverseal
sealer or equal.
Vanes in elbows may be single thickness where the vanes are not more than 300mm long and
double thickness above that length. (Refer SMACNA figures 2-3 and 2-4).
Tee connections may be straight tap in type for takeoffs to individual outlets in which case an
adjustable single blade stream splitter damper or VCD damper shall be used. Tee connections
for branch takeoffs shall be radius tap in or angle takeoff with clinch lock connections and
stream splitter damper.
Each piece of ductwork shall be wiped inside and out before installation and all open ends shall
be capped and sealed to prevent ingress of dirt during construction. Ensure ductwork systems
are clean and free from dirt, dust, grime, debris, etc., before initial operation of fans. Fans shall
not be operated until filters are installed and approval from the Consultant has been obtained.
23.04.01.02 Pitot Holes in Ductwork
As a minimum, pitot holes shall be provided at all main branches and at each fan discharge and
suction.

SHEETMETAL WORK
25mm diameter holes closed off with rubber grommets or other approved means shall be
provided in the ductwork where required for purposes of testing with a velometer or pitot tube.
The holes shall be located according to the table below, across the duct and in straight lengths of
at least 2.0m so that there shall be a minimum of 1.0m of straight duct up-stream and down-
stream.
Up to 300mm - 2 openings
301mm to 450mm - 3 openings
Above 1220mm - 6 openings
23.04.01.03 Flexible Fan Connections
All connections of the ductwork to fans and air handling units shall be provided with flexible
connecting sections, formed by the use of heavy PVC coated vinyl or fibreglass fabric and
confirm to SMACNA Figure 3.5. The flexible connections shall have adequate slack to absorb
relative movement and vibration of the connected items and shall be U.L certified.
The fabric shall be rated for use up to 200°F (93°C) working temperature with tensile strength
of not less than 690 KPa.
Where exposed to weather, flexible connections shall be fitted with a weather shield.
23.04.01.04 Flashing Collars
Galvanised steel flashing collars shall be provided and fixed to all ductwork and pipework
penetrating roof or external walls or where necessary for the waterproofing of mechanical
services penetrations as shown on the drawings.
23.04.01.05 Duct Access Hatches
All low pressure ductwork shall have access hatches where specified or shown on drawings and
where required for satisfactory inspection and service purposes and shall conform with
SMACNA Figure 2.14 Door Frame 1 and Door C.
Provide access hatches where shown, required and directed and as a minimum in the following
locations:
. Bottom of all duct risers.
. Next to outside air intakes and outlets.
. At each fire damper.
. Into apparatus casings to facilitate maintenance and cleaning of all components.
23.04.01.06 Vertical Discharge or Intake Ducts
Vertical discharge or intake ducts that are exposed to weather shall be provided with flashing
collars and birdscreens where they penetrate the roof. The ducts shall be internally drained with
a copper drain line run to the nearest drain point.
These ducts shall be graded to the drain point and shall have all joints and seams in the exposed
section sealed watertight with an approved sealant.

SHEETMETAL WORK
23.04.01.07 Toilet Exhaust Ductwork
All toilet exhaust ductwork within ceilings or shafts shall be carefully treated with a suitable
sealing compound such as Scotch Sealer 6691-1E as manufactured by 3M or approved equal, at
all joints and seams to ensure that the duct is airtight and leakproof.
23.04.01.08 Flexible Ductwork
Flexible ductwork shall be constructed with two (2) layer aluminised polyester innercore,
surrounded by 25mm thickness 24kg/m3 density fibre glass, all wrapped in a reinforced multi
layer aluminium polyester outer jacket and installed in accordance with the recommendations of
BS476, BS4913 and BS5588 Part 9 and NFPA-90A.
All materials used within flexible ductwork shall not give off toxic emissions and shall meet the
standards of NFPA 90A and U.L listed or to meet BS476 and BS413. Maximum flame spread
rating – 12 (Class 1). Maximum smoke developed rating – 50.
All flexible ductwork shall be acoustically insulated.
All air conditioning flexible ductwork to be thermally insulated.
Flexible ductwork penetrations through masonry walls shall be provided with rigid sheetmetal
sleeves.
All ductwork lengths shall not exceed 1.5m wherever possible.
Duct clamps of 8mm wide stainless steel band with “lifted” edges to avoid damage to the duct.
The clamp shall be provided with a ‘flip up’ and ‘quick lock’ tightening for ease of installation.
23.04.01.09 Kitchen Exhaust Ductwork
Ductwork and installation shall comply with the requirements of SMACNA, NFPA-90A. Ducts
installed horizontally shall be installed with a rise in the direction of air flow of not less than
0.5%.
Ductwork shall be galvanised steel of thickness not less than 1.2mm. Ducts shall be sealed in
accordance with BS5588 Part 9 except that button punch snaplock joints shall not be used. All
seams and joints shall be soldered completely airtight. Alternatively, all seams and joints shall
be filled during manufacture of ductwork with No. 6691-1E Silverseal as manufactured by 3M.
Clean out panels of suitable size shall be provided every 3.0m and at branches, change of
direction and in locations as required to enable cleaning out of the entire ductwork system.
Clean out panels shall be 1.2mm galvanised steel with 12mm turned up edges for stiffening and
shall be screw fixed by means of 6mm hexagonal head bolts to tapping strips welded to the duct.
A 3mm thick woven fireproof gasket shall be provided and the whole assembly shall be neat
and workmanlike and result in an airtight assembly.
One hundred percent air and liquid tight welded and flanged 3mm black mild steel exhaust
ducting may be considered subject to Engineer approval.
Kitchen exhaust duct work to be applied with 1 hour fire rating from hood to discharge.
23.04.01.10 Circular and Oval Sheetmetal Ductwork

SHEETMETAL WORK
All circular and oval sheetmetal ductwork for low and medium pressure application shall be
fabricated from full size galvanised sheet steel specifically manufactured for roll forming, such
as “Galvabond” or approved equivalent. Galvanising shall remain unbroken after fabrication
and, in all cases, long runs to duct up to 2400mm in length shall be fabricated from continuous
sheets unless broken by transitions, bends etc. Patched ductwork fabricated from small pieces
shall not be used.
In general all circular and oval ductwork shall be provided with a proprietary spiral lock seam,
with proprietary duct fittings such as reducers, bends and tee-pieces. Bends shall be lobster
back type.
All straight ducts shall be fabricated in lengths as long a possible consistent with transport,
access and site requirements, to minimise site joints.
All site joints shall be of the spigotted type.
Exposed circular ductwork shall be fitted with proprietary joint fittings and care taken to
disguise the joint visually. Exposed jointing shall be subject to approval.
Where openings are formed in duct to allow connections or the like to be made, the duct shall be
braced to ensure it retains it’s shape.
Where duct is internally insulated, it should be lined with perforated zincalume metal. Foil
facing is not acceptable. Internal insulation shall be finished neatly at joins so as to ensure the
insulation does not inhibit joining of ductwork and provides an even airway.
Duct over 500Ν or equal area shall be suspended using profiled flat bar to ensure the chart
retains its shape.
23.04.02 PVC DUCTWORK
23.04.02.01 Material
Ductwork shall be constructed from grey, pressed, unplasticised, rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
sheeting, heat formed to the required sections. Extruded PVC pipe and pressed bands may be
used for circular ducting.
Construction
Ductwork shall be constructed in accordance with the following schedule:
Circular Ducts Minimum Flanges

Mm Gauge mm
mm
Up to 450 3 25 wide x 4 thick
Stiffening is to be added to any duct face to prevent flexing or sagging.
PVC ductwork shall be as manufactured by Kemproof Industries Pty Ltd or approved equal.
23.04.03 DAMPERS

SHEETMETAL WORK
23.04.03.01 General
Volume damper sets shall be provided where specified and/or shown on the drawings.
The type of volume damper to be used for each application shall be as follows:
. Motorised multiblade damper sets for unison control of fresh air, return air, relief air -
parallel blade type.
. Cooling coil by-pass dampers - opposed blade type.
. Manually adjustable damper sets - opposed blade type.
. Motorised smoke exhaust or smoke control dampers - parallel blade type.
. Manually adjustable dampers at duct branch takeoffs - refer Ductwork clause in this
Specification.
. Manually adjustable dampers at air outlets and grilles - refer Diffusers, Registers, Grilles
clause in this Specification.
23.04.03.02 Motorised Damper Sets
Dampers shall be constructed of galvanised sheet steel and shall be Honeywell, Air Master or
equivalent.
Damper sets shall be arranged in substantial supporting frames and each blade shall be mounted
on a 12mm shaft which turns in sintered bronze bearings. Bearings shall be self-aligning, non-
binding type similar to those used on fire dampers. All damper blades shall be interconnected
by means of a suitable bar linkage for ganged operation.
The bar linkage shall positively connect all blades via ball joint connections so that all blades
rotate equally and close tightly without any dependence on tight clearance bearings.
All other modulating dampers shall be arranged with spindles horizontal. Dampers shall be
sized as shown on the drawings to handle air quantities indicated. All dampers shall provide
positive shut-off and the damper linkages shall be free from unnecessary slackness.
All motorised dampers shall have the motor drive shaft situated centrally on the damper section
and shall extend continuous along the full length of the driven damper blade. Drive blades shall
be drilled and tapped for positive bolt fixings to avoid rotation on the drive shaft.
The maximum blade width shall not exceed 250mm and the length 1200mm.
The maximum overall dimensions of any damper section shall not be greater than 2300mm high
or 1200 wide.
The number and size of motors for each damper shall be determined according to the
requirements as set out under Controls.
23.04.03.03 Manually Adjustable Damper Sets
Dampers shall be constructed of galvanised sheet steel and shall be as manufactured by

Honeywell, Air Master or equivalent.

SHEETMETAL WORK
Damper sets shall be arranged in substantial supporting frames and each blade shall be mounted
on a 12mm shaft which turns in sintered bronze bearings. All damper blades shall be
interconnected by means of a suitable bar linkage for ganged operation.
All dampers shall be arranged with spindle horizontal and shall be sized to handle the air
quantities shown on the drawings.
The maximum blade width shall not exceed 250mm and the length 1200mm.
The maximum overall dimensions of any damper section shall not be greater than 2300mm high
or 1200mm wide.
Where manually adjustable damper sets are installed in ductwork or other inaccessible locations
the operating shafts shall be extended through the duct and a lockable quadrant fitted.
23.04.03.04 Non-Return Dampers
Non-return dampers shall be constructed with 1.6mm Z300 Galvabond steel frames with
damper blades manufactured from 0.8mm aluminium sheet. Blades shall be 150mm deep with
longitudinal central swage for rigidity and shall be maximum of 1000mm long. Where damper
sections are wider than 1000mm two sections shall be provided.
23.04.03.05 Smoke Control Dampers
Shall be fabricated from not less than 1.6mm thick galvanised steel sheet with 13mm wide edge
breaks and fastened securely to 13mm dia. bright mild steel spindles. Spindles shall rotate
freely in bronze bushes only.
All blades seals shall be of high temperature silicone rubber having heat stability from -50°C to
+260°C.
Individual blades shall be hinged on 6mm diameter bright steel rods turning in 7mm drilled
holes in 1.6mm Z300 Galvabond sheet steel hat section side frames.
Damper frames shall be sized to fit inside the ductwork or opening in which the damper is to be
installed.
All blades shall be individually hinged and counterweighted so that the whole assembly offers
minimum resistance to the passage of air and closes by gravity to give minimal leakage back
through the damper.
Where dampers are installed in sheetmetal ductwork removable panels shall be provided to give
access to the counterweights and pivots for adjustment and inspection.
23.04.04 FIRE DAMPERS
23.04.04.01 Fire Dampers - Fusible Link Type
Fire dampers shall be fitted at all points where the passage of air or ducts is required in the
building structure to penetrate a fire barrier between any protected areas and/or different fire
zones and as shown on the drawings.
Fire dampers shall have a fire resistance rating not less than that required for the part of the
building structure in which the opening occurs.

SHEETMETAL WORK
Fire dampers shall be either of the pivoted single blade or multiblade type or sliding curtain type
as required to suit the particular application, held in the open position by a 70°C fusible link,
arranged to lock on closure, and shall be constructed and tested in accordance with BS476 and
NFPA 90A. Damper blades and linkages shall be arranged to prevent chatter and vibration
when the system is operating.
All fire dampers shall be a replica of the tested prototype and:
. shall not have a mounting area greater than that of the prototype;
. shall not have blades which are longer than the prototype; and greater than 1.125 or less
than 0.9 times the width of the prototype;
. shall not have any of its components of a lesser thickness than those of the prototype.
Each fire damper shall incorporate bearings specially designed to be self-aligning, pivoting on
stainless steel stub shafts. Each bearing shall be capable of compensating for up to 5 degrees of
misalignment from its central axis.
All fire damper assemblies shall be housed in a 2.5mm welded steel sleeve extending not less
than 75mm on each side of the fire barrier, which shall be independently connected to the fire
barrier so that the damper will remain in position in the event of ductwork being damaged or
collapsing.
Fire dampers shall be installed in strict compliance with BS476, NFPA 90A and the
manufacturer's recommendations and fire resistance test acceptance certificates. In particular
the fire dampers shall be installed such that the damper blades are fully enclosed within the
thickness of the wall or structure when in the closed position and not closer than 40mm to the
finished face of the wall. The face of any flange connection to ductwork shall be not further
than 80mm from the finished face of the wall.
Fire damper sleeves shall be securely anchored to the structure by bolting 38 x 38 x 3 retaining
angles to the sleeves on each side. Where only one side of the damper is accessible, the damper
sleeve shall be fixed by 38 x 38 x 3 mild steel angles on the accessible side bolted to the sleeve
and bolted to the structure with expanding shield bolts, or alternatively by expanding shield
bolts through the damper sleeve into the structure.
Damper assemblies shall be provided with an access panel located in the sleeve or duct adjacent
to the damper, arranged to provide access to the fusible link and spring locking catch for
servicing and inspection. The access opening shall have a minimum 250x 250 free area, or,
where the duct is smaller, square to the maximum width of the duct.
Position all fire dampers into the wall openings provided by the Builder. Sufficient clearance
shall be allowed around each damper. The gap shall be such that it meets the manufacturer's
recommendations and in any case shall not be less than that of the tested prototype and shall be
not greater than half the width of the fixing angles or fixing collar. Pack the gap around the fire
damper with KAO-WOOL or other approved compressible non-combustible material for the
full thickness of the wall.
Dampers shall not be painted. Each fire damper shall have an SAA compliance label which
shall be visible from outside of the damper.
Each fire damper, after being properly fixed in position, shall be tested by manual opening and
closing to ensure free operation.

SHEETMETAL WORK
Duct access doors shall have moulded rubber gaskets and sash clip fasteners. Access panels to
fire dampers in high pressure ducts shall be reinforced where necessary.
23.04.05 TECHNICAL SUBMISSION
The Contractor shall submit catalogue information for all air distribution equipment including
but not limited to:
. Ductwork – low pressure
. Flexible duct work
. Flexible connections
. Access panels
. Volume damper (motorised and manual)
. Non-return damper
. Smoke control damper
. Fire dampers
The Contractor shall submit samples as requested by the Consultant after receipt of the technical
documentation.

23.05.00 REFRIGERATION PIPING
23.05.01 GENERAL
Piping shall be designed and arranged to ensure oil return to the compressor and shall include all
traps, separator, reservoirs, heaters and controls necessary to provide and maintain efficient
compressor lubrication.
Piping shall be designed to have circuit pressure losses not exceeding 40 kPa between
compressor and condenser 20 kPa between evaporator and compressor, 20 kPa between
condenser and evaporator and shall not include any sections with critical lengths giving
noticeable pulse resonance.
Drawings are schematic indicating the route, connections and fittings required but may not in all
parts show piping in its true position. This shall not absolve the Mechanical Trade from their
responsibility for the proper erection of pipework suitable for the duty intended.
23.05.01.01 Fire Precautions
The Mechanical Trade shall take all necessary fire precautions during all cutting and welding
operations.
23.05.02 PIPING MATERIALS
Copper piping shall comply with BS 17235-1 and/or all Codes relevant to the service.
23.05.03 HANDLING, PREPARATION, INSTALLATION
Only new, clean and undamaged piping shall be used.
Piping shall be stored in a dry area remote from materials likely to cause contamination.
Piping and fittings shall be mechanically cleaned prior to installation. Pipes shall be machine
cut by a method giving square ends and undistorted sections.
Burrs shall be removed from both internal and external surfaces.
Pipework shall be installed in locations shown on drawings, have risers arranged vertical and
horizontal runs either parallel or normal to enclosure walls and have parallel runs grouped.
Pipework shall not transmit vibration perceptible to human senses nor noise perceptible above
the noise of components for which sound power level limits have been specified, be installed
with provision for expansion and contraction and not interfere with the removal of equipment,
coils or other piping, nor restrict access to doors, hatches or windows.
Pipework shall pass all specified tests prior to being insulated or otherwise concealed.
23.05.04 JOINTS
A minimum of joints shall be made in the piping systems.

REFRIGERATION PIPING
Silver soldered capillary joints shall be used throughout. Soft soldered joints shall not be used.
Capillary fittings shall be close fitting type which are mechanically rigid without solder, the
solder being used as a seal only.
Brazed joints will be accepted only when silver soldering cannot be used.
Joints in small soft copper tube may be made with flare compression fittings.
Dry nitrogen shall be bled continuously into pipework during soldering.
A charging valve shall be provided. The valve shall be a packed angle valve with seal cap, non-
back seating, 10mm flare x 10mm MPT with flare fitting cap and flare gasket.
23.05.05 BENDS
Bends shall have a minimum centre line radius of 1.5 times pipe diameter, an undistorted cross
section and at least the same pressure rating as the piping of the system in which they are
installed.
23.05.06 TEES
Tees shall be of the streamlined type with the branch making a tangential intersection in the
direction of fluid flow.
Tees shall have at least the same pressure rating as the piping of the system in which they are
installed.
23.05.07 SUPPORTS
Piping shall be supported by clips and hangers at intervals not exceeding the following:
Pipe Nominal Dimensions Support Intervals

(mm) (mm)
Copper
Horizontal Vertical
15 1200 1800
20 1800 2400
25 1800 2400
32 2400 3000
40 2400 3000
50 2700 3000
65 3000 3000
80 3000 3000
100 3000 3000
Supports shall be fabricated in steel and hot dip galvanised and shall be 'Unistrut" or approved
equivalent manufacture.
Supports shall permit appropriate movement for expansion and contraction in controlled
directions and not damage vapour barriers, insulation or sheathing.

Supports shall be arranged so that stresses or loads due to expansion or contraction pressure
reaction, and the weight of the pipes and their contents do not exceed the safe loads for the
support, supporting structure and equipment to which the pipes connect and the pipes
themselves.
Supports shall not bridge any vibration isolation and shall be fixed to structural elements with
adequate strength for the duty. Fixings shall not weaken the supporting structure.
Where pipes are insulated, high density, sectional cork ferrules shall be installed at all supports.
Ferrules shall be bedded and vapour sealed as specified for insulation on the pipe.
23.05.08 SLEEVES
Sleeves fabricated in 1.0mm thick Galvabond having lock seamed or spot welded joints shall be
provided at all piping penetrations through walls and equipment casings.
Sleeves shall project 50mm each side of wall penetrations and terminate flush with external
surfaces of equipment casings. Sleeves shall be 10mm larger in diameter than pipe plus any
insulation and shall be sealed at equipment casings and penetrations of external walls.
23.05.09 ESCUTCHEON PLATES
Escutcheon plates shall be fitted where exposed pipes pass through walls.
Plates shall trim the pipe opening and shall be of 1.0mm thick Galvabond in one piece, slipped
over the pipe before joints are made and screw fixed to walls.
23.05.10 VALVES AND FITTINGS
23.05.10.01 Muffler
A muffler shall be fitted in the discharge lines of the reciprocating compressor and shall be of a
design and make approved by the compressor manufacturer.
The muffler shall not trap oil.
23.05.10.02 Strainer
A strainer shall be fitted where shown on drawings, be 'Y' type of copper alloy construction and
shall have monel screens with 0.11mm wire and 0.14mm aperture supported on a brass screen
with 1.0mm wire and 1.6mm aperture.
23.05.10.03 Dryer
The dryer shall be of the flanged angle type with replaceable cores and shall be installed in a
valved bypass in the liquid line.
The dryer shall have a flow capacity of 60% circuit capacity, a maximum resistance to flow of
14 kPa and a capacity based on ARI 710-58 rating of 24ΕC or 1 gram per tonne of refrigeration
capacity.
23.05.10.04 Sight Glass

Moisture indicating sight glasses shall be provided where shown on drawing and they shall be
installed in positions where easily viewed.
23.05.10.05 Thermostatic Expansion Valves
Thermostatic expansion valves shall be provided for each refrigeration circuit and shall be
selected to have a rated capacity of not more than 120% of circuit capacity with a minimum
capacity of not more than 25% of rated capacity.
Valves shall have an external equaliser and adjustable super-heat control which shall be
adjusted to give a minimum super-heat of 9oC.
Valves shall have working parts accessible for maintenance and shall be installed with sensing
elements securely clamped to suction lines in a manner ensuring response and in a position
close to the connections of the suction header.
Valves shall be selected with due allowance for refrigerant distributor pressure drop.
23.05.10.06 Refrigerant Distributors
Refrigerant distributors shall be provided at each coil, have the same number of circuits as the
coil served, have replaceable nozzles and be arranged for vertical down feed and with equal
length circuits and feed tail lengths not exceeding 750mm.
23.05.10.07 Solenoid Valves
Solenoid valves shall be provided where shown on drawing and shall provide on/off control of
refrigerant flow.
23.05.10.08 Pressure Tappings
Pressure tappings shall be provided for all pressure gauges, pressure controls and in each
expansion valve equalising line.
Pressure tappings shall be made through packed and capped angle valves.
23.05.10.09 Valves
Valves shall be of the packed, back seating, key operating, forged brass construction type fitted
with suitable screwed caps.
Valves shall be blown through with dry gas before installation.
23.05.10.10 Thermometer Wells
Wells shall be a length of 10mm copper tube brazed to the external surface of the pipe, have a
minimum pipe contact length of 75mm, be arranged to hold oil and be vapour sealed at
penetrations through insulation.
23.05.10.11 Drain Piping
Provide drain piping from the cooling coil drain pans to the floor waste.
Air handling unit drain piping shall be 25mm x 1.2mm copper.

23.06.00 PIPEWORK
23.06.01 GENERAL
Pipework shall comply with the specification sections 'Technical General', Corrosion Protection
and Painting', 'Insulation and Sheathing', 'Noise & Vibration' and 'Commissioning and Testing'.
Pipework in the material scheduled shall be provided to interconnect the components of the
following system:
Chilled Water BSP (Black Steel Piping)

Condensate PVC
Pipework shall be sized and run as shown on drawings or specified. Drawings are schematic
indicating the route, connections and fittings required but may not in all parts show piping in its
true position. This shall not absolve the Mechanical Trade from their responsibility for the
proper erection of pipework suitable for the duty intended.
Pipework shall be suitable for the working and test pressures specified.
All pipework shall be free from surface or general corrosion and have no signs of scaling,
pitting or excess weathering. Any pipework so affected shall be replaced at no cost.
All fittings for each piping system shall be from the same manufacturer.
23.06.02 PIPING MATERIALS
23.06.02.01 Chilled Water Pipework
All chilled water piping shall be black mild steel, seamless type to BS1387 medium weight for
sizes up to 150 mm (6”) diameter and to BS3601 for sizes above 150 mm (6”) diameter or to
ASTM A-53 GRB Schedule 40 and all pipe fittings shall be black, forged steel of the same
quality and weight as the pipes.
All joints shall be welded by an approved welding process, each joint of sufficient strength to
withstand the stress imposed by internal pressure, thermal expansion and weight of pipe, fittings
and thermal insulation. All welded tees, branches, vent pipes reducers, etc. shall have leveled
joints and finished off with a circumferential butt joint weld.
Pipe fittings shall be suitable for welded connections. Butt weld fittings shall be to ASNE V 16-
9 and BS1640 made of seamless carbon steel to ASTM A234 B Grade WPB. Threaded fittings
shall be to BS21 (ISO 7) made of malleable Iron to BS149 and ISO49. Flanges shall be ANSI
Class 150, Carbon Steel weld neck.
In congested areas where small bore chilled water piping may be required, Type K copper
piping with bronze non de zincifiable fittings may be used subject to the Engineers approval and
to a test of the welding operatives who will be doing the brazing. Brazed joints will be required
throughout and no compression fittings will be permitted.
23.06.02.02 Condensate Piping
All condensate drain piping shall be uPVC (unplasticised poly vinyl chloride) to BS 3505 latest
edition Class E (900 Kpa) at 20oC fluid temperature and 40oC ambient temperature or ASTM
D1785 Schedule 40.

PIPEWORK
All fittings and accessories shall be of same material and quality as the pipe and jointing up to
65mm diameters (21/2”) diameter shall be of the spigot and socket cemented type where solvent
cement is applied to both parts all in compliance with BS 4346: Part 1:1969 joints and fittings
for use with uPVC pressure pipes.
All joints should be allowed to set for at least 10 hours.
Unions on uPVC systems shall be factory manufactured unions appropriate for the pipe.
23.06.03 HANDLING, PREPARATION, INSTALLATION
Piping shall be carefully handled to avoid damage to piping and building surfaces.
Only new, clean and undamaged piping shall be used unless specified otherwise.
Piping and fittings shall be mechanically cleaned prior to installation.
Pipes shall be machine cut by a method giving square ends and undistorted sections.
Pipework shall:
. be neatly installed in locations shown on drawings or specified;
. have risers arranged vertical and horizontal runs either parallel or normal to enclosure
walls;
. have parallel runs neatly grouped;
. be graded up towards air release valves and down towards drain valves;
. not include any sections which will not drain or can trap air;
. not transmit vibration perceptible to human senses nor noise perceptible above the noise
of components for which sound power level limits have been specified;
. be installed with provision for expansion and contraction;
. not interfere with the removal of equipment, coils or other piping, nor restrict access to
doors, hatches or windows;
. pass all specified tests prior to being insulated or otherwise concealed.
23.06.04 JOINTS
A minimum of joints shall be made in the piping systems.
Permanent joints shall be brazed for copper pipework.
Non-permanent joints shall be provided at connections to: plant, equipment tanks, drip trays,
flexible connections, valves etc.

PIPEWORK
Non-permanent joints shall be one of the following:
. Flanges for any pipe diameter 65 mm and above.
. Screwed unions for any pipe of 50mm diameter or smaller.
. Flared fittings for any pipe of 20mm diameter or smaller.
. Screwed for any pipe of suitable wall thickness and of 50mm diameter or smaller.
Non-permanent joints shall be easily accessible and shall permit dismantling without disturbing
plant or other piping.
All screw threads shall be lubricated with graphite grease.
23.06.04.01 Brazing
Brazing shall:
. comply with BS 1723;
. be carried out by skilled tradesmen using a minimum of heat, flux and brazing alloy;
. be carried out on joints which are clean and properly prepared.
Brazed joints shall be of the spigot and socket type achieved either by use of capillary joint
fittings or machine formed integral sockets in one end of the meeting pipes. Integral sockets
shall have a length of one pipe diameter or 25mm maximum.
23.06.04.02 Flanges
Flanges shall:
. be of a compatible material with the piping joined;
. made of bronze and be brazed to copper piping;
. comply with BS 4504 or match flanges on equipment or valves and be suitable for the
temperatures and pressures of the system in which installed;
. have a gasket selected for the duty fitted in the joint to BS1737;
. be connected by zinc plated bolts, nuts and washers.
23.06.04.03 Screwed Unions
Screwed unions shall:
. be brazed to copper;
. have ground mating surfaces for metal joints;
. have hexagon nuts.

PIPEWORK
23.06.04.04 Flared Fittings
Flared fittings shall not be used on vibrating pipes.
Pipe ends shall be annealed and flared pipe ends machine formed.
23.06.04.05 Joints between Dissimilar Metals (Dielectric Isolators)
Joints between ferrous and non-ferrous screwed piping and equipment shall be made using
Teflon or Nylon isolating materials in the form of screwed unions.
Joints between ferrous and non-ferrous flanged piping and equipment shall be made using
insulating gaskets and Teflon sleeves and washers between flanges, bolts and nuts.
The entire insulating joint including the dielectric material shall be suitable to withstand the
temperature pressure and other operating characteristics for the service for which they are used.
23.06.05 BENDS
Bends shall:
. have a minimum centre line radius of 1.5 times pipe diameter;
. have an undistorted cross section;
. have at least the same pressure rating as the piping of the system in which they are
installed.
23.06.06 TEES
Tees shall:
. be of the streamlined type with the branch making a tangential intersection in the
direction of fluid flow;
. have at least the same pressure rating as the piping of the system in which they are
installed.
23.06.07 CHANGE IN DIAMETER
Fittings providing a streamlined change in diameter shall be used to connect pipes of different
diameters.
Fittings shall be eccentric where necessary to provide complete venting or drainage of the pipe
system.
23.06.08 SUPPORTS
Piping shall, unless installed underground, be supported by clips, rollers and hangers at intervals
not exceeding the following:

PIPEWORK
Pipe
Nominal Support Intervals - Metres
Dimension
mm BSP Copper uPVC
15 2.1 1.5 0.7

20 2.1 1.5 0.7
25 2.4 1.8 0.9
32 2.4 1.8 0.9
40 2.7 2.4 1.0
50 3.0 2.4 1.0
65 3.3 2.7 1.0
80 3.7 3.0 1.3
100 4.0
150 4.0
200 4.0
250 4.0
Supports shall:
. be fabricated in steel and hot dip galvanised;
. be "Unistrut" or approved equivalent manufacture;
. permit appropriate movement for expansion and contraction in controlled directions;
. be arranged so that stresses or loads due to expansion or contraction pressure reaction,

and the weight of the pipes and their contents do not exceed the safe loads for the
support, supporting structure, any pumps or other equipment to which the pipes connect,
and the pipes themselves;
. not bridge any vibration isolation;
. be fixed to structural elements with adequate strength for the duty. Fixings shall not
weaken the supporting structure;
. vertical rising pipes shall also be supported at the base and the support shall withstand the
total weight of the pipe and fluid contained.
23.06.09 EXPANSION, CONTRACTION
Pipework shall be completed with provision for controlled expansion and contraction.
When possible piping shall be arranged to be sufficiently flexible to expand and contract
without:
. development of excessive stresses in the pipework;
. transferring excessive stresses to connected equipment or the structure supporting

pipework;
. when the inherent flexibility of pipework is inadequate, expansion loops, bellows or

telescopic connectors shall be provided.
Anchors shall:
. provide a reaction for expansion forces at positions where forces can be adequately
supported;

PIPEWORK
. be spaced as shown on drawing, or, to proportion expansion approximately equally to

each section of the pipework;
. be welded to steel and PVC piping;
. be clamped to copper piping;
. provide restraint at changes in direction or ring jointed pipework;
. be bolted or welded to supporting structure without causing any weakness in the

structure;
. be fixed to sections of piping free from vibration.
23.06.10 SLEEVES
Sleeves shall:
. be provided at all piping penetrations through floors, walls, roof and equipment casings;
. be fabricated in 1.0mm thick galvabond;
. be installed flush with the underside of floor slabs and with the upper side projecting
75mm above floor slabs.
. project 50mm each side of wall penetrations;
. terminate flush with external surfaces of equipment casings;
. be 10mm larger in diameter than pipe plus any insulation;
. be sealed at sound barriers, equipment casings, and penetration of masonry air shafts;
. have lock seamed on spot welded joints;
. be supplied by the Mechanical Trade and installed by the Builder where the penetrations
are through surfaces provided by the Builder and installed by the Mechanical Trade
where penetrations are through surfaces installed by the Mechanical Trade.
. Sleeves penetrating fire-rated floors and walls shall have the space between piping and
the sleeve packed with a fire resistant packing to the thickness of the fire barrier.
Acoustic Seals shall be as detailed on drawings or;
. sewn boots fabricated in Wavebar 120 leaded vinyl;
. clipped to piping and pipe sleeves with 'Cheney' worm drive hose clips;
. be airtight;
. in installed on both sides of the sleeve at penetrations through plantroom walls and slabs.

PIPEWORK
23.06.11 ESCUTCHEON PLATES
Escutcheon plates shall be fitted where exposed pipes pass through walls or ceilings.
Plates shall:
. trim the piping opening;
. be of 1.0mm thick "galvabond" construction;
. be in one piece, slipped over the pipe before joints are made;
. be screw fixed to walls
23.06.12 TESTING OF PIPING
23.06.12.01 General
Each pipework system shall be tested as a whole or in sections as the work proceeds in
accordance with relevant British Standards and with the following requirements.
Test pressures shall be applied during the construction period and prior to the pipelines being
lagged or painted with each section being blanked until further tests are made.
All equipment, material and labour necessary for testing shall be provided and all necessary
“blanking-off” shall be done to prevent excessive pressures to equipment, seals or other similar
parts of the system.
Leaking joints in welded and brazed pipes shall be remade in accordance with the section of
British Standards and the relevant Code for the system being used. Leaking joints in screwed
fittings and “0” ring fittings shall be fully re-made; caulking of leaks will not be permitted. All
faulty joints shall be re-tested after rectification and repeated until entire systems are
satisfactory.
Tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant British Standard taking care that the
pressures stated do not over stress any part of the system due to working pressure or static head.
If such is likely to occur permission shall be requested to vary the test condition.
23.06.12.02 Testing of Water Pipework Systems
All pipework shall be pressure tested by air or water to a test pressure of 1.5 times the working
pressure recorded by an approved gauge placed at the highest point in the system.
Test pressures shall be maintained for a minimum of 8 hours without loss of pressure, with
corrections made for ambient temperature change when necessary.
After sections of pipework are tested they shall be thoroughly cleaned and flushed and then
filled with treated water. The water shall be checked quarterly until the system is put into
continuous operation to ensure that deterioration of the pipework has not occurred.
23.06.12.03 Testing of Drains
All open drains shall be tested by capping off the lowest drain point and filling the line with the
fluid being drained and visually checking all joints for leakage. No pressure testing is required.

PIPEWORK
23.06.13 IDENTIFICATION OF PIPING
All pipework shall be painted colour banded and lettered in accordance with the “Corrosion
Protection, Painting & Labelling Section” of this specification.
23.06.14 PIPE CLEANING
All systems shall be thoroughly cleaned out before any equipment is connected which may be
damaged or affected by items of particles in the pipes (valves, controls, chiller sets, pump0s
etc).
After initial cleaning, each system shall be flushed with town’s water dosed with a cleaning
agent. Circulation shall be maintained until samples drawn off show that the system is clean
23.06.15 ABS PIPING
ABS pipe and fittings shall be manufactured in accordance with Australian Standard AS3518
and must be branded accordingly. The pipe manufacturer shall be accredited with ISO 9002 –
1994. Manufacturer shall be Eurapipe or approved equivalent. The installation shall comprise
standard fittings and purpose made fittings to suit the installation as detailed on the drawings,
and shall have access at all changes in direction for cleaning. The complete installation shall be
fully in accordance with the manufacturer’s recommendations, including allowances for
expansion. Installation shall be in accordance with AS3690 “Installation of ABS Pipe Systems”
and the manufacturers recommendations.
The Mechanical Trade shall ensure all personnel involved with the installation are familiar with
the installation procedures for the ABS piping systems. The diameter and class of pipe
indicated in the associated drawings shall not be varied without prior approval from the
Engineer. The layout of all pipework shall be checked on site prior to installation and all care
shall be taken to ensure a neat and workmanlike appearance of the installation.
Pipe anchor sleeves are required where pipes pass through external concrete walls and shall be
supplied as a proprietary item by the manufacturer for fixing into the formwork prior to casting
of the concrete wall. It is the responsibility of the Mechanical Trade to co-ordinate these works
with the Builder.
23.06.15.01 Jointing
Only purpose made ABS solvent cement and MEK cleaner are approved for jointing. All pipe
shall be cut square and swarf etc. removed prior to jointing. Pipe shall be inserted to full depth
of fitting socket. Installed fittings which do not have pipe inserted to full depth shall be
considered below required standard and shall be rectified at the Installer’s expense. Backing
rings shall be used at all flanged joints. The use of solvent cemented sockets, flanges and
shoulder style couplings are permitted to join pipe and fittings as required. Equipment
connections 50mm and less may be threaded. ABS pipe connections to other materials may not
be made by cementing or flued joints.
The use of a hand operated lever winch or other suitable means of supplying a steady effort
sufficient to apply fittings to pipe shall be used when jointing pipe systems above 100mm. The
use of hammers etc, to apply fittings is NOT permitted at ANY time.

PIPEWORK
23.06.15.02 Support
The maximum distance between supports shall be in accordance with the manufacturers
recommendations. The width of pipe supports shall be in accordance with the manufacturer’s
recommendations. Pipe supports shall not exert undue pressure on the pipe wall or deform the
pipe wall against the clamp or support. All clamps on horizontal pipe shall allow axial
movement of the pipe.

23.07.00 VALVES
23.07.01 GENERAL
Valves shall:
. as far as possible be of a single make.
. be suitable for the temperature, pressure and fluid of the duty to which they are applied;
. have the direction to open clearly marked on the handwheel;
. pass factory pressure tests as specified in Specification Section "Commissioning and

Testing";
. be labelled as specified below;
. have connections selected from the types permitted for the piping of the system in which
the valve is mounted;
. be entirely suitable and correctly sized for each application and unless otherwise shown
shall be of pipeline size, except in the case of control valves which shall be selected to
manufacturer’s recommendation and selection data.
. have operators which require a force not exceeding 20 kgf to close the valve under worst
operation conditions.
. Valves 50 mm (2”) diameter and smaller shall have threaded ends, valves 65 mm (21/2”)
and larger shall be flanged.
Valve labels shall:
. be clipped in a conspicuous position on each valve;
. be engraved brass tags showing the fluid classification letters and the valve number in
characters 6mm high;
. exhibit the same identification as shown on piping diagrams.
Valves shall not generate excessive noise. Sound power levels shall not exceed the following
when the valve is operating under the most severe normal working conditions.
Octave Band Centre Sound Power Level dB

Ref. 10-12 Watts
Frequency Hz
A B
8 125 59 74
11 250 52 68
14 500 47 63
.17 1K 43 60
.20 2K 42 57
.23 4K 38 55
A - valves in occupied spaces, or behind panels adjacent to occupied spaces.

B - valves in plantrooms.

VALVES
Valve materials shall comply with the following minimum standards:
Brass - DZR Copper Alloy to CW602N

Bronze - BS1400 LG-2-C/ASTM B62
Cast Iron - BS 1452 Grade 14/ASTM 126 class B
Stainless Steel - Stainless Steel Grade 316 and CF8M
23.07.02 ISOLATING VALVES
Isolating valves shall be provided for isolating equipment or services for maintenance or on-off
control.
Valves shall be of ball or butterfly type.
23.07.02.01 Ball Valves
Service Chilled, Condenser & LPHW
Selection pressure 2100 kPa
Selection temperature 5 - 95 deg.C
Body material DZR Copper Alloy to CW602N
Valve material Polished chromium plating over nickel substrate on DZR

copper alloy to CW602N.
Seals and seats Poly-tetrafluoroethylene
Shaft DZR copper alloy to CW602N.
Approved makes Hyflo-Isis or equal approved.
23.07.02.02 Butterfly Valves
Service Chilled, Condenser & LPHW
Selection temperature 5 - 120 deg.C
Body material Cast iron or ductile iron.
Body type Lugged with holes tapped for set screws
Blade material CF8 or CF8M stainless steel
Seats and seals Replaceable rollout resistant type of NBR, EPDM or

polychloroprene.
Shaft Stainless steel type 304 or 416
Approved makes Hyflo or equal approved

VALVES
23.07.03 FLOW CONTROL VALVES
Flow control valves shall be provided for manual flow control. Automatic flow control valves
are specified in the specification section "Controls".
Valves shall be of butterfly, double regulating globe, or eccentric plug types.
23.07.03.01 Automatic Flow Control Valves
Shall be provided as manufactured by Flow Design Inc. or approved equal.
Selection of the valves to be provided with manufacturer’s requirements.
Service: CHW, HHW & CCW

Selection Pressure: 2500kPa
Selection Temperature: 0-120°C
Body Material: Sizes up to DN50 of DZR copper alloy, sizes over DN50 of
Ductile Iron.
Body Type: Sizes up to DN50 of Union Inlet and fixed female outlet with
integral isolating valve.
Sizes over DN50 of Wafer style suitable for fitting to both
ANSI 150 and 300 Class Flanges.
Cartridge Material: All sizes of Grade 304 stainless steel housing and 17-7ph
stainless steel springs.
‘O’ Rings: All of EPDM unless otherwise specified.
Approved Makes: AutoFlow or equal approved.
All valves shall be dynamic and maintain their flow rate regardless of pressure drop changes
within the system. The valves to be pre-set, correctly tagged and require no on site water
balancing during the commissioning process.
23.07.03.02 Butterfly Valves
As previously specified.
Valves shall have adjustable stops and means of locking the operator in at least ten positions
between open and closed.
23.07.03.03 Double Regulating Valves
These valves are suitable for both flow control and isolation duties.
Service Chilled, Condenser and LPHW
Selection pressure 2000 kPa (50mm and below)
1600 or 2500 kPa (65mm and above)
Selection temperature 5 - 95oC

Body material DZR Copper alloy of Ametal, Cast Iron or Ductile Iron.
Valve material Copper alloy of Ametal with PTFE disc.
Seat Integral

VALVES
Seals Packed gland
Shaft DZR copper alloy of Ametal
Manometer connections Valves shall have valved manometer connections and a

optional drain valve.
CV ratings Kv ratings shall be available
Valves shall have adjustable memory stops.
Approved makes STAD and STAF – Tour and Andersson
23.07.03.04 Eccentric Plug Cocks
Valves shall be De-Zurich eccentric plug type selected for a pressure of 200 psi/1300 kPa and
for the temperatures specified in clause "Double Regulating Valves".
Valves shall have adjustable stops and means of locking the operating in at least ten positions
between open and closed.
23.07.03.05 Manometer Connections
When other than double regulating valves are used for flow control, valved manometer tappings
for flow measurement shall be provided either across the alternative flow regulating valve or
across an alternative fitting for which Kv ratings shall be supplied. Hyflo P/T test plugs of
standard or extended style.
23.07.04 CHECK VALVES
Check valves shall be fitted where shown on drawing and shall be used to prevent fluid or gas
from flowing in opposite to the design direction of flow.
Valves shall be used for all water services and shall be spring loaded flap type with two contra-
rotating semi-circular flaps.
Selection temperature 5.95oC
Body material Cast iron or stainless steel
Valve Stainless steel CF8 or CF8M
Seat Integral
Seals NBR or EPDM vulcanised to seat.

butadiene
Hinge and Stop pins Type 304 stainless steel
Springs Type 304 stainless steel

VALVES
Bearings Fitted between all metal components and of PTFE.
Approved makes Hyflo or equal approved.
23.07.05 GAUGE VALVES
Gauge valves shall be provided at all pressure gauge and instrument connections to services.
Valves shall be 10mm ball valves.
Selection temperature 135oC
Body material DZR Copper Alloy to CW602N
Ball material Polished chromium plating over nickel substrate on DZR

copper alloy to CW602N
Seals Poly-Tetrafluoroethylene
Pipe connections Screwed
Duty fluids Water
23.07.06 AIR ELIMINATORS
Automatic air eliminators shall be fitted at all high points in water systems and shall vent non-
condensables collected at the valve.
Integral Check type isolating valves shall be fitted between the eliminator and the system.
Vents shall be piped to discharge over the nearest waste.
Approved makes Flexvent or Flexvent Super.
23.07.06.01 Specifications
Selection pressure 1,000 kPa
Selection temperature 5 - 120oC
Body material Brass, bronze or malleable cast iron
Valve material Polypropylene/EPDM or stainless steel type 316
Float material Polypropylene/EPDM or stainless steel type 316
Pipe connection screwed.

VALVES
23.07.07 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES
Pressure relief valves shall be fitted to pressure vessels when required by code and as shown on
drawing in pipelines.
Valves shall have drain connections which shall be piped to waste.
23.07.07.01 Specification
Selection pressure to suit duty
Set pressure to suit pressure vessel design or pressure reducing valve

setting.
23.07.08 STRAINERS
Strainers shall be used to collect particles of foreign matter in fluids.
Valves larger than 50mm nominal size shall be fitted with drain valves and drain piping
extending to discharge over a waste tundish.
Selection pressure Minimum 1,400 kPa
Selection temperature 5.95oC
Maximum resistance to
flow of fluid strained Strainers to be sized for maximum DP of 15 kPa when screen element
is clean.
Body material Carbon steel, cast iron or bronze
Screen material Type 304 stainless steel
Screen opening 1.0mm for size DN15-DN50 in screwed connections and 3.0mm for
size DN50-DN350 in flanged connections.
Screen Of perforated mesh in sufficient thickness and of a design to prevent

collapse when clean.
Cover gaskets Fibre
Piping connections To suit piping joint specification.
Approved makes Hyflo or equal approved
23.07.09 GAUGE AND INSTRUMENT FITTINGS
Thermometer pockets, thermometers, pressure gauge tappings, pressure gauges and flow fittings
as shown on drawings, or where necessary, shall be installed for the successful operation,
commissioning, recording and energy management of each system, in accordance with all
relevant Codes.

VALVES
Except where permanent instruments are installed, the fittings shall be of the universal type such
as Hyflo to enable both pressure and temperature to be checked.
Approved pockets shall be installed in pipework for all gauges and instruments in positions
where no adverse effects occur to flow conditions and of such material that electrolytic action is
avoided (bronze, stainless steel or brass as appropriate).
Pockets shall project sufficiently far into the pipe to give a good reading and shall be complete
with a minimum of 50mm depth of approved heat conducting fluid and shall be capped.
Pipes smaller than 65mm shall be enlarged to accommodate pockets without loss in flow area.
Pockets shall be vertical or set at an angle to retain heat transfer medium.
Bosses for pressure gauge tappings and similar purposes shall be of the standard inside fitted
type, welded at right angles to the pipes and tapped as required for each application. The
lengths and outside diameter of pipe bosses shall be kept to a minimum consistent with pipe
sizes.
All gauges on pump assemblies and similar equipment shall be neatly installed on to a pressed
galvanised sheetmetal gauge panel or solid hardwood timber panel, to approval, located clear of
vibration, have siphon and, where required pulse snubbers.
Ball valves shall be fitted at all pressure gauges and at all water coils, heat exchangers,
condensers and chiller vessels.
Thermometer pockets shall be fitted at all water coils, heat exchangers, condenser and chiller
vessels and where thermometers are specified.
Gate type valves in lieu of pet cocks may be used for pressure gauge connections, and shall be
rated for the duty pressure of the pipework system.
23.07.10 ABS PIPEWORK VALVES
23.07.10.01 Isolating Valves (Up to 50mm)
Isolating valves up to 50mm diameter shall be ASV Stubbe hand operated PVC butterfly valves,
as supplied by Eurapipe Australia Pty Ltd or approved equal.
23.07.10.02 Isolating Valves (65mm to 200mm)
Isolating valves from 65mm to 200mm diameter shall be Praher Type S4 hand operated
butterfly valves as supplied by Eurapipe Australia Pty Ltd, or approved equal.
23.07.10.03 Isolating Valves (over 200mm)
Isolating valves over 200mm diameter shall be SAFi industrial polypropylene butterfly valves
complete with hand wheel and reduction gearbox as supplied by Eurapipe Australia Pty Ltd, or
approved equal.
23.07.10.04 Check Valves (All Sizes)
Check valves shall be all PVC up to 300mm in size and polypropylene for sizes above this.
These shall be Praher Type S470 as supplied by Eurapipe Australia Pty Ltd or approved equal.

VALVES
23.07.10.05 Strainers
Strainers shall be fitted to all pumps and shall be of the Y type with nylon coated (FBE) cast
iron bodies and Grade 316 stainless steel mesh having maximum diameter of 20mm of
openings. Strainers shall be fitted with valve and drain line to waste to facilitate cleaning and be
as supplied by Eurapipe Australia Pty Ltd or approved equal.

23.08.00 INSULATION
23.08.01 GENERAL
This section of the Specification deals with the materials and methods of construction to be used
in providing all thermal and acoustic linings for ductwork, and piping .
All insulation shall be non-hygroscopic, non combustible when tested in accordance with BS476
Part 4 and have a maximum thermal conductivity of 0.04 w/mk at 20oC
All insulation shall be:
. neatly cut to the required size

. have parallel edges and surfaces
. uniform density and surface finish
. have all joints close butted, gaps will not be accepted
. be applied to clean surfaces
. fit snug to the surface insulated
. not be crushed
. be carried out by experienced personnel.
Where there is any anomaly between the scope or intent of this Specification and the drawings
refer to the Engineer for a ruling.
The extent of insulation is shown on the drawings using markings detailed on the drawings.
Submit samples of insulation materials, adhesives and vapour barriers, together with certificates
detailing Combustibility and Early Fire Hazard Properties in terms of BS476 and details of
fastening methods, for each type of pipe and duct insulation and obtain approval from the
Engineer for same prior to commencing work.
The supply and installation of insulation (machined wood blocks, pre-formed cork blocks, or
pre-formed insulation sections) at pipe supports shall be arranged between the Mechanical
Trade and their Insulation Contractor. It is stressed that vapour seals shall be continuous
through underneath all pipe support brackets and clamps.
All insulating materials, finishes, coverings, adhesives, mastics, coatings, sealers and primers
shall be classified as Class 1 surface spread when tested in accordance with BS476 Part 7 and
have a maximum Fire Propogation Index of 12.6 to BS476, Part 6 and a Class 0 rating to BS476
Part 6 (Fire Propogation).
All adhesives, vapour coatings and sealers shall be selected and applied in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations for the application to give a permanent bond and/or seal under
all conditions of installation and operation.
The general intent is to provide a sealed insulation which will not permit sweating of the pipes
or ducts and its supports and which will not retain moisture to the detriment of it’s insulating
capability.
Valves and fittings must be insulated and finished in the same manner and thickness as piping.
Moulded factory shaped sectional pipe coverings, factory or job-fabricated may be used subject
to approval.
Alternative methods and materials to those specified hereafter shall have been submitted and
accepted at the time of tendering in accordance with the Conditions of Tendering. They shall

INSULATION
achieve overall heat transfer co-efficients and moisture vapour permeance not greater than the
methods and materials specified.
23.08.02 SCOPE OF WORK
The extent of the insulation works described hereafter comprises specifically of the following
works.
Sheetmetal
. Internal ductwork where shown on the drawings.

. External ductwork where shown on the drawings.
. Fire rated ductwork where shown on the drawings.
Pipework
. All chilled water pipework

. All condensate drain piping
. All suction gas refrigerant pipework
23.08.03 DUCTWORK - EXTERNAL INSULATION
External insulation materials shall be non hydroscopic, have a thermal conductivity co-efficient
not greater than 0.04 W/mK @ 20°C and a water permeability better than 0.09 ugm/Nh to
BS 4370/2.
A mininmum thickness of 25mm unless shown otherwise on the drawings.
Insulating materials shall be 24 Kg/m3 density flexible fibreglass duct insulation for ducting
within the building air conditioned areas and above ceilings.
Insulating materials shall be 48 Kg/m3 density semi rigid fibreglass duct insulation for ducting
within concealled spaces ,building main risers and plant rooms that are not fully air conditioned
spaces. Detailed calculations shall be forwarded to the Engineer for comment to ensure
excessive heat gain and any condensation is minimized.
Insulating materials shall be minimum 70 Kg/m3 density rigid fibreglass duct insulation for
ducting external to the building or exposed to direct sunlight. The insulation must ensure a
maximum temperature rise not greater than 1 degree C. Outdoor duct insulation shall also be
protected against weather and mechanical damage by 20 gauge Aluminium cladding.
Insulation facing and vapour seal where applicable shall be factory applied Sisalation 450 or
equal reinforced aluminium foil glued to the insulation material using adhesives.
All insulation must be installed to manufacturers instructions and recommendations.
On ducts up to 375mm wide, insulation shall be held in place by sealing strips glued over the
longitudinal joints and no fixings to the ducts are required.
On horizontal ducts 375-750mm width insulation shall be fastened on the bottom surface only
using standard stud weld steel pins, along the centreline at 375mm spacings and held with speed
clips not less than 25mm diameter.

INSULATION
On ducts 750mm and larger insulation shall be fastened with pins and speed clips at maximum
380mm spacings.
On riser ducts, sufficient pins and clips shall be used to support the insulation vertically. On
sides larger than 600mm, pins and clips shall be used at maximum 380mm spacings.
Insulation shall be applied with edges tightly butted up against flanges and adjoining insulation.
Joints between pieces of insulation shall be made by gluing a 100mm wide sealing strip of
Sisalation 450 centrally over the joint onto the vapour barrier except at flange joints where a
150mm wide sealing strip shall be used. A minimum of 50mm lap shall be achieved in every
case.
Wherever possible, insulation shall be applied to ducts prior to them being lifted up into
position, particularly where they are installed hard against walls or slabs.
Banding of insulation is not acceptable.
23.08.04 FIRE RATED DUCTWORK
Fire rated ductwork shall be of a proprietary manufacturer such as ‘VICUCLAD’ or approved

equal to Civil Defence Approval. Alternatively, a spray-on “non-asbestos” material may be
installed on sheetmetal ducts. The final finish shall not exceed 120mm, for a 2 hour fire rating,
for combustion from the outside in and the inside out. Spray-on rating shall be trowel finished
where exposed to view. Duct mountings must take into account the wet weight of the duct and
fire rating.
23.08.05 REFRIGERATION SUCTION GAS PIPEWORK
Refrigeration suction gas pipework shall be insulated using moulded section self-extinguishing
grade expanded polystyrene foam insulated with two coats of thick bitumen base vapour sealing
mastic such that the vapour seal has a permeance of not more than 0.000572 ugNs. The vapour
seal shall be reinforced with a layer of open weave No. 10 fibreglass cloth between coats. The
vapour seal coating shall be suitable for use on the styrene foam insulation.
In plantrooms and other exposed areas insulation shall be faced and vapour sealed with
Sisalation 450 and then sheathed in 0.4mm zincanneal formed to suit.
Pipework inside conditioner units, inside riser shafts, inside masonry ducts and return air
chambers shall be deemed to be concealed.
Insulation at bends etc. shall be cut and mitred to fit neatly and tight. Insulation o straight pipes
shall be butted together tightly.
On straight pipe the longitudinal joints shall be staggered axially and shall not form a
continuous straight line.
Insulation shall be stopped square at each side of valves, unions and flanges clear of bolts.
Zincanneal sheathing shall be held in position using not less than three galvanised steel bands on
each section. Sheathing at bends shall be neatly cut and formed in "lobsterback" sections and
pre-drilled and fastened using pop rivets or straps so that the vapour barrier underneath is not
penetrated.

INSULATION
Pipe hangers shall be 'D' clamps or circumferential clamps over wood or cork blocks of the
same diameter as the insulation in which case the insulation shall be butted up each side and the
vapour seal (and sheathing if exposed) shall be carried through between the clamp and the wood
or cork block to give a continuous vapour barrier.
Alternatively hangers may be 'D' clamps or circumferential clamps around sections of pre-
formed polystyrene foam insulation with rolled 1.6mm galvanised sheet steel half round
supports 500mm long under the insulation in which case the vapour seal (and sheathing if
exposed) shall be carried through under the 1.6mm support and the clamp to give a continuous
vapour barrier.
Where expanded polystyrene foam insulation is used the styrene shall be stopped short 300mm
on each side where pipes penetrate fire barriers. The section of pipe through the fire barrier
shall be insulated with rockwool or fibreglass moulded section pipe insulation with aluminium
foil facing the vapour seal.
23.08.06 SMALL REFRIGERATION PIPEWORK
Refrigerant suction pipework under 25mm diameter may be insulated with a Superlon,
Armaflex or Bradflex based insulation system, subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Minimum thickness shall be 9.5 mm and thermal conductivity of not greater than 0.039 W/mK
@ 24°C.
Wherever refrigerant suction and liquid lines are run in contact with each other they may share
common insulation formed to match the cross-section of the two (2) pipes or be insulated
separately.
Insulation shall be vapour sealed against condensation on the suction line only with unsplit
insulation, slipped over the work as it progresses. Insulation shall be on cork blocks and vapour
sealed over. All joints in the insulation shall be glued with an approved waterproof adhesive
and taped.
23.08.07 CHILLED WATER PIPEWORK
Pipework insulation shall be preformed pipe sections manufactured by a recognized

manufacturer as further detailed:
. Chilled water - Closed cell polyethylene foam, density = 50 kg/m³, not greater
than 0.034W/mK @ 20°C or high density mineral wool,
density = 80kg/m³, not greater than 0.035 W/mK @ 20°C.
- Noise reduction up to 32 db(A)
Chilled water pipework shall be installed with a suitable vapour seal.
Insulation shall be stopped square at each side of valves, unions and flanges clear of bolts.
Insulated pipework installed exposed in plantrooms and elsewhere subject to mechanical

damage, shall be sheathed.
Zincanneal or Aluminum sheathing shall be held in position using not less than three galvanised
steel bands on each section. Sheathing at bends shall be neatly cut and formed in “lobsterback”

INSULATION
sections and pre-drilled and fastened using pop rivets or straps so that the vapour barrier
underneath is not penetrated.
. 0.7 mm cladding for piping up to 65 mm diameter

. 0.9 mm cladding for piping greater than 65 mm diameter.
Pipe hangers shall be ‘D’ clamps or circumferential clamps over phenolic foam blocks of the
same diameter as the insulation in which case the insulation shall be butted up each side and the
vapour seal (and sheathing if exposed) shall be carried through between the clamp and the block
to give a continuous vapour barrier.
The following minimum thicknesses of thermal insulation shall be provided:
. 19 mm for pipe diameter up to 75 mm

. 32 mm for pipe diameters 100 to 250 mm
. 50 mm for pipe diameters 300 and above.
All concealed uPVC condensate drain pipework shall be insulated with 13 mm thick 50 kg/m3
closed cell polyethylene insulation.
Condensate pipework in plantrooms shall be insulated as noted on drawings.
23.08.08 SAMPLES
Submit samples of all types of insulation for approval complete with full technical details.
Approved samples will be retained on site for future reference.

23.09.00 WATER TREATMENT
23.09.01 GENERAL
Water treatment shall be provided as specified in the following clauses.
23.09.02 FLUSHING
The piping of each system shall be thoroughly flushed out before the system is placed into
operation.
Flushing shall:
. remove all foreign materials left or deposited in the piping systems during their erection;
. be carried out using a water, solvent and corrosion inhibitor solution.
The systems shall:
. be filled with flushing solution, the solution circulated for at least 48 hours and then
drained;
. have strainers and filters cleaned as often as necessary during flushing and at the end of
the cycle;
. be refilled with a clean flushing solution, the solution circulated for at least 24 hours and
then drained;
. have strainers and filters cleaned;
. system shall be re-filled with clean water, re-circulated or run through for a further four
(4) hours, and again drained and flushed. The flushing shall continue until the effluent is
clear, colourless, odourless, free from suspended solids and such that the iron level is not
more than 10ppm and the conductivity is no more than 30µs/cm greater than the make-up
water. Test reports to be submitted to the Engineer for approval.
If after the third flushing the solution drained is passed as clean by the Engineer the system shall
be left drained until the plant is ready for commissioning. Filling of the system for
commissioning shall not take place until the water treatment is ready for simultaneous
commissioning.
If the engineer does not pass the system as clean, flushing cycles shall be repeated until the
system is passed as being clean.
23.09.03 SYSTEMS OPERATED WITHOUT WATER TREATMENT
If systems are operated without water treatment being provided or if water treatment plant
malfunctions the Mechanical Trade shall drain the system and open for inspection where
instructed by the Engineer.
Any fouling shall be removed and any damaged surfaces replaced all to the approval of the
engineer.

WATER TREATMENT
23.09.03.01 Hydrostatic Pressure Testing
All water for hydrostatic pressure testing of pipework systems, shall be introduced via a contact
head water meter which shall control a chemical dosing pump, so that the required quantity of
chemical can be introduced while the water is being introduced. This chemically treated water
shall remain in each section of the system until all sections have been pressure tested and the
complete system is ready for the cleaning operation. The chemical used shall be of the oxygen
scavenging corrosion inhibitor type.
23.09.04 WATER TREATMENT
An approved expert water treatment company shall be employed to carry out water treatment.
The expert company shall supply all chemicals for system start up of the chilled water and run
around coil water. Chemicals sufficient for contractual maintenance period shall be arranged by
approve suppliers such as Culligan, Metito, NALCO or approved equal.
The expert company shall:
. study the scheduled systems and take note of: materials in the system, water circulation
rates, water make up rates, system operating conditions including idle periods, sources of
water contamination at the site, current regulations governing chemicals in waste water
and all other relevant parameters;
. propose a water treatment programme to control: corrosion, scale, algae, bacteria and
suspended solids in the chilled water system (proposals shall include treatment during
commissioning, operating and idle phases;
. supply all treatment materials required for commissioning and the first year of operation;
. supply all labour necessary to commission the systems and achieve stable operating
conditions;
. supply skilled supervision of the treatment of the systems during the first year’s
operating. This shall include at least twelve (12) site visits at not greater than monthly
intervals (an inspection report shall be submitted to the engineer following each visit).
A microbiological evaluation to assess control of microbiological load in the system shall be

conducted in the first three (3) months of operation.
The system piping shall make provision for a dosing pot, valves and fittings in the plantroom to
facilitate water treatment of the closed system with connections for necessary equipment to
bring the water to acceptable limits as follows:
1) Ph 9.0 – 9.5
2) Fe content <1
3) Chloride Max 800ppm
4) Molybdate 30 to 70
5) Suspended Solids (NTU) <150
6) Total Hardness 80
7) ALk (M) and (P) 100
8) TDS 150

WATER TREATMENT
An appropriate corrosion rack shall be provided by the contractor for the first three (3) months.
The contractor shall conduct 30 day corrosion coupon analysis on carbon steel as per ASTM
Standards and report results to the engineer.

23.10.00 CORROSION PROTECTION, PAINTING & LABELLING
23.10.01 GENERAL
Corrosion protection shall comply with following clauses of this section of the specification.
Where galvanising is mentioned throughout the specification it shall mean hot dip galvanising
complying with the treatment specified in clause 'Galvanising'.
Corrosion protection shall be applied after all cutting, drilling and welding has been completed.
Sheetmetal work is exempted from the clause above except in the case of equipment casings
containing water or having cold surfaces on which condensation could form.
There shall be no pockets anywhere in the system and equipment installed which can collect and
retain water.
There shall be no direct contact between dissimilar metals in other than permanently dry
location. In moist locations l mm thick polychloroprene, PVC or polythene gaskets shall
separate metals.
Treated surfaces shall be handled carefully to prevent damage to the coatings.
The repair of defective or damaged surface coatings shall be at the Mechanical Trade’s expense.
Cleaning and repair shall be in accordance with the treatment originally specified.
23.10.02 PAINTING, GENERAL
All painting shall be performed in a neat, thorough and workmanlike manner.
All paint shall be mixed, thinned and applied to comply with manufacturer's instructions.
The first coat of paint shall be applied immediately after cleaning and the interval between
subsequent coats shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended period.
Alternate coats shall be of different shades to facilitate application and inspection.
Each coat shall be uniform and shall be free from runs, sags and other imperfections.
Surfaces adjacent to surfaces which are to be cleaned and painted shall be adequately protected
during the cleaning and painting.
Upon completion of painting work the Mechanical Trade or their representative shall remove
any paint spilt on adjacent surfaces leaving their finish in a clean and acceptable condition.
Wherever practicable, metal work shall be painted in the factory before dispatch to the site of
the work. Metal work that requires blast cleaning shall be fully primed before leaving the
factory.
Surfaces to be painted that will be inaccessible after installation shall be completely painted
prior to installation.
Paint that is loose, weakly bonded, blistered, abraded or otherwise defective shall be removed
and the surface re-cleaned and repainted.

CORROSION PROTECTION, PAINTING & LABELLING
Before applying subsequent coats of paint the Mechanical Trade or their representative shall
clean and repair all areas of previous coats which are defective or damaged.
After installation of equipment any damage to finished painted surfaces shall be made good.
After completion of the testing of all components of the plant, all equipment exposed to view,
from floor level, (or catwalks where provided) located in plantrooms, fan rooms, equipment
rooms, car parks, open air areas and similar locations shall be painted.
All painting shall be done by experienced tradesmen with first class quality paints brought to
site in the manufacturer's sealed containers. All coats of paint on any one item shall be of the
same type and manufacture and shall be applied as recommended by the manufacturer.
23.10.03 SURFACE PREPARATION
Surface preparation of steel shall comply with the following:
23.10.03.01 Degreasing
All oil, grease and dirt shall be removed from the surface by a suitable solvent.
23.10.03.02 Hand Cleaning
Following degreasing all dust, mill scale and other foreign substances likely to affect the
adherence and uniformity of the finished coating shall be removed to preparation grade.
23.10.03.03 Blast Cleaning
Following degreasing the surface shall be treated to a class 3 standard of surface preparation by
grit or sand blast cleaning. The surface roughness shall be appropriate for the specified
treatment, i.e. painting or metal spraying.
23.10.03.04 Pickling
Following degreasing and hand cleaning to remove heavy deposits of oil, grease, dirt and other
matter not removed by pickling, the surface to be treated shall be cleaned free from scale and
rust.
Surface preparation of non-ferrous metals shall comply with the following:
23.10.03.05 Hand and Machine
As above except that the finished surface shall be uniformly clean and bright.
Surface preparation of concrete shall comply with the following:
. The surface shall be smooth and uniformly textured.

. The concrete shall be cured for the minimum time recommended for the paint applied.
. Surfaces shall be dusted down before application of paint.
Weld, spatters, slag, burrs, casting sand and any other surface irregularities shall be removed
before preparing surfaces.

23.10.04 PROTECTIVE TREATMENTS
23.10.04.01 Galvanising
Surfaces shall be prepared by pickling.
The zinc coating shall:
. be applied to all surfaces;

. be smooth, uniform and free from defects;
. not clog intricate surfaces such as screw threads;
. be applied to give average weight of 750 g/m² and to give a minimum 600 g/m².
Components damaged during galvanising shall be made good to approval or replaced.
23.10.04.02 Painting of Metal (Enamel Finish)
Surfaces shall be prepared by degreasing and hand cleaning.
Galvanised surfaces shall be wash primed, washed and dried.
Surfaces shall be given:
. one coat of red oxide zinc chromate primer;

. one undercoat;
. one finishing coat of enamel.
23.10.04.03 Painting of Concrete
Surfaces shall be prepared as specified in clause 'Surface Preparation'.
Surfaces shall be given:
. one coat of cement sealer;

. one undercoat;
. one finishing coat of enamel.
23.10.05 PAINTING MATERIAL
Paint such as Enamel, Enamel Undercoat and Red Oxide Zinc Chromate Primer, shall fully
comply with requirements of the current British Standards:
Paint shall be delivered to the site in the manufacturer's sealed containers bearing the
manufacturer's label, the date of manufacturer and the batch number.
Where possible all paints used for one painting system shall be supplied by one manufacturer.
23.10.06 PAINTING SCOPE
All visible parts of the specified works shall be painted to approval except where such painting
is specified as being carried out by others. In addition all external parts of the installation
subject to corrosion shall be painted with a suitable protective coating.
Finish painting of the following shall be considered as a minimum requirement:

. Ductwork exposed to weather

. Pipework, valves and fittings exposed to weather
. All plant and equipment exposed to weather.
. MCCs, control panels, conduits, cable trays and ducts exposed to weather.
. All air outlets
. Any minor sundry items
. Car park ductwork
23.10.07 LABELLING
After painting all equipment ducts and pipework shall be identified with Safetyman labels in
accordance with BS1710 “Identification of Pipelines and Services". Labels shall be located at
approximately 3m intervals in plantrooms, and labels shall be provided at each service access
opening into pipe shafts. Where pipes run together the labels shall be grouped together.

23.11.00 PIPED MEDICAL GASES, VACUUM, MEDICAL AIR AND ANAESTHETIC GAS
SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
23.11.01 MEDICAL GAS
23.11.01.01 Extent of Work
The work shall include for a design check and co-ordination, supply, manufacturer’s work
testing and certification, installation, site testing and commissioning the following systems:
. Piped Medical Gases (including oxygen (O2) and Nitrous Oxide (N2O) complete with
manifolds, pipework, valves, fittings and terminal units including cylinders for pressure
testing.
. Piped Medical Vacuum System complete with central plant, piping, valves, fittings and
terminal units.
. Piped Medical Air System 4 bar complete with central plant, piping, valves fittings and
terminal units.
. Piped Surgical Air System 7 bar complete with central plant, piping, valves fittings and
terminal units.
. Alarm panels, essential services power supplies and all associated controls and
interconnecting wiring.
. Dedicated Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging Disposal Systems.
All works shall be carried out by a Medical Gas Specialist registered to BSEN 9001 who has a
minimum of 5 years experience in the Medical Gas field and has dedicated office and
maintenance facilities in the UAE. The specialist shall ensure that all systems are installed as
per the recommendations made in the UK, Health and Technical Memorandum, HTM2022,
C11 and appropriate British Standards and Codes of Practice.
The specialist shall be responsible for preparing detailed design checks, flow rate calculations,
pressure drop calculations, isometric workshop and construction drawings and provide the final
certification of all systems.
The specialist shall supply four (4) sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals.
23.11.02 ASSOCIATED WORKS
The following work associated with the medical gas installation shall be undertaken and co-
ordinated by the Contractor.
. Provision of openings and core holes through the structure.
. Building in of conduits, wall boxes, wiring access boxes.
. Making good all walls and floors after chasing provided chasing is done before final
finishes are applied.
. Essential services sub-mains from the main switchboard terminated at the central plant.
. Circuit protection units on main switchboard for power circuits serving central pant.

PIPED MEDICAL GASES, VACUUM, MEDICAL AIR AND ANAESTHETIC GAS
SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
23.11.03 STANDARDS AND LOCAL REGULATIONS
All equipment supplied and work carried out shall comply with the requirements of the latest
editions of HTM 2022, C11-Model Engineering Specification and EN737, Parts 1-4 and
relevant B.S. Codes of Practice referred therein.
The electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the local
Supply Authority.
All equipment shall be “CE” marked under the Medical Devices Directives 93/42/EEC with
approval from notified body No.0301 (BVQI).
23.11.04 EQUIPMENT AND UNIFORMITY
All items of equipment shall be of first grade with regard to design and manufacture and shall be
completely satisfactory for operation, control, safety and maintenance under all conditions of
service.
Uniformity of type and manufacture of switchgear, controlgear, fittings and accessories shall be
preserved throughout the whole of the installation.
23.11.05 PIPEWORK, FLANGES AND SUPPORTS
23.11.05.01 General
The piped distribution system shall use copper pipes manufactured from phosphorous de-
oxidised non-arsenical copper (Grade CWO24A) to EN1412 and be manufactured to metric
outside diameters in accordance with EN1057: 1996 R250 (half hard). Pipes are to be
degreased suitable for oxygen use and cleanliness is to be maintained by filling each pipe with
high purity nitrogen, fitting suitable end caps and protectively wrapping.
Fittings shall be end feed type, manufactured from the same grade of copper as the pipes and be
in accordance with the requirements of BS EN1254-1: 1998 Part 1. Fittings shall be degreased
suitable for oxygen use and supplied sealed in protective polythene bags.
The bags shall be securely fastened and clearly labelled “For use with Piped Medical Gas”.
Copper to Copper joints shall be made on site using a silver-copper-phosphorous brazing alloy
to BS1845 using an oxygen free nitrogen inert gas shield and no flux. Copper to brass or
gunmetal joints shall not be made on site.
Pipework shall be sized and run as shown on drawings or specified. Drawings are schematic
indicating the route, connections and fittings required but may not in all parts show piping in its
true position. This shall not absolve the Contractor from their responsibility for the proper
erection of pipework suitable for the duty intended.
Pipework shall be suitable for the working and test pressures specified.
23.11.05.02 Handling, Preparation, Installation
Piping shall be carefully handled to avoid damage to piping and building surfaces.
Only new, clean and undamaged piping shall be used.

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
Pipes shall be machine cut by a method giving square ends and undistorted sections.
Pipework shall:
. be neatly installed in locations shown on drawings or specified;
. have risers arranged vertical and horizontal runs either parallel or normal to enclosure
walls;
. have parallel runs neatly grouped;
. not transmit vibration perceptible to human senses nor noise perceptible above the noise
of components for which sound power level limits have been specified;
. be installed with provision for expansion and contraction;
. not interfere with the removal of equipment, coils or other piping, nor restrict access to
doors, hatches or windows;
. pass all specified tests prior to being insulated or otherwise concealed.
23.11.05.03 Brazing
Brazing shall:
. be carried out by skilled tradesmen;
. be carried out on joints which are clean and properly prepared.
. Brazed joints shall be of the spigot and socket type achieved either by use of capillary
joint fittings or machine formed integral sockets in one end of the meeting pipes. Integral
sockets shall have a length of one pipe diameter or 25mm maximum.
. Brazed pipeline jointing for copper to copper joints made on site shall utilize a copper
phosphorous brazing alloy type CPI BS1845 and an inert gas shield and no flux.
. Inert Gas Shielding shall be provided internally for all on site fluxless jointing and hot
forming of bends. The inert gas shall be oxygen free grade nitrogen.
. Each cylinder or group of cylinders shall be fitted with a pressure regulator and a means
of providing and controlling a high flush purge and a low flush purge.
23.11.05.04 Flanges
Flanges shall
. be of a compatible material with the piping joined;
. be brazed to copper piping;
. Match flanges on equipment or valves and be suitable for the temperatures and pressures
of the system in which installed;

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
. have a gasket selected for the duty fitted in the joint;
. be connected by zinc plated bolts, nuts and washers.
23.11.05.05 Change in Diameter
Fittings providing a streamlined change in diameter shall be used to connect pipes of different
diameters.
23.11.05.06 Supports
All piping shall be supported within 150 mm of all change of direction and branches and at
intervals specified in HTM 2022 using a suitable metallic, non-ferrous material or a ferrous
material suitably treated to prevent corrosion and electrolytic action. Non electrical conducting
flexible connections shall not be used as medical gas systems.
Supports shall:
. permit appropriate movement for expansion and contraction in controlled directions;
. be arranged so that stresses or loads due to expansion or contraction pressure reaction,

and the weight of the pipes do not exceed the safe loads for the support, supporting
structure, any pumps or other equipment to which the pipes connect, and the pipes
themselves;
. not bridge any vibration isolation;
. be fixed to structural elements with adequate strength for the duty. Fixings shall not
weaken the supporting structure.
23.11.05.07 Expansion, Contraction
Pipework shall be completed with provision for controlled expansion and contraction.
When possible piping shall be arranged to be sufficiently flexible to expand and contract
without:
. development of excessive stresses in the pipework;
. transferring excessive stresses to connected equipment or the structure supporting

pipework;
. when the inherent flexibility of pipework is inadequate, expansion loops, bellows or

telescopic connectors shall be provided.
23.11.05.08 Sleeves
Sleeves shall:
. be provided at all piping penetrations through floors, walls, roof and equipment casings;
. be fabricated in copper
. be installed flush with the underside of floor slabs and with the upper side projecting
75mm above floor slabs.

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
. project 50mm each side of wall penetrations;
. be 10mm larger in diameter than pipe;
. be sealed at sound barriers, equipment casings, and penetration of masonry air shafts;
. have lock seamed on spot welded joints;
. be supplied and installed by the Contractor.
Sleeves penetrating fire-rated floors and walls shall have the space between piping and the
sleeve packed with a fire resistant packing to the thickness of the fire barrier.
Seals shall be:
. sewn boots fabricated in Wavebar 120 leaded vinyl;
. clipped to piping and pipe sleeves with 'Cheney' worm drive hose clips;
. be airtight;
. installed on both sides of the sleeve at penetrations through plantroom walls and slabs.
23.11.05.09 Escutcheon Plates
Escutcheon plates shall be fitted where exposed pipes pass through walls or ceilings.
Plates shall:
. trim the piping opening;
. be of 1.0mm thick "galvabond" construction;
. be in one piece, slipped over the pipe before joints are made;
. be screw fixed to walls.
23.11.06 PIPELINE SHUT OFF VALVES & ZONE ISOLATION VALVE BOX
(ZIVB)
Valves shall be manufactured of oxygen compatible materials and carry the manufacturers serial
number for identification and size. They should be capable of withdrawal without cutting the
pipework.
Valves shall be of the ball lever type, provided with a means of key locking in either the open or
closed position.
Valves shall open and close with a 90 degree turn of the lever, the valve to be closed when the
lever lies at right angles to the pipe run.
A manufacturer’s certificate shall be supplied for each valve or batch of valves stating that they
have been pressure tested to:
- establish their suitability for the working pressure; and

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
- cleaned and degreased and that any solvents have been completely removed.
Medical gas line ball valve assemblies shall be constructed of a nickel plated brass body, PTFE
seats/seals and a brass chrome plated ball. The valve shall operate by a manual operating lever
selected through 90 deg. All medical gas line ball valves shall provide a full bore flow and shall
be cleaned for oxygen service and fully tested prior to dispatch. Smaller type valve assemblies
(15 to 42 mm inclusive) shall incorporate stainless steel ‘Dowty’ bonded seals and mechanically
sealed connectors. Larger type valve assemblies (54 to 159mm inclusive) shall be flanged,
installed with stainless steel bolts, nuts and spring washers with 3 mm Viton sealing gaskets. In
all cases, the use of PTFE tape or any other thread sealing medium shall not be used during
installation.
Each medical gas line ball valve assembly shall terminate in copper stud pipes to enable brazing
direct into the distribution system using the fluxless brazing technique with N2 purge. A
locking device shall be provided to enable the valve to be locked in either the fully open or fully
closed position.
Do not install valves in any duct or void unless effective ventilation can be guaranteed at all
conditions.
Zone Valve Box (ZVB) shall be as manufactured by Medaes, model Medizone or approved
equal and shall consist of a ball valves, together with the other features detailed below, all
installed within a box, having a key lockable hinged cover which is gas specific when it bears
the gas(es) name, capable of being locked with the valve in the open or closed position.
ZVB shall be flush mounted and shall be provided with a second fix bezel to cover the
plaster/box joint. ZVB shall have the following features:
. Shall contain one or more ball lever valve(s) as indicated on drawings.
. Shall have ease of access for fitting the valve(s) and pipework and for maintenance.
. Shall be ventilated to prevent a build up of gas in the event of a leak and have pipe entries
and other box penetrations sealed with a suitable sealant.
. Shall have means of gaining access in an emergency without the use of the key.
. Shall have means of physically isolating and blanking off the service(s) both upstream
and downstream of the valve(s) by means of removable sections and replacement blank
plates. One blank plate to be provided for each valve(s) shall have NIST connector
bodies, with self sealing check valves upstream and downstream of the blanc plate. Plugs
or caps to be captive.
. Shall have boxes of metallic or substantial plastic construction, capable of withstanding

damage from blows or abrasions, and having no sharp edges.
. Shall have in the case of multi-service boxes either means of introducing a hose assembly
to any one NIST connector while locked, or separate access to any of the NIST
connectors for the purpose of attaching a hose assembly.
. Shall have a separate boss(es) to include pressure gauge(s) /switch(s).
. Bear the product batch number.
. Shall include an “Area Alarm Panel”.

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
The ZVB shall be pre-wired, pre-piped, completely assembled and tested ready for
installation into a finished building.
Medical gas/vacuum services shall be fixed copper piped to and from their respective
ZVB and shall normally terminate in copper stub pipes normally connected at ceiling
level.
The position of the copper stub pipes shall be handed as specified by the customer.
Pressure/vacuum switch assemblies shall be installed as a bank mounted on an internal
mounting frame and connect to their respective gas service downstream of the ZVB and utilize
‘minimum leak’ adaptors.
Electrical cables to the medical gas alarm panels shall be routed and secured clear of the
medical gas/vacuum services, and the complete electrical installation shall conform to current
IEE regulations. All metal components within the assembly shall be electrically bonded and the
installation shall be earthed.
23.11.07 TERMINAL UNITS
Terminal units shall be provided where shown on the drawing and detailed on medical
equipment room data sheets. Each terminal unit for N2O air and oxygen shall be equipped with a
self-sealing valve.
Each terminal unit for N2O and oxygen shall be provided with a secondary shut off valve.
The medical gas terminal units shall conform to BS EN 737-1:1998 and accept probes to
BS5682:1984. The anaesthetic gas scavenging (AGS) terminal unit shall conform to
BS6834:1987.
The wall mounted first fix assembly shall consist of a brass pipeline termination block with
copper stub pipe permanently secured between a back plate and a gas specific plate which
allows limited radial movement of a copper stub to align with the pipeline. The first fix shall
incorporate a maintenance valve and a test plug. The test plug provides an effective blank to
enable carcass pressure testing. The second fix plastic components shall be moulded from fire
retardant polycarbonate with the pin index permanently moulded into the gas specific socket.
The socket assembly retains a sealed capsule assembly containing the check valve and probe
‘O’ ring seal. The replaceable capsule assembly must enable all working parts subject to wear
and tear through usage to be replaced as a factory tested assembly. Medical gas terminal units
shall accommodate a variable plaster depth of up to a maximum of 16mm.
Terminal units shall be gas specific and only accept the correct medical gas probe. Gas specific
components shall be pin-indexed to ensure that a correct gas specific assembly is achieved so
that in normal course of dismantling for repair or maintenance, parts from other gasses cannot
inadvertently be used. Wall mounted terminal units shall incorporate an anti-rotation pin to
engage with connected downstream medical equipment ensuring correct orientation.
Terminal units installed in booms, bed head units or pendants shall be attached to their
respective flexible gas hose by a gas specific NIST fitting and anti rotation pins shall not be
fitted. Terminal units located in a rigid installation shall be capable of single-handed insertion
and removal of the correct BS5682: 1984 medical gas probe.
The terminal units shall have a three-year warranty, subject to the recommended minimum
routine maintenance operations and shall be ‘CE’ marked under the Medical Devices Directive
93/42/EEC with approval from notified body no.0301 (BVQI).

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
23.11.08 PRESSURE GAUGE, SWITCHES, REGULATIONS AND SAFETY

VALVES
23.11.08.01 Pressure Gauge
Pressure gauges shall be a minimum of 30 mm diameter. The face shall have coloured sectors
clearly indicating the acceptable working range.
A gauge having a minimum diameter of 100 mm shall be installed adjacent to the plant to
indicate available suction on vacuum Plants.
23.11.08.02 Pressure Switches
Pressure switches shall be provided in the medical vacuum system to indicate low vacuum and
vacuum failure. The low vacuum switch shall sense the vacuum in the receiver and a vacuum
failure switch shall be located between the zone isolation valve box and the first terminal unit.
Pressure switches shall be provided in the medical breathing air system to indicate pre filter air
pressure and air supply failure. The pre filter pressure switch shall sense the pressure in the
receiver and an air supply failure switch shall be located between the zone isolation valve box
and the first terminal unit.
Pressure switches shall be provided in the oxygen system to indicate emergency cylinder supply
low pressure, emergency supply operation and oxygen supply failure. The cylinder supply low
pressure switch shall sense the pressure in the emergency bottle supply manifold, the emergency
supply operation switch shall sense when the emergency supply is in operation i.e. main supply
has failed and an oxygen supply failure shall be located between the zone isolation valve box
and the first terminal unit.
23.11.08.03 Pressure Control Regulators
Pressure control regulators shall be provided throughout the medical gas systems to maintain a
set pressure and ensure correct operating pressure at the terminal unit.
23.11.08.04 Pressure Safety Valve
Pressure safety valves shall be installed within the systems to prevent over pressurisation.
23.11.09 MEDICAL VACUUM PLANT
23.11.09.01 General
The medical suction plant shall be as manufactured by Medaes VC series or approved equal and
shall comprise two (2) identical suction pumps each capable of supplying the design flow rate
on its own. The suction pumps shall be air cooled and mounted on a common vacuum receiver
vessel together with the control panel. The requirements of UKNHS – Model Engineering
Specification C11 and Health Technical Memorandum 2022 (HTM 2022) shall be complied
with. The Medical Vacuum Plant shall ensure the minimum pipeline vacuum level of 450mm
Hg is maintained at the plant service connection point at the rated volumetric ‘free air’ flow rate.
23.11.09.02 Vacuum Pumps

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
Each vacuum pump shall be of the oil lubricated rotary vane type complete with direct
connected electric motor, non return valve on the inlet side of the pump, inlet screen and oil mist
separator all capable of continuous operation over the entire working pressure range.
Each pump shall be equipped with an oil drain valve. Oil shall be isolated in the pump from the
rest of the system by way on an anti suckback valves. Each pump shall include an oil sight
glass for easy checking of the oil level. The pump inlet shall be protected by means of two inlet
screens, one coarse and one fine. Each pump will include an intake filter along with an
individual inlet isolating valve.
The Pump unit coupled to an electric motor shall form a complete assembly. All motors shall
comply with Model Specification C51, with the addition of class F insulation and Class B
Temperature rise.
Each unit shall be capable of producing a higher vacuum than that required in the pipeline so
that the resistance of traps, filters etc. and back pressure are overcome.
The plant shall be capable of providing a vacuum of not less than 650mm Hg.
The plant shall have a minimum capacity as indicated on drawings when the pump has
equilibrated at nominal operating temperature whilst maintaining a pipeline pressure of 450mm
Hg.
Noise from the plant shall not exceed a free field noise level measured at 1m from the plant of
75dBA up to 5HW and 82 dBA above.
23.11.09.03 Vacuum Receiver
The receiver capacity shall be such that the operating pump does not start more than 10 times
per hour during normal working conditions and have a minimum water capacity equal to the
ACD capability in litres per minute of the plant at 450 mmHg
The quality of materials, welding and general construction of the vacuum receiver shall be in
accordance with EN286 or BS5169/1975 Class 3 Grade E. Handholes shall be provided in the
vessel. A 100 mm diameter vacuum gauge shall be fitted on the receiver. The external shell
shall be sand blasted, coated with one coat of primer and one coat of enamel.
23.11.09.04 Control Panel
An electrical panel and electric installation shall be supplied for the operation and control of the
suction pumps. The panel shall have an IP 55 rating and be mounted on the receiver.
The controls shall be such that the standby pump shall start automatically on failure of the duty
pump or in the event that the duty pump fails to maintain adequate vacuum. The pumps shall be
automatically changed from duty to standby to even wear on each pump.
The control panel equipment and controls shall include but not be limited to the following :
. main power isolating switch

. motor contactor for each pump
. motor protection circuit breaker for each pump
. hour run meter for each pump
. test/on/off auto select switch for each pump
. service due light with reset key switch
. pump fault light for each pump
. low vacuum light

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
. vacuum failure light
. voltage free contacts for remote indication of duty/standby pump operation, service due
and faults.
. Conform to IEE
The vacuum plant shall have three stages of alarm conditions inputting to the alarm system and
follows:
1) Plant faults caused by:

Control circuit failure
Activation of any other safety device
Failure of a selected pump to run up to speed on time.
2) Plant Emergency caused by:

Low receiver vacuum (50mmHg above cut in pressure of lag pump(s)
3) Pressure fault caused by:

Pipeline vacuum less than 360mmHg
Building Management System contacts shall also be provided for:

(Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts);
Plant fault;
Plant Emergency;
Pipeline Pressure fault.
23.11.09.05 Bacterial Filters/Drainage Trap Assembly
Bacterial filters shall comprise two independent subassemblies either of which may be selected
by the use of manual valves as “primary” whilst retaining the second assembly as “secondary”.
Each sub-assembly shall comprise a bacterial filter assembly with drainage trap, rated at the
plant capacity. The assembly being located between the reservoir(s) and the plant/pipeline
interface.
The assembly shall be marked distinctly with the words “BIO HAZARD” and have a filter
efficiency when tested by the sodium flame test in accordance with BS 3928, not exceeding 0-
005% penetration at the design flow.
The pressure drop through a clean filter shall not exceed 25mmHg at a vacuum of 475 mmHg at
full design flaw.
23.11.09.06 Exhaust System
The vacuum pump exhaust system shall be sized, routed and terminated outside at high level
with a clearly identified weather proof notice stating “MEDICAL VACUUM DISCHARGE
POINT – DO NOT DISTURB”.
23.11.10 MEDICAL COMPRESSED AIR PLANT (4 BAR)
23.11.10.01 General
The Medical Compressed Air Plant shall be as manufactured by Medaes, model MA series or
approved equal. The plant shall be capable of providing the total flow rate with one compressor
not running shall be provided for medical air (4 bar) supply system.

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
A standby manifold shall be provided for the medical air (4 bar). The plant shall be complete
with compressors, after coolers, air receivers, filtration/dryers, pressure regulator and relief
valves, non return valves, isolating valves; gauges and pressure switches, control panel and
indication systems all to fully conform to the requirements of UK NHS – Model Engineering
Specification C11 and Health Technical Memorandum No 2022 (HTM 2022)
23.11.10.02 Air Compressors
A minimum of two identical screw compressors shall be provided each directly driven by
electric motors of Class F type noise levels tested to BS4999 and designed to operate at high
ambient temperatures up to 52oC. Air intake filter and silencer shall be provided for each
compressor.
The package shall include Intercooler and aftercooler with moisture separator and automatic
condensate drains and a sound attenuating enclosure with quick latch-panels for easy
accessibility.
23.11.10.03 Air Receivers
Cylindrical air receivers shall be vertical or horizontal for a working pressure of 10.30 bar (1030
kpa) abs unless otherwise indicated on drawings and shall be fitted with access panel to enable
full internal inspection; gate valves, in line non return valves, pressure gauge, automatic drain
trap with manual bypass, flexible plug and safety valve. The receiver shall have a minimum
water capacity as per HTM 2022 standard. Air receivers shall be fabricated inspected, tested
and certified in accordance with BS5169 Class 3 Grade E and EN286 or equivalent Test
Certificates shall be provided with the equipment.
23.11.10.04 Air Dryers, Filter Dryer Assembly & After Coolers
Air delivery is via duplexed sets of filters, pre-filter, oil filter, dust filter, activated carbon filter
and bacterial filter. Each filter shall be fitted with differential pressure gauges to monitor filter
performance.
The air at the outlet shall contain no more than:
Water 115 mg/m3

Dry particulate 0.01 mg/m3
Oil mist 0.01 mg/m3
Oil vapour 0.03 mg/m3
Carbon monoxide 5.0 mg/m3 5 ppm v/v
Carbon dioxide 450 mg/m3 500 ppm v/v
Duplex desiccant dryers shall be used and controlled by a separate control panel and incorporate
a dew point alarm system.
Air Dryers
Duplicate air dryers shall be provided. Each dryer shall be capable of dealing with the
continuous full load capacity. A separator and filter-assembly shall be installed upstream of the
air dryers and filters shall be installed downstream of the air dryers.
Dryers shall be of the activated alumina heatless type having two columns, used and regenerated
alternatively. The bleed air from the column type dryer shall be controlled by a readily
accessible valve and the outlet shall be fitted with a silencer discharging over a tundish.

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
Each dryer shall be designed to provide a desiccant bed life of not less than two years on
continuous full load and each should be fitted with a safety valve and pressure gauge.
Filtration/Dryer System
Filtration/dryer system shall comprise two (2) independent sub-assemblies either of which may
be selected as “DUTY” whilst retaining the second assembly as “STANDBY” and each
assembly to comprise the following:
a) Separator/pre-filter – providing maximum remaining oil content of 0.5 mg/m3, particle

removal down to 1 micron and DOP penetration of less than 0.03%.
b) Coalescing filter – providing maximum remaining oil content of 0.01 mg/m3, particle
removal to 0.01 micron and DOP penetration of less than 0.0001%.
c) Pair of dryer columns
d) Dust filter – providing particle removal down to 1 micron and DOP penetration of less
than 0.03%.
e) Activated carbon filter – providing removal of hydrocarbon odours and vapours.
f) Dryer control/timing mechanism which ensures that the use of purge air for the
regeneration proves is related to the pipeline demand by methods such as:
i) Interrupting process timers in accordance with compressor operation, or the

pressure fluctuations in the receiver.
ii) Monitoring dewpoint
iii) Monitoring bed saturation
g) Isolation and safety valves.
h) Filtration/Dryer systems shall be rated at the total through put of the compressor(s).
i) The system shall satisfy the air quality specification given in Table 1 of HTM 2022
quality specifications for medical air.
j) The system shall be provided with purge discharge silencers.
k) The system shall bear clear identification for each major component.
Pressure Regulator/Filter Assembly
This shall comprise a duplex sub-assembly with:
a) Duplexed ‘bacterial’ filter assembly providing particle removal down to 0.01 micron (no
particles > 0.01 microns) and DOP penetration of less than 0.0001%.
b) Duplex, non-relieving pressure regulator assembly designed to have a static pressure

under NO flow conditions of 478 Kpa and a minimum delivery pressure of 440 Kpa.
After Coolers

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
After coolers shall be provided for each compressor and shall be air cooled. The compressed air
shall be of sufficient dryness that precipitation shall not occur if an equivalent amount of air is
reduced to minus 18 deg C at 7.0 bar (690 Kpa) gauge.
Air discharge temperature shall not exceed 15oC above the cooling air inlet.
Each cooler shall be fitted with an automatic drain trap and a manual by-pass valve for draining
the condensed moisture from the air side. Thermometers shall be provided on the compressed
air inlet, compressed air outlet and cooling water inlet points.
Noise shall not exceed 76 DBA according to CAGI pneurop test code measured at 1M distance.
23.11.10.05 Control Panels
A dedicated control panel shall be provided, for air compressor, to house the isolating switch,
starter, MCB, ammeter, hours run meter, lead compressor selector switch, pressure switch,
alarm and BMS contacts. The capacity of the plant shall be 100% system design flow with one
compressor not running. A pressure transducer shall sense the pressure and operate logic
circuits within the control panel to switch the lead compressor on or off, maintaining the design
pressure. A digital readout of vessel pressure shall be located on the central control panel door
capable of being switched to show pressure in kPa, or bar. During period of peak demand the
lag compressor shall automatically be activated to operate in addition to the lead compressor.
The compressor(s) shall automatically shut down once pressure levels have been restored. In
the event of a lead compressor failure, the lag compressor shall take over the first stage of the
remote alarm system and shall be activated by control panel.
Should the primary control circuit fail, an independent system with a separate mechanical
backup switch will operate the compressors and also initiate a plant fault alarm. The air plant
shall have four (4) stages of alarm conditions inputting to the alarm system as follows:
1) Plant Faults caused by:

Control circuit failure.
Activation of any other safety device.
Failure of a selected compressor to run up to speed on time.

Low receiver pressure fault (0.5 bar below cut-in pressure of the lag compressor(s) or 0.5
bar above cut-out pressure of the lead compressor).
Dew point above -26oC at atmospheric pressure.
3) Reserve Fault caused by:

Reserve manifold pressure less than 50%.
4) Pressure Fault caused by:

High or low pipeline pressure.
Building Management System contacts shall be:-

(Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts)
Plant fault,
Plant Emergency,
Reserve Fault,
Pipeline Pressure Fault

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
23.11.10.06 Duplex Pressure Reducing Station
There shall be a duplex pressure reducing station to reduce the pressure from 7 bar to 4 bar.
23.11.11 SURGICAL COMPRESSED AIR PLANT (7 BAR)
23.11.11.01 General
The Surgical Compressed Air Plant shall be as manufactured by Medaes, model SA series or
approved equal. The plant shall be capable of providing the total flow rate with one compressor
not running shall be provided for medical air (4 bar) supply system.
A standby manifold shall be provided for the surgical air (7 bar). The plant shall be complete
with compressors, after coolers, air receivers, filtration/dryers, pressure regulator and relief
valves, non return valves, isolating valves; gauges and pressure switches, control panel and
indication systems all to fully conform to the requirements of UK NHS – Model Engineering
Specification C11 and Health Technical Memorandum No 2022 (HTM 2022)
23.11.11.02 Air Compressors
A minimum of two identical screw compressors shall be provided each directly driven by
electric motors of Class F type noise levels tested to BS4999 and designed to operate at high
ambient temperatures up to 52oC. Air intake filter and silencer shall be provided for each
compressor.
The package shall include Intercooler and aftercooler with moisture separator and automatic
condensate drains and a sound attenuating enclosure with quick latch-panels for easy
accessibility.
23.11.11.03 Air Receivers
Cylindrical air receivers shall be vertical or horizontal for a working pressure of 10.30 bar (1030
kpa) abs unless otherwise indicated on drawings and shall be fitted with access panel to enable
full internal inspection; gate valves, in line non return valves, pressure gauge, automatic drain
trap with manual bypass, flexible plug and safety valve. The receiver shall have a minimum
water capacity as per HTM 2022 standard. Air receivers shall be fabricated inspected, tested
and certified in accordance with BS5169 Class 3 Grade E and EN286 or equivalent Test
Certificates shall be provided with the equipment.
23.11.11.04 Air Dryers, Filter Dryer Assembly & After Coolers
Air delivery is via duplexed sets of filters, pre-filter, oil filter, dust filter, activated carbon filter
and bacterial filter. Each filter shall be fitted with differential pressure gauges to monitor filter
performance.
The air at the outlet shall contain no more than:
Water 115 mg/m3

Dry particulate 0.01 mg/m3
Oil mist 0.01 mg/m3
Oil vapour 0.03 mg/m3
Carbon monoxide 5.0 mg/m3 5 ppm v/v
Carbon dioxide 450 mg/m3 500 ppm v/v

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
Duplex desiccant dryers shall be used and controlled by a separate control panel and incorporate
a dew point alarm system.
Air Dryers
Duplicate air dryers shall be provided. Each dryer shall be capable of dealing with the
continuous full load capacity. A separator and filter-assembly shall be installed upstream of the
air dryers and filters shall be installed downstream of the air dryers.
Dryers shall be of the activated alumina heatless type having two columns, used and regenerated
alternatively. The bleed air from the column type dryer shall be controlled by a readily
accessible valve and the outlet shall be fitted with a silencer discharging over a tundish.
Each dryer shall be designed to provide a desiccant bed life of not less than two years on
continuous full load and each should be fitted with a safety valve and pressure gauge.
Filtration/Dryer System
Filtration/dryer system shall comprise two (2) independent sub-assemblies either of which may
be selected as “DUTY” whilst retaining the second assembly as “STANDBY” and each
assembly to comprise the following:
a) Separator/pre-filter – providing maximum remaining oil content of 0.5 mg/m3, particle

removal down to 1 micron and DOP penetration of less than 0.03%.
b) Coalescing filter – providing maximum remaining oil content of 0.01 mg/m3, particle
removal to 0.01 micron and DOP penetration of less than 0.0001%.
c) Pair of dryer columns
d) Dust filter – providing particle removal down to 1 micron and DOP penetration of less
than 0.03%.
e) Activated carbon filter – providing removal of hydrocarbon odours and vapours.
f) Dryer control/timing mechanism which ensures that the use of purge air for the
regeneration proves is related to the pipeline demand by methods such as:
iv) Interrupting process timers in accordance with compressor operation, or the

pressure fluctuations in the receiver.
v) Monitoring dewpoint
vi) Monitoring bed saturation
g) Isolation and safety valves.
h) Filtration/Dryer systems shall be rated at the total through put of the compressor(s).
i) The system shall satisfy the air quality specification given in Table 1 of HTM 2022
quality specifications for medical air.
j) The system shall be provided with purge discharge silencers.
k) The system shall bear clear identification for each major component.
Pressure Regulator/Filter Assembly

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
This shall comprise a duplex sub-assembly with:
a) Duplexed ‘bacterial’ filter assembly providing particle removal down to 0.01 micron (no
particles > 0.01 microns) and DOP penetration of less than 0.0001%.
b) Duplex, non-relieving pressure regulator assembly designed to have a static pressure

under NO flow conditions of 778 Kpa and a minimum delivery pressure of 740 Kpa.
After Coolers
After coolers shall be provided for each compressor and shall be air cooled. The compressed air
shall be of sufficient dryness that precipitation shall not occur if an equivalent amount of air is
reduced to minus 18 deg C at 7.0 bar (690 Kpa) gauge.
Air discharge temperature shall not exceed 15oC above the cooling air inlet.
Each cooler shall be fitted with an automatic drain trap and a manual by-pass valve for draining
the condensed moisture from the air side. Thermometers shall be provided on the compressed
air inlet, compressed air outlet and cooling water inlet points.
Noise shall not exceed 76 DBA according to CAGI pneurop test code measured at 1M distance.
23.11.11.05 Control Panels
A dedicated control panel shall be provided, for air compressor, to house the isolating switch,
starter, MCB, ammeter, hours run meter, lead compressor selector switch, pressure switch,
alarm and BMS contacts. The capacity of the plant shall be 100% system design flow with one
compressor not running. A pressure transducer shall sense the pressure and operate logic
circuits within the control panel to switch the lead compressor on or off, maintaining the design
pressure. A digital readout of vessel pressure shall be located on the central control panel door
capable of being switched to show pressure in kPa, or bar. During period of peak demand the
lag compressor shall automatically be activated to operate in addition to the lead compressor.
The compressor(s) shall automatically shut down once pressure levels have been restored. In
the event of a lead compressor failure, the lag compressor shall take over the first stage of the
remote alarm system and shall be activated by control panel.
Should the primary control circuit fail, an independent system with a separate mechanical
backup switch will operate the compressors and also initiate a plant fault alarm. The air plant
shall have four (4) stages of alarm conditions inputting to the alarm system as follows:
1) Plant Faults caused by:

Control circuit failure.
Activation of any other safety device.
Failure of a selected compressor to run up to speed on time.

Low receiver pressure fault (0.5 bar below cut-in pressure of the lag compressor(s) or 0.5
bar above cut-out pressure of the lead compressor).
Dew point above -26oC at atmospheric pressure.
3) Reserve Fault caused by:

Reserve manifold pressure less than 50%.
4) Pressure Fault caused by:

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
High or low pipeline pressure.
Building Management System contacts shall be:-

(Normally Open or Normally Closed contacts)
Plant fault,
Plant Emergency,
Reserve Fault,
Pipeline Pressure Fault
23.11.12 ANAESTHETIC GAS SCAVENGING DISPOSAL SYSTEM
The Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging Disposal System shall be as manufactured by Medaes model
series SAH or approved equal. A dedicated, specifically designed active extraction and disposal
system for waste anaesthetic gas. The system shall conform to the requirements of British
Standard 6834:1987 and shall be capable of providing a flow rate between a maximum of 130
L/min with a 1 kPa resistance to flow and a minimum of 80 L/min. with a 4 kPa resistance to
flow at each terminal unit, irrespective of the number of terminal units in use.
To ensure that maximum patient safety is achieved, the terminal unit shall be designed with a
choked-oriface to prevent a flow rate exceeding 150L/min.
The AGS plant shall be skid mounted and included o the skid shall be exhauster units, a motor
control unit with starter/isolator, moisture drain flask and flexible connectors to connect the
plant to the pipeline. Exhauster units are electrically driven with a three phase motor.
All remote start switch panels shall incorporate a green indicator light, which illuminates when
the exhauster unit is selected and operating.
The system shall be activated by remote switches that indicate the system is running and the
system shall be static when not in use.
AGS disposal systems and terminal units shall be ‘CE’ marked under the Medical Devices
Directive 93/42/eec with approval from notified body no 0301 (BVQI).
23.11.13 ALARM SYSTEM
23.11.13.01 General
Indicator panel for alarms shall be sited where indicated on the drawings and be in accordance
with UK NHS HTM 2022.
The alarm system shall be powered from the emergency services switchboard.
The alarm panel shall provide visual and audible indication. The audible indication shall be
provided with a mute switch.
The panel shall be appropriately labelled and a clear description of each function shall be
indicated. The lettering shall be permanent and of a contrasting colour to the background.
Instructions detailing the action required in the event of an alarm shall be prominently displayed
next to the panel.
The function shall be clearly visible under all lighting conditions, including no light.

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
A drawing of the panel facia shall be provided by the contractor for approval before the panel is
manufactured.
The panel shall provide details of the status of the systems which shall include:
. All systems normal signal – visual only.
. Systems not operating normally signal – visual and audible eg. reserve gas supply being
used.
. Emergency signal – visual and audible eg. emergency supply being used.
. Supply failure alarm – visual and audible eg. gas pressure or vacuum below normal
working value.
23.11.13.02 Area Alarm Panels
The medical gas area alarm panels shall be as manufactured by Medaes model Medipoint 26 or
approved equal shall be capable of monitoring a maximum of 6 medical gas services by means
of pressure sensors, which detect deviations from the normal operating limits of either pressure
or medical vacuum.
Each pressure gas service shall be displayed by coloured LED’s to show “Normal (green),
‘Low’ and ‘High’ pressure (red) conditions. Medical vacuum systems, shall be displayed in the
“Normal (green) and “Low” vacuum (red) conditions only. Failure indicators shall be displayed
by flashing lights and normal indication shall be steady. Each LED block indicator shall be a
plug in component with individual long life LED’s connected in parallel in 2 banks to provide
duplex circuits.
An audible warning shall sound simultaneously, should a further alarm condition occur. A
maintenance ‘Mute’ switch shall be provided internally to the panel for use during maintenance
which results in prolonged pipeline or plant shut down. This facility shall automatically reset
when the gas service returns to normal.
The alarm panel shall have a ‘test’ facility to prove the integrity of the internal circuits, LED’s
and audible warning. The alarm panel shall incorporate volt free normally closed relay contacts
to allow for inter-connection to the medical gas central alarm system an event recording circuit
of a building management system.
Each alarm shall provide green LED indicating that electrical power is available at the panel and
a red LED to indicate ‘System Alarm’. In the event of an electrical power supply failure the
‘System Alarm’ LED shall illuminate (flashing) and the audible shall be delayed for 20 seconds
to enable standby generator start up.
Line contact monitoring circuits shall be provided to constantly monitor the integrity of the
pressure sensors and interconnecting wiring. In the event of any fault, the line contact
monitoring circuits shall initiate the specific gas service failure indication, a ‘system alarm’
indication and the audible warning. Further aids to fault diagnosis shall be provided by means
of varying flashing rates whilst operating the ‘test’ switch.
Area alarm panels shall be ‘CE’ marked under the Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC with
approval from notified body no.0301 (BVQI). Under this directive, the specified products are
classified as Class IIb Medical Devices.
23.11.13.03 Medical Gas Central Plantrooms Alarms.

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
The medical gas area alarm panels shall be, as manufactured by Medaes model: Medipoint 125
or approved equal, capable of monitoring a maximum of 5 medical gas services by means of
input sensors from the specific plant or point alarms. The medical gas central alarms shall fully
satisfy the UK National Health Service – Model Engineering Specification C11 and Health
Technical Memorandum No.2022 (HTM2022)
Each gas service shall be displayed by coloured LED’s to show “Normal (green), and ‘4 stage’
alarm conditions (yellow/red) only. Failure indicators shall be displayed by flashing lights and
normal indication shall be steady. Each LED block indicator shall be a plug in component with
individual long life LED’s connected in parallel in 2 banks to provide duplex circuits.
An audible warning shall sound simultaneously with any failure indication and a mute facility
shall be provided. Following a mute selection the audible will resound after approximately 15
minutes, or shall operate simultaneously should a further alarm condition occur. A maintenance
‘Mute’ switch shall be provided internally to the panel for use during maintenance which results
in prolonged pipeline or plant shut down. This facility shall automatically reset when the gas
service returns to normal.
The alarm panel shall have a ‘test’ facility to prove the integrity of the internal circuits, LED’s
and audible warning. The alarm panel shall incorporate volt free normally closed relays to
allow for inter-connection to an event recording circuit of the building management system.
Each alarm shall provide green LED indicating that electrical power is available at the panel and
a red LED to indicate ‘System Alarm’. In the event of an electrical power supply failure the
‘System Alarm’ LED shall illuminate (flashing) and the audible warning shall be delayed for 20
seconds to enable standby generator start up.
Line contact monitoring circuits shall be provided to constantly monitor the integrity of the
input sensors and interconnecting wiring. In the event of any fault, the line contact monitoring
circuits shall initiate the specific gas service failure indication, a ‘system alarm’ indication and
an audible warning. Further aids to fault diagnosis shall be provided by means of varying
flashing rates whilst operating the ‘test’ switch.
The central alarm system must be interconnected to the area alarm power using specific data
cable on a “radial” circuit. Signals must be transmitted around the system in a “multiplexed”
form. The central alarm system must be capable of operating a Central Mute facility as
described in HTM2022.
Medical Gas Central Alarm Panel shall be ‘CE’ marked under the Medical Devices Directive
93/42/EEC with approval from notified body no. 0301 (BVQI).
23.11.14 MODULAR MANIFOLD SUPPLY SYSTEM & MANIFOLD CONTROL

PANEL
23.11.14.01 General
Modular Manifold Supply Systems, as manufactured by Medaes model: MCS2 or approved

equal, shall be used to provide medical gases to a piped distribution system. All manifolds shall
fully comply with HTM2022/C11.
Modular Manifold Headers and Emergency Standby Manifolds shall be ‘CE’ marked under the
Medical Devices Directive 93/42/EEC with approval from notified body no.0301 (BVQI).
The modular manifold supply system shall comprise 7 basic components.

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
1. Primary header
2. Secondary header
3. 2 cylinder rack
4. 1 cylinder rack
5. Non-return valve
6. Blanking plug
7. Corner connector
The primary header, mounted on a 2-cylinder rack, shall always be connected to the left and
right hand inlets of the manifold. The secondary header mounted on either a 2-cylinder or 1-
cylinder rack shall be used to make up the required size of manifold for either an odd or even
number of cylinders.
Flexible copper tailpipes shall be used to connect the gas cylinders to the header assemblies.
Tailpipes shall be fully gas specific at both cylinder and manifold header connection points for
all gases.
Non-return valves shall be incorporated into the header assembly to protect the system in the
event of a tailpipe fracture. Each non-return valve shall have a hard seat with ceramic ball. For
better access and increased safety the non-return valve block shall be positioned on the header
rack midway between the cylinder positions.
23.11.14.02 Oxygen and N2O Manifold Control Panel
The Manifold Control System shall supply medical gas from both left and right hand manifold
banks. The operation and performance criteria shall fully satisfy the requirements of
HTM2022/C11. The Manifold Control System shall supply a flow of 1000 L/min. to a 400 kPa
(4 bar) distribution system.
Either the left or right hand manifold bank may be designated “Duty” and the MCP shall
automatically changeover to supply the distribution system from the “standby” bank when
pressure in the “Duty” bank falls to a pre-determined level.
There shall be a 2 stage duplex system to provide a high flow rate. Each side of the MCP shall
be capable of being fully isolated, via a full flow ball valve, in order to change any regulator
without a cessation of supply. The inlet of the 1st stage regulator shall be protected from the
particular matter by a moulded bronze filter.
All regulators shall be protected from over-pressurisation by relief valves which are vented to
atmosphere. There shall be a bypass valve fitted to the 2nd stage regulators to allow nitrous
oxide to be vented outside the manifold room during the commissioning stage.
There shall be a fail safe system in the event of power failure so that solenoid valves open and
there is full continuity of supply pressure flow. Upon power restoration the unit shall revert
back to the original bank of cylinders being used. To avoid inadvertent resetting of the change
cylinder alarm the solenoid valves shall be latched to that once changeover has occurred and the
cylinders replaced a reset button must be operated to cancel the alarm condition.
To aid maintenance the copper connections within the panel shall be flat face/’O’ ring design
and facilitate easy removal of the regulators and pressure switches. There shall be manual
changeover buttons so that servicing either side of the system can be simply achieved. The
PCB’s shall be linked with plug and socket connectors for easy removal.
MCP manifold control systems shall be ‘CE’ marked under the Medical Devices Directive
93/42/EEC with approval from notified body no 0301 (BVQI).

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
The number of cylinders in each bank of oxygen and N2O manifold shall be as noted on the
drawings.
23.11.14.03 Emergency Supply Manifolds (ESM)
An Emergency Supply Manifold (ESM), as manufactured by Medaes model: MCS2 or

approved equal, shall be used to support the main Manifold and connected downstream of the
Manifold control panel. The assembly consists of two gas cylinder connections supplying a
manually adjusted regulator via a common header assembly. The delivery system is isolated
from the main system by an isolation valve and protected by a pressure relief valve. Pressure
gauges indicate cylinder and delivery pressure. A pressure switch is used to signal a low
cylinder pressure to the medical gas alarm. There shall be an Emergency Supply Manifold for:
. Oxygen
. N2O
. Medical Air
The number of cylinders shall be as per medical gas drawings. All Emergency Supply
Manifolds shall be complete with cylinders. The Contractor shall also provide spare racks of 1
bank capacity for each gas cylinder.
23.11.15 TESTING AND CERTIFICATION
23.11.15.01 General
Each pipework system shall be tested as a whole or in sections as the work proceeds in
accordance with the following requirements; UK-NHS:HTM 2022.
Written test and completion certification must be provided throughout the period of the work.
Tests shall include but not be limited to zone isolation valves and cross connections, pipework
pressure testing, medical breathing air and medical vacuum plant function, purity of medical
breathing air and handover instructions. A contract completion certificate shall be provided at
the end of the works. Practical completion shall not be given until the certification is completed
and submitted.
These tests shall form part of the acceptance tests to be witnessed by the Engineer and Client.
Test pressures shall be applied during the construction period and prior to the pipelines being
painted with each section being blanked until further tests are made.
Component test pressure shall be certified as tested to 1.5 times working pressure.
All equipment, material and labour necessary for testing shall be provided and all necessary
“blanking-off” shall be done to prevent excessive pressures to equipment, seals or other similar
parts of the system.
Leaking joints in brazed pipes shall be remade in accordance with HTM 2022 Guidelines and
the relevant Code for the system being used. Leaking joints in screwed fittings and “0” ring
fittings shall be fully re-made; caulking of leaks will not be permitted. All faulty joints shall be
re-tested after rectification and repeated until entire systems are satisfactory.
Tests shall be carried out in accordance with the relevant Australian Standard taking care that
the pressures stated do not over stress any part of the system due to working pressure or static
head. If such is likely to occur permission shall be requested to vary the test condition.

SCAVENGING SYSTEMS
23.11.15.02 Testing of Pipework Systems
All pipework shall be pressure tested using carbon dioxide. The test pressure for medical
breathing air and oxygen shall be 620 kPa and for medical vacuum 140 kPa 650 mmHg gap
(110 mmHg abs) recorded by an approved gauge placed at the highest point in the system.
Test pressures shall be maintained for a minimum of 4 hours without loss of pressure, with
corrections made for ambient temperature change when necessary. Vacuum shall be maintained
for a period of 20 hrs and pressure rise should not exceed 30mmHg per hour
After sections of pipework have been satisfactorily pressure tested they shall be tested for
correct operation and flow rates at operating pressures. Cylinder medical breathing air shall be
used for testing the oxygen system, the medical breathing air plant for the medical breathing air
system and the medical suction plant for the medical suction system.
Final testing shall be carried out using the proper gases. Each system shall be purged with own
designated gas and all items of equipment tested to ensure correct operation including the
system pressure alarms.
23.11.16 IDENTIFICATION, COLOUR CODING AND LABELLING
All new pipework shall be identified, labeled and colour coded to match the colour coding of
the relevant codes and standards.
All new valves, regulators, filters, etc. shall be identified and labeled.

23.12.00 ELECTRICAL ASSOCIATED WITH HVAC WORKS
23.12.01 EXTENT OF WORK
Supply, install, adjust, test and maintain the complete mechanical electrical system associated
with the Mechanical Works.
Specifically the mechanical electrical system shall comprise:
. Switchboards complete with all switchgear and controlgear and all power and control
wiring within the switchboard.
. All power wiring from the mechanical switchboard to all motors and equipment.
. Power wiring from all local control panels/local starters to the associated motors and
equipment.
. All control wiring as detailed herein and/or shown on the drawings for the control and
operation of all equipment served from the switchboard, local control panel, local
starters.
All control wiring associated with the controls system as detailed under clause Controls.
23.12.02 WORK BY BUILDER
The following work associated with the mechanical electrical installation shall be carried out by
the Builder as referred to in clause Work by Builder.
. Provision of openings and core holes through the structure provided that details are
provided by the Mechanical Trade prior to commencement of work in the respective
areas.
. Building in of conduits, wall boxes, wiring access boxes.
. Making good all walls and floors after chasing provided chasing is done before final
finishes are applied.
23.12.02.01 Electrical Trade
. Sub-mains from the consumer’s distribution board to the mechanical switchboards.
. Connection to main mechanical boards in roof and basement (floor sub mechanical
boards from main board by mechanical/electrical).
. Circuit protection units on consumer’s distribution sub-boards for power circuits serving
mechanical switchboards.
. Lighting in plantrooms other than inside air handling units.
23.12.02.02 Fire Trade
Fire trip control circuits run from the fire control panel to the mechanical services essential sub
boards.

ELECTRICAL ASSOCIATED WITH HVAC WORKS
23.12.03 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS AND LOCAL RULES
All equipment supplied and work carried out shall comply with the requirements of BS7671.
The electrical installation shall be carried out in accordance with the requirements of the local
Supply Authority.
23.12.04 EQUIPMENT AND UNIFORMITY
All items of equipment shall be of first grade with regard to design and manufacture and shall
be completely satisfactory for operation, control, safety and maintenance under all conditions of
service.
Uniformity of type and manufacture of switchgear, controlgear, fittings and accessories shall be
preserved throughout the whole of the installation.
23.12.05 CONTINUITY OF SUPPLY
Where electrical facilities exist on the sit, during the staging of the building programme, these
facilities shall be maintained to suit the convenience of the consumer and no interruption shall
be made to the electricity supply without the consent of the Officer in Charge.
23.12.06 BALANCE OF LOAD
As far as is possible, the load shall be balanced between the individual phases of supply.
23.12.07 TESTS
Tests shall include insulation and continuity tests, current measurements on all motors, heaters
and other loads, tests of operation and settings of motor overload protection devices (thermal
overload relays, thermistors and thermistor relays), tests of functions of control wiring circuits
and interlock systems.
These tests shall form part of the acceptance tests to be witnessed by the Engineer as referred to
in clause Testing.
23.12.08 IDENTIFICATION, COLOUR CODES, LABELLING AND WIRING

DIAGRAMS
Sub-mains shall be colour coded at terminations to match the colour coding of the Supply
Authority mains. Sub-mains shall be labelled at their origin and termination with details of size,
number and material of conductors.
Individual power circuits shall be phase colour coded and taped together (A, B, C phase + N) at
approximately 0.6m intervals when run through switchboard cable zones and in cable ducts.
Controls wiring shall be colour coded as appropriate to the system (E.G. active, common,
signal).
Controls wiring shall be numbered where joining switchboard terminal strips for systems having
20 or more control circuits, using slip-on neoprene rubber, coloured ferrules with printed
numbers, or crimp on plastic ferrules with engraved or moulded numbers, or self adhesive

plastic tags with printed numbers, except that all control wiring to be terminated in control
panels or switchboards provided by others shall be numbered at their origin and termination.
All terminal strips shall be numbered for each wiring connection.
Wiring diagrams shall show all circuit and corresponding terminal strip connection numbers.
Labels shall be provided for all switchboard equipment and all local isolating switches and
control switches. Labels shall be machine engraved traffolyte plastic laminate with bevelled
edges fixed adjacent the item using nickel plated round head screws. Lettering shall be 5mm
minimum height black characters on white background except that white characters on red
background shall be used for danger or fire services labels. Labels in switchboards shall not be
fastened to cable duct lids.
All control switches shall be labelled to indicate “ON-OFF” or other positions.
Labels shall be provided on each switchboard to indicate the origin of the sub-mains and the
switchboard number.
Conduits and pipes for future wiring shall be labelled with stamped metal tags wired to the
conduit indicating the intended purpose and the location the conduit runs to.
Prepare wiring diagrams and switchboard drawings for all equipment and wiring installed and
submit four prints of each to the Engineer for approval prior to commencing work.
A non-fade print of the wiring diagrams shall be mounted adjacent the appropriate switchboards
in a suitable plywood backed glass face frames. Diagrams shall be reduced scale prints where
appropriate.
23.12.09 FORM OF ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
The electrical supply to the installation shall be a single supply 400/220 volts, 3 phase and
neutral, 4 wire, 50 Hz.
23.12.10 EARTHING
All metal parts of switchboard enclosures, cable trays, trunking, equipment and appliances shall
be effectively earthed.
Earthing throughout the installation shall comply with the current British Standard and the
Supply Authority.
23.12.11 WIRING METHODS
Power and control wiring for the electrical installation associated with the Mechanical Services
shall be by the following methods:
In Plantrooms:
. TPI conductors in galvanised steel cable ducts and galvanised steel conduit run overhead
and on the surface;
. TPI conductors in galvanised steel conduits cast into the concrete slab;

. large conductors XLPE/SWA/PVC run overhead on cable trays fastened to the underside
of the slab/roof.
In Riser Shafts:
. TPI conductors in steel cable ducts and/or steel conduits.
Through false ceiling spaces or roof spaces:
. TPI conductors in metal cable ducts or PVC or steel conduits.
Low voltage control wiring:
. TPI conductors in steel cable ducts or steel conduits for low voltage control circuits only,
separate from line voltage power and control circuits.
Control wiring to thermocouple, resistance bulb and solid state electronic sensors:
. TPI insulated, metal braded and TPI sheathed conductors in steel ducts or steel conduits,
with other power and control wiring, or TPI conductors in steel conduits or ducts for
sensor circuits only.
(N.B. Motor thermistor sensor wiring may be run in TPI with other power and control wiring
for relatively short runs (not more than 20m) provided the sensor wires are twisted together).
Down columns or walls in occupied areas:
. TPI conductors in steel conduit cast in concrete columns and walls, or chased into
masonry walls if to be rendered or faced, or run concealed behind timber of other surface
finishes.
Each wiring method shall comply with the relevant clause of the Specification.
Minimum size of conductors shall be 2.5mm for power and 1.5mm for control wiring.
All wiring in TPI and TPS shall be by loop in method.
Flexible conductors shall be used where connecting to equipment mounted on hinged

switchboard doors or in other positions subject to movement and groups of wires shall be
loomed together and arranged so that the door can open and close without fouling the wires.
23.12.12 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
All conduit shall:
. be installed using the loop in system;
. be free from conduit fittings other than junction boxes, wall boxes, bends or couplings;
. be 20mm minimum diameter;
. be installed so that conductors are only drawn into conduit at outlet positions, switch
positions, draw-in boxes and switchboards;

. be installed complete with fittings and draw wires before wiring of a particular section is
commenced;
. be concealed from view by running in ceiling spaces, concrete slabs, air space of stud or
double brick (or block) walls or chased into rendered masonry walls unless otherwise
specified or agreed by the Engineer;
. contain a maximum of two power circuits;
. be placed above the bottom reinforcing bars where run in concrete slabs;
. be set at all changes of direction where concealed within the structure;
. be set using approved type conduit benders which prevent flattening of the conduit.
(Application of heat in bending conduit will not be permitted);
. be enclosed within the concrete and not in contact with the fill where installed in slabs
poured on filling;
. be installed in a manner which will not necessitate penetration of damp courses or

influence the entry of moisture into the building;
. be located below the thermal insulation where installed in ceiling spaces;
. be provided with draw-in boxes at 20m (maximum) intervals;
. terminate at deep pattern junction boxes for ceiling outlets embedded in concrete;
. standard depth junction boxes for outlets above false ceilings, and
. steel wall boxes for all flush wall outlets and switches;
. be provided with a 2.2mm diameter (minimum) galvanised steel draw-wire where

installed for future wiring or wiring by others;
. be clear of all moisture before installation of wiring;
. be fitted with a sealed cap to prevent the ingress of moisture or obstructions entering the
conduit;
. be erected with a maximum of two right angle bends or sets without a draw-in box being
interposed;
. be equipped with flexible couplings for 600mm on either side where runs cross
constructional joints;
. be spaced not closer than 25mm where located within concrete;
. be positioned within concrete walls or columns with a minimum of 25mm of cover;
Conduit exposed to view shall:
. be installed in straight runs which are parallel or normal to the building structure;
. be installed over routes as agreed by the Engineer;

. be erected to avoid the formation of moisture traps, but where U sections cannot be
avoided the lowest point in the run shall be drilled (3mm diameter) to form a drain;
. be secured by spacer bar type saddles grouped in symmetrical positions providing 3mm
clearance of the fixing surface;
Flexible conduit shall:
. be provided between fixed conduit and equipment which is likely to be moved or subject
to vibration;
. fitted with brass glands;
. be “Kopex”;
. be connected to concealed fixed conduit via a flush mounted junction box with a conduit
nipple secured by locknuts to the coverplate;
Steel conduit shall:
. be provided with heavy protection to where installed in exterior or damp situations and in
plantrooms;
. be cut square, threaded with the minimum number of threads being cut consistent with
the union, painted over the threads with conductive paint, reamed to remove burrs and
adequately terminated into threaded connections or locknuts with no threads showing
after assembly;
. be fixed at 1200mm (minimum) centres where surface run;
Conduit for underground wiring shall:
. comprise galvanised water pipe, or heavy duty rigid PVC conduit.
. be fitted with corrosion proof fittings;
. installed over routes as approved by the Engineer;
Conduit in coolrooms and refrigerated chambers shall be heavy duty rigid PVC drilled for
condensate drainage at low points.
Rigid PVC conduit shall:
. be of light duty;
. be jointed together and to fittings with an approved cement;
. be coloured orange;
. be provided with one approved expansion joint for each straight section exceeding 6
metres in length;
. be secured in position by approved saddles spaced at 600mm (maximum) apart;
. be secured with galvanised or PVC saddles where installed in exterior locations or

exposed to view;

. be fastened to the side of a timber batten where installed across rafters or joists.
Where rigid PVC conduit is installed within poured concrete provide adequate supervision
during the pouring of concrete to ensure that conduits are not damaged or dislodged;
rectification of such defects shall be performed as part of these works without cost to the
Proprietor.
Rigid PVC conduit shall not be used in the following locations:
. where exposed to mechanical damage.
. where subject to ambient or contact temperature in excess of 50ΕC.
. for surface runs exposed to view.
. in hazardous locations.
23.12.13 CABLE DUCTS
23.12.13.01 Metal
Metal cable ducts shall be manufactured from galvanised steel. All cut ends and bends shall be
neatly made and filed free of sharp edges. All ducts shall have lift off lids. Joints between
sections of duct shall be bolted. Hangers and supports shall be spaced at regular intervals to
avoid sagging of the duct. A minimum clearance of 150mm above and 600mm to one side shall
be provided for access.
23.12.13.02 Plastic
Moulded plastic cable ducts shall be used inside switchboards only.
Plastic cable ducts shall be slotted both sides for cable entry and for ventilation and shall have
clip on lids. Ducts shall be sized such that when the switchboard is completely wired the ducts
are not more than half full of cables.
23.12.13.03 Cable Trays
Cable trays shall be slotted and folded 1.2mm thick galvanised steel up to 200mm wide and
shall be galvanised steel slotted and folded 1.5mm or galvanised steel folded section rung type
in 300mm wide size and larger.
Cable trays shall be installed:
. fixing flush to ceilings, slabs or walls;
. suspending by hangers from roof structure, ceilings, slabs or on angle brackets out from
walls.
Slotted galvanised steel trays 150mm and wider shall be supported on both sides over their full
length by 25 x 25 x 3mm MS angle where necessary to prevent sagging.
Cable trays shall be supported at regular intervals to avoid sagging between supports.

A minimum clearance distance of 150mm shall be left above the tray and 600mm on the side of
the tray for access.
23.12.14 TPS CONDUCTORS INSTALLATION
TPS conductors shall:
. not be installed in locations where they cannot easily be withdrawn for rewiring
purposes;
. be enclosed within concealed conduit where run in rendered walls or concrete;
. be installed through suitably sized access holes positioned vertically or horizontally in

line where run within stud partitions;
. be secured in position where installed in accessible locations;
. not be secured or clipped where installed in inaccessible locations such as cavities and
stud partitions;
. be protected by conduits where installed in locations which are liable to mechanical

damage;
. be used for all wiring inside refrigerated rooms, installed in conduit.
23.12.15 TPI CONDUCTORS
TPI conductors shall be:
. PVC insulated .6/1.0 kV grade type V75 copper conductors enclosed in conduit or ducts;
. fitted with approved lugs or terminal clips where terminated in bolted connections;
. terminated by baring, twisting together and inserting in minimum 30 amp rating tunnel
type clamp terminal strips for cable sizes up to 19/1.78;
. terminated using suitable lugs or ferrules soldered or crimped on using suitable tools for
cable sizes larger than 19/1.78;
. supported using plastic clips for single circuits run inside switchboards.
Where PVC insulated 6/1.0 kV V75 grade copper conductors are wired through switchboards
and connected direct to switchgear then the cable shall be sized so that it shall not be loaded
above 80% of its rated current. Alternatively which case they may be sized for 100% of their
rated current.
23.12.16 SHIELDED CABLES
Shielded cables shall be thermoplastic insulated, metal braided or metal wound and
thermoplastic sheathed.
Metal shielding shall be earthed at each termination.

The type of shielded cable used shall be suitable for the particular controls application.

23.12.17 MOTORS
Motors and starters shall have ample capacity and suitable characteristics to perform the
specified duties without overheating under all possible starting and running conditions.
All motors shall be capable of carrying overload torques for 15 seconds in accordance with BS
2613.
Motors 0.37 kW and over shall be 1450 RPM drip proof squirrel cage induction type except
where specified otherwise in the Schedule of Motors and Starters and shall be designed and
rated for continuous full load operation on 415 volt, 3 phase, 50 cycle power supply and shall
comply with current Australian Standards.
Motors shall be foot mounted.
Motors less than 0.37 kW shall be single phase, rated for continuous full load operation on 240
volt 50 cycle power supply and shall comply with current Australian Standards.
All motors shall have grease packed ball or roller bearings installed in housings. Motors with
frame size D160 and larger shall have grease nipples and grease relief openings.
Bearings for motors driving refrigeration compressors shall be maximum capacity deep groove
ball type.
All motors supplied shall be backed by local service organisations able to provide rewinding
and all other servicing.
Motors installed in damp locations or exposed to weather shall be TEFC and weatherproof.
Insulation class shall be Class E.
Motors 37 kW and more shall have p.t.c. thermistor sensors installed in pockets wound into
each of the starter windings during manufacture with each thermistor wired separately back to
the motor terminal box.
Kilowatt and current ratings of motors, are given for tendering purposes only and shall be
adjusted as required to suit the particular equipment supplied.
All belt driven or variable pitch fan motor kilowatts shall be sufficient to supply 10% more air
than specified against the resultant resistance of the system. Fan kilowatts in any case shall be
not less than the nominated kilowatt figures given in the schedule.
23.12.18 SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR TO BE USED
23.12.18.01 Switchboards
General
Switchboards shall:
. comply with the requirements of DEWA and current British Standard;
. be complete in every respect, fully wired and factory tested;

. be of overall dimensions suitable for the space allocated;
. be designed to facilitate easy access to and removal of component parts;
. constructed and contain equipment to the approval of the local Supply Authority.
Manufacture
Switchboards shall be manufactured by an approved company, experienced in mechanical

services switchboard manufacture.
Switchboard Types to be Used
Switchboard shall be of the type, form and shall be constructed to withstand prospective short-
circuit currents as follows:
Form 2
The switchboard shall:
. be fully enclosed, front access type for mounting against a wall;
. have removable panels along the top front for access to bus duct behind;
. have hinged lockable doors at the front of all equipment mounting cubicles;
. have removable covers at the side where necessary for access to incoming mains, mains
connections and busbars from the main isolator unit.
All stop-start switches, pilot lights and meters shall be mounted on the upper section of the
hinged doors to the equipment mounting enclosures.
All equipment in the panel shall be front connected. Wiring shall be run in moulded plastic
cable ducts arranged at the sides, top, bottom and between rows of equipment.
Busbars shall be run in the busbar chamber at the top and bus droppers shall be in front of the
equipment mounting panels
Where busbar droppers are used to fuse carriers then the busbars shall be run in front of the
equipment mounting panel and the sheetmetal mounting panel shall be covered with 1.6mm
thick insulating material.
Main isolating units shall be frame mounted behind a separate hinged door through which the
operating handle or toggle protrudes and the on-off indication is visible. Where possible the
mains connections and busbar connections to the unit shall be fully accessible when the door is
open.
23.12.18.02 Schedule of Switchboard Equipment
Switchboards shall be complete with all switchgear, controlgear and equipment as specified and
necessary to perform the functions specified and shown on the drawings.
The following equipment shall be mounted on the face of the switchboards in addition to
isolator units as specified elsewhere:
. stop-start switches as shown on the drawings;

. pilot lights as shown on the drawings;

. sequence selector switches as shown on the drawings.
Test-Off-Auto switches may be mounted on the face or inside the equipment cubicles.
If a building automation system is specified then controls stop-start switches, pilot lights, Test-
Off-Auto switches shall be provided on the controls interface panel adjacent each switchboard.
Sequence selection shall be provided by the building automation programme and sequence
switches are not required on the switchboards.
23.12.18.03 Cabinet Construction
All switchboards shall:
. be of unitary welded and bolted construction of folded section minimum 1.6mm bright
steel sheet;
. have all joints welded with continuous seam welds which shall be ground flush after
fabrication;
. have all corners rounded;
. be provided with suitable means of securing the complete assembly to floors and/or
walls;
. be fitted with approved means of supporting all cabling with bushed holes between
compartments;
. contain a separate compartment for Supply Authority equipment which is provided with a
means of fitting the Supply Authority’s seals.
. be arranged so that the distance between floor level and top of switchboard does not
exceed 2250 mm.
. have 100 mm (minimum) wiring space on each side and 150 mm (minimum) wiring
space at top and bottom, the wiring space being increased to suit the quantities and types
of cables entering and leaving the switchboards;
. contain cable entries and/or gland plates, sized to suit the cables specified and positioned
to suit site conditions;
. contain louvred vents at the top and bottom with fine bronze wire mesh welded inside for
switchboards larger than 0.3 cubic metres in volume;
. be fitted with gaskets to render the switchboard drip and vermin proof and preventing the
ingress of dust and insects.
Free standing switchboards shall be constructed in sections to allow handling which can be
bolted together on site. Removable lifting eyebolts shall be fitted to each section.
Front access wall or floor mounted switchboards shall have a clear space at the bottom of the
panel for access to cables and/or conduits which pass through the base and for wiring between
cubicles which runs along the bottom of the panel.
Doors and hinged panels shall:

. be fabricated from 1.6mm (minimum) folded bright mild steel;
. be fitted with a heavy duty brass latch complete with two keys which are common to all
switchboard locks;
. be provided with folded metal stiffeners and bracing to achieve rigidity and prevent
warping or sagging;
. have edges folded back and gasketted so that the door stands proud of the cabinet by
approximately 20mm;
. be hung on chromium plated lift-off pintle type hinges;
. be provided with latching bars on large doors;
. be fitted with chromium plated lifting handles;
. where installed on the back of switchboards, be secured in the closed position by means
of not less than two 6mm diameter studs with acorn nuts.
Removable panels shall be constructed as for doors except that they shall be fastened and
located with not less than four 6mm diameter studs placed near each corner with acorn nuts in
place of hinges.
Coverplates shall:
. be fabricated from 2mm (minimum) flat bright mild steel;
. be not larger than 1 metre in height and in no case exceed 0.6m2 in area;
. be provided with two plated lifting handles;
. be located and secured by means of 4 (minimum) 6mm diameter studs with acorn nuts.
23.12.18.04 Finishes
Ferrous metal shall:
. be cleaned free from rust, corrosion, grease and scale;
. have rough surfaces filled and rubbed smooth;
. be painted using at least one coat of rust inhibiting self etching primer, an undercoat of
zinc enriched paint and two coats of gloss enamel.
. have external surfaces finished in gloss white colour;
. have external surfaces finished in Light Orange No. 557 to BS 381 Colours for Specific
Purposes.
Non-ferrous parts shall be cadmium plated or tinned.
External handles, bolt heads, catches, locks, nuts and screws shall be stainless steel or chromium
plated.

23.12.18.05 Busbars
Busbars within the switchboard shall:
. be manufactured from high conductivity hard drawn copper bar with radiused edges;
. be of sufficient cross sectional area to supply the capacity of the switchboard when all
space on the switchboard is filled;
. be rated and sized for busbars in duct;
. be of minimum size 12mm x 3mm except for tee offs to Quicklag/ACB’s;
. be arranged so that all joints, terminations and fixings are fully accessible;
. be disposed and supported so that under short circuit conditions no busbar material is
stressed to more than 25% of its breaking load or 33% of its elastic limit (whichever is
the lesser).
. be arranged so that they can safely withstand the stresses caused by the prospective
maximum fault current as specified herein for a period of one second;
. have joints finished, electro-tinned, coated with acid free vaseline and bolted together
with Cadmium plated steel bolts, washers, nuts and locknuts;
. be arranged for future extensions to adjacent switchboards;

. be provided with a removable section for the mounting of current transformers so that
they may be removed or replaced without disturbing the remainder of the switchboard;
. be supported on synthetic resin moulded type insulators, panels, and cleats;
. pass through 12mm (minimum) thick close fitting insulated panels through a single hole
in metalwork where installed from one compartment to another;
. be fully insulated by either

- PVC dipping with a minimum of two coats;
- shrink-on PVC sleeving with taped joints;
- be phase coloured as follows:
A phase B phase C phase Neutral Earth

Red White Blue Black Green / Yellow
23.12.18.06 Links
Links for terminating neutral and earthing connections shall be:
. of brass or copper and square or rectangular section;

. fitted with tunnel type terminals for cables up to 6mm2 and stud type terminals to accept
cable lugs for larger cables;
. fully accessible.
Where two or more neutral links are provided they shall be joined with busbar of the same size
as the main neutral link to the switchboard.

Where two or more earth links are provided they shall be joined with not less than 12mm x
3mm busbar.
23.12.18.07 Hardware
All bolts, screws and nuts shall:
. Have metric threads; . have hexagonal shaped heads;

. be of non-ferrous metal or alternatively cadmium . be fitted with flat and spring
plated steel; washers;
be chromium plated where exposed to view.
Self tapping screws will not be accepted.
23.12.18.08 Mounting of Equipment
The layout and spacing of equipment, wiring, ducts, busbars, terminal strips shall be such that
all equipment can be removed for replacement or service without dismantling adjacent
equipment or busbars, and reasonable access space shall be available for wiring connections to
equipment and terminal strips.
Cable ducts shall be sized so that when the panel is fully wired they are not more than half full
of wires.
All terminal connections and terminal strips shall be fully accessible.
Circuit breakers rated above 100 amps:
. shall be arranged for back connection where installed within free standing cubicle type
switchboards;
. shall be arranged for front connection where installed within front access switchboards;
. shall be arranged so that the toggles operate in a vertical direction;
“FB” frame circuit breakers:
. shall be arranged for front connection only;
. shall be secured on to insulating mounting strips by means of brass screws with flat and
spring washers on brass studs with flat washers, nuts and locknuts;
. the screws or studs shall screw into tapped holes in metal;
. the screws or studs for circuit breakers up to 55 amps rating shall be 5mm diameter.
Circuit breakers above 55 amps rating shall be fixed with 6mm diameter screws or studs;
. the mounting arrangement shall be such that a broken stripped or damaged securing stud
or screw may be readily replaced from the front of the switchboard without disturbing
adjacent circuit breakers;
. shall be mounted on a lift out chassis assembly.
Quicklag circuit breakers:

. shall be secured by separate clip-in type fixings as provided by the circuit breaker
manufacturer;
. shall be mounted on a lift out chassis assembly.
CFS units shall be flush mounted so that the front covers provided with the unit can be opened
or removed without removing the coverplates from the switchboard.
23.12.18.09 Installation of Switchboards
All switchboards shall be secured in position with masonry anchors and screws or bolts.
Explosive powered fixings are not acceptable.
Cubicle type switchboards shall be levelled with approved packing.
Entry holes into switchboard enclosures shall be cut only by means of hole saw or hack saw.
Flame equipment for making entry holes is not acceptable.
23.12.18.10 Switcgear and Controlgear to be used
This clause applies to equipment in the mechanical switchboard. Where packaged air
conditioning units or fan coil units are specified then these shall be fitted with the standard
electrical panel complete with switchgear and controlgear as normally supplied standard with
the particular brand of equipment.
Form 1 and 2 Switchboards
(a) main CFS + ACB sub-circuit protection

(b) main isolator s/w + HRC fault limiting fuses + ACB sub-circuit protection.
(c) main isolator s/w + HRC fuse sub-circuit protection up to 100A, CFS units 100A and
above
Each type of switchgear and controlgear shall comply with the relevant clause of the
Specification.
All circuit protection equipment shall be suitable for the fault level of the installation and the
discrimination shall be selected for the proper operation of other circuit protection equipment.
23.12.18.11 Switchgear and Controlgear
Circuit Breakers
All circuit breakers shall:
. be of the same manufacture selected from one of the following:
Email General Electric F.P.E. or approved equal
. incorporate the following features:
Arc interrupting device; Inverse time current characteristic;

Visual indication in the tripped position; Trip to operate when breaker is locked on;
Thermal and magnetic tripping mechanism; Non-welding contacts.
. be interchangeable for single and multi pole units used on final sub-circuits.

. have an interrupting capacity adequate for the maximum prospective fault current to
which they may be subjected.
. incorporate similar features and uniformity of style for all frame sizes and ratings.
For motor drive circuits the magnetic trip shall be selected to hold the maximum starting
currents applicable to the installation; the thermal trip shall be selected to hold 115% of the
motor full load current for continuous operation and shall hold the maximum motor starting
currents under warm/repetitive start conditions for not less than 10 seconds; the thermal trip
shall break the circuit in not more than 150 seconds under cold start conditions at the maximum
starting current for the motor.
23.12.18.12 Switches and Isolators (Switchboard Mounted)
All switches and isolators
. shall comply with current British Standard.
. shall be fault making and load breaking.
. may be c.f.s. units fitted with solid links or non-auto circuit breakers as specified herein.
. shall be spring assisted manual closing.
. shall be suitable for the prospective fault current specified herein.
. shall be selected from the following manufacturers:

Hazemeyer
or approved equal
. shall have double make and break contacts.
. shall include a mechanical :”on” and “off” indicator.
. shall have magnetic arc chutes on each pole.
23.12.18.13 Combination Fuse Switches (CFS UNITS)
CFS units shall:
. comply with BS 3185
Century G.E.C./English Electric Nilsen or approved equal
. be fitted with zoning barriers.
. incorporate the following features:
Double make and break contacts door interlock mechanism

silver plated contacts removable fuse assembly
mechanical “on” and “off” indicators lockable in either “on” or “off” position
facilities for fitting auxiliary control switch or
interlock key system

. have covers finished in the same colour as the switchboard cabinet.
. have fully shrouded contacts.
23.12.18.14 HRC Fuses
HRC fuses shall:
. have a moulded plastic insulated fuse carrier
. have a fuse indicator which is visible without having to remove the fuse.
. have fully shrouded base contacts.
G.E.C./English Electric Federal or approved equal

.
23.12.18.15 HRC Fuse Cartridges
HRC fuse cartridges shall:
. be certified for a fusing factor of Class Q1.
. be G.E.C./English Electric Type T, or approved equal.
Three (3) spare HRC fuse cartridges of each rating and type used, (including fault current
limiting fuses regardless of whether they are incorporated within a circuit breaker or not), shall
be provided on a labelled panel inside the door of each switchboard.
23.12.18.16 Contactors
Contactors shall:
. comply with BS 775 Part 1
. be suitable for AC3 utilisation category
. have a minimum resistive current rating of that specified in the schedules.
. be of the same manufacture selected from the following:
Fanal Nilsen Email

Sprecher & Schuh Siemens Schuckert or approved equal
. have renewable type main contacts, auxiliary contacts and operating coils.
23.12.18.17 Overload Protection
Thermal Overload Relays - Block Type
Thermal overload relays shall be fitted to all motors.
Thermal overload relays shall have the following features:

. block type for mounting direct to the contactor up to 37kW range and for separate
mounting above that size;
. same manufacture as contactor;
. rated to suit contactor sizes;
. fitted with interchangeable heaters to suit motor current rating and with adjustment dial to
select actual setting required;
. ambient temperature compensated;
. tunnel type clamp terminals;
. single phasing protection, by way of differential trip action between bimetal heater
elements on each phase;
. shall be used in conjunction with thermistors in motor windings for 37 kW rating and
above;
. manual reset.
Thermistors and Thermistor Relays
Thermistors shall be provided in all motors 37 kW and larger in addition to thermal overload
protection fitted to the starter.
Thermistors shall have positive temperature co-efficient and shall be installed during motor
manufacture into pockets wound into the motor winding using a suitable non-setting thermal
putty.
Three thermistors shall be installed in each motor, one in each winding and each wired
separately back to the motor terminal box by the motor manufacturer.
Thermistors shall be wired in series to a suitable matched thermistor control unit to with manual
reset button.
The active circuit to the thermistor relay shall be from a source which is not interrupted by
normal stop-start operations.
Motor Sentinels
All single phase motors shall be protected by motor sentinel thermal overload switches except
where inherent overheat protection devices are built into the motors by the motor manufacturer.
Inherent Overheat Devices
When fitted, these shall have a manual reset.
Magnetic Overload Relays
Magnetic overload relays shall be provided on D.O.L. starters for motors 110 kW and larger in
applications where high starting torques are required and for chiller motor starters when
required by the chiller manufacturer and for auto-transformer and star-delta starters as specified.
Magnetic overloads shall be dashpot type fitted to all three phases with adjustment for 115-

125% FLC for the motor, with manual reset, and complying with BS 587. Magnetic overload
relays shall be Cutler-Hammer, square-D or equal.
23.12.18.18 Local Isolating Switches
Isolating switches installed adjacent motors shall be rated for not less than the locked rotor
current of the motor.
Switches shall have shockproof, dustproof plastic enclosures except where exposed to weather
or in damp locations where weatherproof enclosures shall be used and all conduit entries sealed
weatherproof.
23.12.18.19 Time Switches
Time switches shall incorporate the following features:
. 365 day digital; . 20 amp contacts;

. push button daylight saving . day omitting device;
adjustment.
. external manual operation; . plug-in type;
. 16 hour minimum battery reserve; . be provided with an electrically connected by-
pass switch wire to the time switched circuit
for “Manual-Off-Auto” operation.
. be of Warburton Franki
manufacture type 61/0 or equal
Time switches for seven day operation shall be Horsttmann type B/SRS as supplied by NHP.
23.12.18.20 Current Transformers
Current transformers for Supply Authority equipment shall be provided in accordance with their
requirements.
Current transformers for other usages shall:
. be Class 1.0 for metering, Class 2.0 for maximum demand metering and Class 10.0 for
protection;
. be of the resin encapsulated type;
. have 5 amp secondary windings;
. be suitable to withstand the maximum fault current as specified herein;
. be sized to allow for an additional 25% load burden for future loads.
23.12.18.21 Meters
All meters shall:
. be of the flush mounted type, square fronted of dimensions 96mm x 96mm with a
quadrant scale.
. be provided with a means of zero adjustment without the need for any dismantling;
. be within - 3% accuracy;

. have a deflection of approximately 80% full scale range with a 5 amp load;
. be suitable for continuous duty.
. have direct reading scales graduated to suit each application and with black characters on
a white background;
Maximum demand indicators shall be integrated to maximum demand over a minute period.
Voltmeters shall be connected to a transfer switch so that phase to phase and phase to neutral
readings can be obtained.
Kilowatt hour meters shall be polyphase type incorporating direct reading cyclometer register.
23.12.18.22 Auxiliary and Control Switches
Auxiliary and control switches shall:
. have contacts of minimum 10 . be of Kraus and Naimer manufacturer or equal.

amp rating;
. be rotary snap action type;
23.12.18.23 Indicator Lights
Indicator lights shall:
. comply with BS 1050;
. be of the encapsulated transformer type with 12 volt secondary windings.;
. have domed coloured lenses of 25mm diameter;
. have 2 watt minimum lamps.
3 spare lamps of each size and type used shall be provided on a labelled panel inside the door of
each switchboard.
23.12.18.24 Control Relays
Control relays shall:
. have 10 amp minimum contact rating;
. be continuously rated;
. have silver contacts.
Time delay relays shall be synchronous motor drive or solid state electronic type. Pneumatic or
dash-pot operated devices are unacceptable.
23.12.18.25 Auto-Transformer Starters
Auto-transformer starters shall be Korndorfer or equivalent connected closed transition type and
shall incorporate thermal overload and single phasing protection.

Transformers shall be two winding type up to 75 kW and three winding type for larger ratings
with 50%, 65% and 80% tappings on each winding and rated for not less than 4 starts per hour.
Transformers shall be fitted with thermistor or thermostat type over temperature protection
inserted in pockets embedded in each winding.
23.12.18.26 Star-Delta Starters (Closed Transition)
Star-delta starters shall have resistance bank closed transition and shall incorporate thermal
overload and single phasing protection. Magnetic overload and under-voltage protection shall
be provided on motors 75 kW and larger. Starters shall be rated for not less than 4 starts per
hour.
Over temperature protection shall be provided on resistor banks. Resistance banks shall be
mounted in a well ventilated enclosure separate from the starter cubicle.
23.12.19 SPEED CONTROLLERS
23.12.19.01 General
Nominal Voltage Operation
The controller shall be of the type suitable for operation on a 3 phase, 400V supply. Single
phase input, 3 phase output units will not be accepted.
The controller approved as fully compliant is the VLT6000 series for subsequent generation as
manufactured by Danfoss.
Alternative controllers, fully compliant with the specification, may be considered. Any
alternative controller offered, must be submitted with a completed “Variable Speed Drives
Compliance Criteria” form and include the type and model offered.
Voltage Tolerance
The controller shall be capable of operating continuously at nominated full load rating with
expected variations of + 10% in the supply voltage and + 2% in the supply frequency.
Maximum Ambient Operation
The controller shall be suitable for operation at full load in an ambient temperature of 40°C.
Any derating applied to meet this specification shall be stated. Care shall be taken during
installation to ensure that the controller is protected from direct sunlight and weather.
Enclosure Rating
Where the controllers are separately wall mounted, the enclosure protection rating shall comply
to the following guidelines.
. In clean areas where no dust and moisture are present the rating shall be minimum IP20.
. In areas where moisture or harsh environmental conditions are present the controller shall
be protected to IP54 rating. Suitable deratings to comply with the ambient temperature
requirements shall be applied and stated where necessary.
. Controllers mounted in the supply air chamber where low temperature saturated air is
normally encountered shall be protected to IP54.

Clearances and Air Flows
The Tenderer shall state the clearances and air flows required for adequate cooling of the
inverters.
Single Series
Preference will be given to Tenders offering a single series of controller over the whole power
range to ensure a common user interface, common circuit requirements and common spare
parts.
Quality Assurance Standards
The controller shall be manufactured to quality assurance and manufacturing standards

according to ISO 9001.
23.12.19.02 Performance
Load Torque Requirement
The controllers shall be specifically designed to HVAC operation. The output waveform shall
ensure that maximum total efficiency is obtained from the motor and controller at all loads and
speeds. The output voltage and frequency shall be formed to control the quadratic load torques
produced by pumps and fans at maximum efficiency.
However, the controller shall still be capable of providing 160% torque for 0.5 sec and 110%
torque for 1 min at starting.
Motor Derating
The controller shall be of the type utilizing advanced digital PWM technology. Preference shall
be given to systems where the output waveform is sinusoidal at all frequencies, such that the
motor power is fully utilized at the motors rated speed and no motor derating is necessary.
Suppliers that can show a test of the motors temperature rise on controller operation, where the
motor is operated at full load and speed, shall be seen to be suitable proof. The test shall be
based on a Class B temperature rise in Class F winding insulation.
If derating is applicable the Tenderer shall supply curves showing the necessary derating of the
motor.
Mains Voltage Compensation
The controller shall automatically correct the output voltage during main’s variations of + 10%
to prevent loss of torque and speed variations occurring during motor operation.
Automatic Energy Optimisation
The controller shall incorporate an “Automatic Energy Optimiser” function which continually
adjusts the output voltage to a reduced level to give maximum motor efficiency at any given
partial load.
Fixed or manually adjustable voltage to frequency ratio curves are not acceptable.
Speed Control – Open Loop

The controller shall automatically adjust the output frequency and voltage to maintain a stable
motor speed of + 0.5% of the motor’s rated speed. The accuracy shall be maintained over a
speed range of 1% to 100% without the use of a closed feedback loop.
Radio Frequency Interference Emission
Tenderers are reminded that the building contains equipment sensitive to RFI interference. Full
compliance to the standards is requested.
Controllers shall be marked as being C-tick compliant in accordance with the Radio
Communications Act.
The controllers shall be fitted with RFI filters in accordance with their C-tick certification and
the standards for electromagnetic interference Group 1 Class A or Group 1 Class B as
determined by the type of installation. The Tenderer shall nominate which class will be
complied with and the length of motor cable at which the compliance testing was conducted.
Preference shall be given to controllers that use their own dedicated RFI filters, and are
integrated into the controller’s design.
Where controllers are designed with external RFI filters, they shall be assembled by the
manufacturer and supplied as a complete unit tested to C-Tick compliance.
The separate RFI filters, if needed, shall be mounted in metal enclosures to the same protection
rating as the controller and located as close to the mains connection terminals of the controller
as possible.
The Tenderer shall nominate the installation methods required to maintain C-tick compliance
including the maximum cable length for which compliance can be maintained.
Controllers must have metal enclosures designed to prevent the radiated radio frequency
interference noise (RFI) from affecting the operation of other equipment. The metal enclosures
must be earthed with a loc impedance connection to the main earthing system either via a large
cross section earthing conductor or by direct mounting on an unpainted earthed mounting plate.
Note: The minimum earth conductor sizes specified by current British Standard may not be
sufficient to provide good earthing at the frequencies in question.
EMC effective terminations for power, control and communication cable screens must be
provided.
Preference shall be given to controllers designed with earth/cable screen clamps that fit over the
cable and offer the largest cross-sectional area.
Radio Frequency Interference Immunity
The controllers shall be immune to interference from other RFI producing equipment.
In addition, the controllers shall be suitable to operate on an electrical network containing UPS
equipment that may contain active harmonic filters.
The controllers shall be immune to interference frequencies greater than 800Hz.
Harmonics and Power Factor

Tenderers are reminded that the building contains a high portion of harmonic producing loads.
The information requested in this section of the specification is important for the evaluation of
the total building’s harmonic distortion limits.
The harmonic voltage distortion of the installation must be assessed and the Tenderer shall
include a harmonic voltage distortion calculation based on the loads and network data given
elsewhere in the specification.
The harmonic current distortion produced by the controllers shall comply with IEC 1000-3-2
and IEC 1000-3-4 respectively according to the current ratings.
Mains Harmonic currents generated by the controller must be limited by mains reactors or
reactors in the DC bus of the controller. Preference shall be given to controllers that include
reactors in the DC. Bus circuit.
Controllers that do not include internal reactors shall be supplied with external three phase
reactors connected on the mains side of the controller. The reactors shall be fitted to each phase
and shall have a minimum impedance of 5%. The reactors shall be mounted in steel enclosures
to a rating equivalent to the controller.
When external three phase reactors are supplied, Tenderers shall include the amount of voltage
drop that will occur over the reactors at full load and advise how the controller will respond to
the lower voltage. The Tenderer shall state the amount of expected derating which will occur
on the motor when running at rated speed and load.
Tenderers shall include a spectrum of harmonic generating currents in the 1st-19th harmonic
range and shall state both the fundamental and the total power factor of the controller at 100%
load.
Calculation of the total power factor must be based on the ratio of the input power determined
by the fundamental current and the total input kVA determined by the RMS current which
includes all harmonic currents up to and including the 19th.
The fundamental power being the displacement between the fundamental current and the
voltage will not be accepted as power factor, as it only applies to power factor in loads which
draw a sinusoidal current.
Switching on the Input
The controller shall be sized to allow for a minimum of 1 start/min. on mains operation.
Start/stop operation using electronic operation shall be unlimited.
Switching on the Output
The controller shall be suitably protected to allow for unlimited switching to take place on the
output via, a contactor or isolating switch without damage to the inverter transistors or the
switching device.
Motor Voltage Rise Time and Peak Voltages
The controller shall include features which limit the rate of the output voltage rise over time
(dV/dt) and prevent peak voltages from occurring. Preference shall be given to controllers that
integrate these features into the design of the unit. Rise times and peak voltages shall be within
the limits specified in IEC34-17 and shall be stated in the Tender for 50mts of motor cable.
Motor Noise

It shall be possible to reduce the motor noise by increasing the inverter switching frequency.
Any derating required when this feature is used shall be stated. The controller shall be able to
monitor the load to maintain low noise operation over the whole speed range unless the load
becomes high enough to require derating. It will then automatically reduced the switching
frequency to enable the output to be maintained.
The controller will also monitor the heatsink temperature and on high temperature will lower the
switching frequency to avoid any derating unless it is absolutely necessary.
It shall be possible to fit an LC filter to the output of the inverter to give a sinusoidal voltage as
well as the usual sinusoidal current to completely eliminate the inverter driven noise.
Cable Length
Controllers shall be capable of allowing cable runs of up to 300 metres using unscreened cables
and 150 metres for screened cables. If the controller cannot allow this cable length, the
Tenderer shall state the maximum cable length allowed and the motor coil reactance value
intended to be used to increase the cable length. The Tenderer shall state clearly the voltage
drop and additional motor derating that will occur when motor reactors are fitted.
Auto Tuning of Motor Parameters
The controllers which incorporate automatic tuning and setting of the main motor parameters
are preferred. The tuning shall be based on measurements of the motors inductance and
resistance.
The automatic tuning shall stop and register an alarm condition if the automatic tuning detects
an out of balance in the motor windings, or cannot set the correct parameters for the motor.
Systems that do not require the motor to turn during tuning are considered to be beneficial
The Tenderer shall state whether auto tuning is included and whether auto tuning requires the
motor to turn.
Flying Start
The controller shall be suitable for control of high inertia loads and be able to catch a rotating
motor under any operating condition without tripping.
The function shall also ensure that a motor on a high inertia load already pre-rotating, even in
the reverse direction, can be switched onto, braked to zero speed by DC injection braking
incorporated in the controller and then accelerated to the preset speed in the correct direction.
Skip Frequencies
In order to eliminate any system resonance occurring within the motor’s operating frequency
range, the controller shall be provided with four bypass frequency adjustments. The bandwidth
of the frequency bypass shall be adjustable.
PID Regulator
The controller shall incorporate a PID regulator to enable closed loop control of the process.
The regulator shall operate in conjunction with the ramp adjustments to allow smooth
acceleration into regulation. It shall respect the controller’s minimum and maximum limits and
shall include an anti windup function.

The PID regulator shall be directly programmed in process units such as m³/h or kPa.
The PID regulator shall be able to operate in the normal or inverse modes.
Remote monitoring of the feed back signal via an 0/4 – 20mA signal from the controller is
required.
Feedback Calculation
The PID controller shall be able to accept up to 2 sensor feedbacks. It shall be able to calculate
the Minimum, Maximum, Sum, Difference and Average of the 2 signals.
In addition it shall have a 2 zone Minimum or Maximum selection where the zones have
independent setpoints.
Feedback Conversion
To allow a pressure transmitter to be used as a flow measuring device the controller shall be
able to perform a square root conversion on the feedback signal.
Sleep Mode
The controller shall incorporate a sleep mode function which can automatically shutdown the
motor when the speed drops below a set value. Provision shall also be made to configure the
wake up conditions under which the motor will restart. The sleep mode shall include a boost
function to extend the interval between starting and stopping and to reduce cycling.
Run Permissive
The controller should include a Run Permissive function which allows control land interlocking
of other mechanical equipment such as dampers.
Motor Preheat
To prevent condensation build up in the stator the controller shall incorporate a pre-heat
function. When the motor is stopped it shall receive a low DC voltage from the controller.
Fire Mode
Under fire mode operation when the Building Management System (BMS) has shutdown, the
controller shall automatically default to run at a preset speed with the controllers inbuilt motor
protection inhibited.
Access to DC Bus Connection
Provision shall be made for accessing the DC bus of the inverter so that an external 12 pulse
rectifier or active front end can be fitted.
23.12.19.03 Control and Monitoring
Galvanic Isolation
All analogue and digital control inputs and outputs shall be galvanically isolated from the mains
supply and shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage of 2.5 kV dc for 1 sec. The

controllers galvanic isolation shall meet the requirements of EN50178. For safety reasons, only
controllers that have galvanic isolation as an integral part of the controller will be accepted.
Digital Inputs
Digital inputs shall have freely programmable functions and shall have a scan time less than 3
ms.
Noise Immunity On Digital Inputs
For maximum noise immunity on the digital inputs the sink current shall be minimum 10 mA at
24 V for each input.
Relay Outputs
Two programmable relays shall be provided for remote monitoring of the controller. The
programmable options shall include as a minimum ready, run, and alarm.
The run relay function shall initiate a run signal only when the frequency output from the
controller is greater than 0.5 Hz.
Analogue Inputs
The controller shall accept voltage (max 10V) and current (max 20mA) inputs. The inputs shall
have provision for scaling both the minimum and maximum values including their respective
inverted signals. Analogue inputs shall have freely programmable functions and shall have at
least 10 bit plus sign resolution.
Thermistor Input
The inverter shall be capable of accepting direct input from a thermistor, without the need for
thermistor modules.
Pulse Input
The inverter shall be able to accept a pulse train the frequency of which gives an analogue
reference of feedback.
External I/O Power Supply
It shall be possible to supply the digital inputs from an external power supply with full isolation
from the inverter’s internal supply if desired.
Sensor Power Supply
The controller shall have an internal power supply to provide a sensor supply for the digital
inputs and any loop powered analogue sensors.
This internal power supply shall have a minimum capacity of 200 mA at 24V.
Analogue Outputs
Two programmable analogue outputs shall be provided for monitoring. A choice of 0-20 mA
and 4-20 mA shall be provided. The programmable options shall include as a minimum Hz,
Amps and Torque. The resolution shall be at least 8 bit.

Pulse Output
The inverter shall be able to generate a pulse train output the frequency of which is proportional
to the signal being transmitted.
Local Control Panel
The controller shall have local control panel with an alpha-numeric display which shall provide
comprehensive information on the controller and the motor’s condition. The following is
considered as minimum requirements:
. Reference % of control signal

. Frequency Hz
. Display of feedback signal
. Current A
. Torque %
. Power kW
. Energy kWh
. Output voltage V
. DC link voltage V
. Motor thermal reserve %
. Inverter thermal reserve %\
. Input status
The Tenderer shall state clearly which displays are available, in particular whether the controller
can display energy kWh and torque, and what alternative methods can be used if the controller
cannot display these parameters.
It shall be possible to remote mount the display with an IP65 degree of protection.
The local control panel shall be used for setting parameters and tuning the controller.
Preference shall be given to multi-level menu structures which give a simplified setup procedure
for the most common applications.
The display shall include a non-volatile memory for storing drive parameters to enable
uploading and downloading parameters to different drives.
Fault Display
The controller shall display all faults in clear English text. The following is considered as
minimum requirements:
. Mains phase loss

. Over voltage
. Under voltage
. Inverter overload
. Motor thermal overload (thermal model)
. Motor thermistor
. Electronic shear pin
. Over current
. Earth fault
. Switch mode power supply fault
. Output short circuit
. RS485 communications timeout
. High performance communications bus timeout
. Brake resistor fault

. Heat sink over temperature

. Motor phase missing
. Inverter fault
The Tenderer shall state whether the controller can provide clear English text or if the faults are
distinguishable only through a code system.
Hand/Off/Auto Control
The controller shall provide for Hand/Off/Auto control to allow for local by hand control or
remote Auto control by the BMS. This function shall be selectable via the Local Control Panel
or via digital I/O.
Totalisers
The controller shall incorporate the following totalisers.
. Hour Run Meter

. Kilowatt Hours
Serial Communication – RS485
The controller shall be fitted with an RS485 serial port. This port may use a proprietary
protocol but a strong preference will be given to controllers which can directly communicate
with the protocol of the BMS supplier with no need for additional hardware or software.
Examples of this are the Metasys N2 protocol from Johnson Controls and the FLN protocol
from Landis & Steafa.
Serial Communication – Option Cards
The controller shall have provision to accept an option card for serial communication with a
BMS using protocols demanding specific hardware. PROFIBUS OR LonWorks are examples
of fieldbus standards which require special chips to handle the protocols. The Tenderer shall list
the available protocols.
Serial Communication – PC Package
Suitable software utilising a Windows environment to display all monitoring, fault, alarm and
status signals shall be provided for communication over the inbuilt RS485 serial port. The
software shall allow parameter changes to be made to the controller’s settings by uploading the
data from the controller, changing the parameters and then downloading the data to the
controller again. Storage of each controllers operating and set-up parameters shall be able to be
stored on diskette. Provision for trending of values against time will be considered favourably.
23.12.19.04 Protection And Monitoring
Local Repair Facilities
The Tenderer shall state whether full repair facilities are available and in which States they are
located. The Tenderer shall also nominate the hours that service is available, i.e. normal
working hours or 24 hours 7 days a week.
Controller Shutdown
The controller shall shutdown safely under the following conditions and operate the alarm relay.
The controller display shall indicate the nature of the fault in clear English text.

. Mains phase loss

. Over voltage
. Under voltage
. Inverter overload
. Motor thermal overload (thermal model)
. Motor thermistor
. Electronic shear pin
. Over current
. Earth fault
. Switch mode power supply fault
. Output short circuit
. RS485 communications timeout
. High performance communications bus timeout
. Brake resistor fault
. Heat sink over temperature
. Motor phase missing
. Inverter fault
Manual and Auto Reset
The controller shall provide for both automatic and manual reset operation. Automatic reset
shall only operate on over current and over and under voltage. In automatic mode there shall be
a programmable choice of up to 10 reset attempts per fault before the controller shuts down
making manual reset necessary to restart the system. The restart time after a trip in automatic
mode shall be adjustable.
In manual reset mode the reset shall be accomplished from both the keypad on the controller
and by remote signal.
Data Log of Faults
The controller shall be equipped with a data log menu that will allow storage of the type of
faults that have occurred. Last fault memory shall be required in the event of power failures.
The log will also contain trending data over time to indicate the status of the main inverter
control signals prior and subsequent to the fault.
Input Protection
The Tenderer shall state the type input protection devices such as circuit breakers or fuses that
need to be fitted upstream of the inverter. It shall be particularly highlighted if the protection is
of a special type such as high speed semi conductor fuses.
Autoderating
The controller shall maintain operation as long as possible under fault conditions. For example
the controller should automatically derate itself and reduce the speed to a safe level on high
temperature or a phase loss to maintain some control of the process rather than shutting down
due to a trip.
Electronic Thermal Overload Protection
The controller shall include electronic motor thermal overload protection where the trip time is
based on the motors running frequency, actual motor current, operating time and the motors
rated current. The device shall automatically modify the trip time to take into account operation
at low speed. On trip the controller shall indicate that the fault is a motor thermal trip.

Thermistor Protection
The controller shall include a motor PTC thermistor input for use when motors are fitted with
thermistors and shutdown the motor when the PTC resistance value increases above its safe
operating value. On trip the controller shall indicate that the fault is a motor thermistor trip.

23.13.00 CONTROLS
23.13.01.01 GENERAL
The Mechanical Trade and their BMCS Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of a complete controls system to achieve safe functional
operation of the plant as further described in the Schedules and elsewhere in this Specification.
Controls for the mechanical plant shall be provided by the following:
. the DDC/BMCS system;
. direct from the FFCP/FIB.
The Building Management System (BMCS) shall be supplied, installed and commissioned to provide
the control functions to achieve the required automatic control of space conditions, monitoring and
control operation of plant within the tolerances specified in both normal and after hours mode as
detailed in the control operation clauses.
Separate electric/electronic control systems shall be supplied, installed and commissioned to provide
the control function required in fire mode and as detailed in the control operation clauses.
The two control systems shall be interfaced to facilitate normal and override fire functions as further
detailed in the Schedules.
Control systems shall be:
. Automated Logic
. Honeywell
. Johnson
or approved equal.
Electronic controls shall be of the same manufacture and where this is not practical, details on the
proposed makes of control components shall be submitted for approval. Alternative systems may be
offered provided they:
. incorporate the specified interlocks and protective devices;
. have at least equal reliability;
. are fully described in the tender submission.
Unless otherwise specified, all DDC/BMCS control equipment shall be selected, supplied, tested and
commissioned by a DDC/BMCS controls' manufacturer and installation shall be by tradesmen
regularly engaged in the installation of automatic controls.
The setting and commissioning of controls shall be undertaken in conjunction with the testing and
balancing of the mechanical services installations and these two activities shall be fully co-ordinated.
All controls shall preferably be of the same manufacture and where this is not practicable details on
the proposed makes of controls should be submitted for approval.
All controls shall be open protocol, using native BACNet. The provider shall have a minimum of
3 years local experience with the system provided.
The client access shall be through thin client web interface. The provider shall have a minimum of 3
years local experience with the system provided.

CONTROLS
Where any deviation from the specified (either hardware or software) is proposed, this shall be
clearly described in the tender and shall be subject to approval. If no such qualification is made at the
time of tender then it will be assumed that the DDC/BMCS System offered conforms entirely with
the specification.
Detailed control diagrams for each system shall be submitted for approval by the engineer before
commencing installation.
It is the intent of this specification to describe the basic architecture and performance requirements of
the Building Management System (BMCS). The BMCS shall be based on a distribution system of
fully intelligent, standalone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on a
true peer-to-peer, token passing Local Area Network (LAN), called the Controller LAN. All
“primary” equipment shall be served by standalone controllers residing directly on this Controller
LAN. System architectures with primary equipment controllers residing on master/slave (polling)
networks or sub-networks will not be acceptable. The Building Management System shall include
all work station software and hardware, Distributed Control Units (DCUs), Local Area Networks
(LANs) sensors, control devices, actuators, installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments and
fine tuning necessary for a complete and fully operational system.
The man/machine interface (terminal) with the system shall be a personal computer (PC) and shall be
capable of being connected to the system at any node on the network.
The system shall be capable of being addressed by multiple terminals simultaneously.
The complete system shall incorporate excess capacity for the purpose of future expansion, as further
specified.
23.13.02 EXTENT OF WORK
The following services shall be provided with automatic control and monitoring :
. Mechanical, electrical, hydraulic and fire services.

. Lift services shall interface with the BMCS.
The works shall include all necessary minor and incidental works required to implement the intent
and meaning of this specification but not limited to the following:
. Provision of all mechanical services switchboards as necessary for the control of the
mechanical and electrical equipment and as shown in the drawings.
. Provision of all controllers, routers and ancilliary devices for a complete BMCS network.
. Provision of head end network operator interface terminal and outstations.
. Provision of all temperature sensors, humidity sensors, damper and valve actuators, pressure
sensors, pressure transmitters, velocity sensors, relays, analogue input/output transducers and
other field devices for the complete control system.
. Provision of all the necessary software for the proper functioning of the control system.
. Provision of high level MODBUS interface to be provided by BMS contractor to enable the
monitoring and recording functions of the energy meter monitoring system to be provided by
the Electrical Trade.
. Provision of all the necessary cabling and wiring including the installation of conduits, cable
trays for the system.
. Training of the Client's operation team.

CONTROLS
. Testing and commissioning of the complete system including both the factory witness test and
site witness test of the software.
. Provision of all operation and maintenance manuals, "as fitted" drawings for the system. The
operation and maintenance manual shall incorporate the design philosophy of the system.
. Provision of BACnet based web server running Microsoft server 2003.
. Provision of UPS for server and all jBMS controllers providing 30 minutes operation.
. Connection to ADSL line provided by client.
. All plant as further nominated in the Schedule shall be complete with run/fault lights together
with auto-off-test control on the respective switchboards. Indication of manual override of
plant shall be provided at the DDC/BMCS. Hours run indication shall be provided for all plant
in the DDC/BMCS for plant controlled by DDC.
. A magnehelic shall be provided to display pressure measured across the filters of each air
conditioner.
A return functional specification complete with detailed control diagrams and operation philosophy
for each system shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer before commencing installation.
23.13.02.01 Associated Works
Electrical Services
. Supply and installation of the BMCS demarcation terminal box.
. Supply, installation and commissioning of high and low level inputs within electrical
equipment connected to the BMCS.
. Supply and installation of cabling from the demarcation terminal box to low level outputs
within electrical equipment.
Hydraulic Services
. Supply, installation and commissioning of high and low level inputs within hydraulic
within hydraulic services equipment.
Fire Services
. Supply, installation and commissioning of high and low level inputs within fire equipment
connected to the BMCS.
within fire services equipment.
Security Services
. Supply, installation and commissioning of high and low level inputs within security
. Supply and installation of cabling from the demarcation terminal box to the challenger system.

CONTROLS
. Termination of cables installed.
. Programming and commissioning of all circuits connected to the challenger system.
23.13.03 FUNCTIONAL BUILDING MANAGEMENT CONTROL SPECIFICATION
23.13.03.01 General
The BMCS will monitor and control the following mechanical systems:
a) Emergency chilled water plant

b) Building (secondary) chilled water pumps.
c) Air handling units for preconditioning of outside air including heat recovery system
d) Operating theatre air handling units including heat recovery system
e) Fan coil units
f) Air conditioning to the Ground floor Computer room by CRAC units
g) Air conditioning to the Building A, Level 5 UPS room
h) Kitchen exhaust system
i) Car park ventilation system
j) Various ventilation exhaust systems
The BMCS will monitor items of the hydraulic, lift, fire and electrical systems as summarised in the
BMCS point list.
23.13.03.02 Emergency Chilled Water Pant
System Overview
Emergency chilled water plant comprises one off air-cooled screw chillers (CH-B/5-1), one chilled
water pump (PCHWP-B/5-1,2) and five (5) motorised valves.
Emergency chiller and associated pumps are located on the Level 5 of building B. Motorised
“change over” valves are located in the Empower Transfer station on Basement B1
Chilled Water Plant Start / Stop
Chilled water plant shall be enabled by the BMCS when “call for emergency chiller” is active.
Call for emergency chiller is generated by the Empower loss of chilled water.
On a “call for emergency chiller” from the BMCS system operation of the emergency chiller plant
shall be as follows:
. Motorised “OPEN / CLOSED” valve type “A” shall close and motorized “OPEN / CLOSED”
valve type “B” shall open.
. After an adjustable time delay (10-30 seconds, set initially at 10s), primary chilled water
pump shall start.
. After sensing chilled water flow and adjustable time delay (60-600 seconds, set initially at
60s), the chiller shall start. The chiller shall modulate under its own controls between
minimum run down load to 100% load to maintain leaving water temperature at set point
(initially set to 5.5 C)
. If cooling load drops below chiller’s minimum run down load chiller shall stop. Chilled water
pump shall continue to operate. When chilled water supply temperature exceeds chilled water
supply temperature by 1.0 C (adjustable) chiller shall re-start.

CONTROLS
. Primary chilled water pump shall be stopped by the BMCS when call for emergency chiller is
ceased and chiller is stopped.
Primary Chilled Water Pump Duty / Standby Control
Chilled water pumps PCHWP-B/5-1 and PCHWP-B/5-2 operate in a duty / stand-by arrangement.
The stand-by pump becomes the duty pump should any of the following conditions occur:
. Duty pump fails (PCHWP mismatch alarm)

. Duty PCHWP not in “auto” (via monitoring of MSB selector switch)
The BMCS automatically changes the duty / stand by sequence whenever duty pump was operating
and stopped.
Special Provisions
. The operation of any chiller set shall only occur providing its associated chilled water pump is
operating. Flows switches shall be vapour and weatherproof manual reset type located in
leaving condenser and chilled water line of each chiller. Flow switches shall be hard-wired to
the chiller set control system to prove water flows, with indication of status provided on the
BMCS system.
. Chiller sets shall start unloading at all times when demand for chilled water ceases and shall
stop on loss of chilled water flow.
. Each compressor set within the chiller shall be capable of independent operation. Should any
compressor be “out of service” or fail to start the BMCS system or chiller control system shall
bypass that compressor in its sequence.
. Each chiller set shall be capable of independent operation. Should either chiller be “out of
service” or fail to start the BMCS system shall bypass that chiller in sequence.
. Provide Auto/Off/Manual switch for each chilled water pump with green run and red fault
pilot lamps.
. Chiller compressor shall be prevented from short cycling by limiting the number of starts per
hour.
23.13.03.03 Building (Secondary) Chilled Water Pumps
System Overview
Building (secondary) chilled water pumps are located in the ETS on Basement B1. Generally there
will be a constant call for chilled water, however this is determined as follows:
The building (secondary) chilled water pumps are enabled whenever there is a call for cooling from
any of the fan coil units, air handling units or CRAC units.
Building (secondary) Chilled Water Pumps Speed Control
Building (secondary) chilled water pumps are staged “on” and “off” and their speed varied to
maintain the required differential pressure between supply and return line at set point (determined at
commissioning) in the building chilled water loop.
Once another pump is staged “on”, all operating pumps will operate at the same speed to maintain
the system pressure.
The switching points for the pumps will be determined, for most efficient operation’ from the pump
curves.

CONTROLS
Pump Lead Lag Change Over
To effect even wear on all pumps, the lead / lag arrangement is changed whenever there is a “stage
down” i.e. the pump with most operating hours is stopped
23..04 Air handling units for pre conditioning of O/A (dedicated outside air units)
System Overview
Outside air for fan coil units is pre-conditioned in the separate air-handling unit. There are two off air
handling units, one serving building A and another serving building B (AHU-A/5-1 and AHU-B/5-
06). Air handling units incorporate heat recovery coil for pre-cooling of outside air by toilet exhaust
via so called “run around coil” heat recovery system. Toilet exhaust air is filtered and before it is
discharged outside the building is passing through “heating” coil of run around heat recovery system.
Heating coil in toilet exhaust system and pre cooling coil in the air handling unit for pre conditioning
of outside air are looped by piping.
Circulating pump enables heat transfer from hot air stream (outside air) to cold air stream (toilet
exhaust)
Air handling units are located on Level 5 in the respective building’s plant room.
Air handling units for pre-conditioning of outside air shall be started and stopped by the BMCS.
These units will operate 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
Motorised Dampers Control
When the air handling plant is not operating the outside air damper shall be in full closed position.
When the air handling unit operating outside air damper shall be in full open position.
Air Filter Status
Monitoring of the cleanliness of the air filter(s) shall be provided for each AHU by sensors
measuring the differential pressure across the filter(s).
The BMCS shall warn of a dirty filter when the pressure switch is made / the differential pressure
has risen above 250 Pa (adjustable).
The BMCS shall warn of a dirty filter when the pressure sensors indicate a pressure differential
above the pressure set point which is scheduled to fan speed, being 75 Pa for 1 Volt fan speed control
signal and 150 Pa for a 10 Volts fan speed control signal. The relationship between the limits shall be
linear.
Provide Magnahelic gauge for local indication of filter pressure drop.
Supply Air temperature Reset
Supply air temperature from the dedicated outside air units shall be kept at 14 C. Supply air
temperature will be reset based on critical FCU.
BMCS will monitor chilled water valve position on all fan coil units.
If at least two fan coil units with active operating schedules have chilled water valves 100% closed
supply air temperature from the dedicated outside air units will be reset upwards by 0.2 deg C
(adjustable) every 10min (adjustable) all chilled water valves on fan coil units served by respective
dedicated outside air system are less than 100% closed.
AHU Chilled Water Control Valve

CONTROLS
After the AHU fan has been running for 10 minutes (adjustable) and the AHU supply air temperature
is 2ºC (adjustable) greater than the “AHU supply air set point” (initially set to 14 deg C), then the
AHU chilled water cooling valve shall be enabled.
When enabled the “chilled water cooling valve” shall be modulated to maintain supply air
temperature at set point.
The controller shall be proportion and integral and include a dead band; all these should be
adjustable from the BMCS.
The system shall be such that it operates in a stable manner under start up conditions and all load
requirements.
When the AHU fan is stopped, the chilled water control valve shall be disabled and shall be in the
closed position.
Circulating Water Pump control
Circulating water pump runs whenever air handling unit for pre-cooling of outside air operates,
respective toilet exhaust fan operates and outside air temperature is higher than “heat recovery
critical outside air temperature”.
Heat recovery critical outside air temperature is the temperature at which benefits from run around
heat recovery system are higher than penalties (pump energy consumption). This shall be determined
during the commissioning of the system.
Toilet Exhaust Fan Control
Toilet exhaust fan operation is controlled by the BMCS (initially set to 24/7).
Dedicated outside air unit fan speed control
Speed of the fan in the dedicated outside air unit is modulated to maintain static pressure in the
supply air duct. This will be determined at commissioning to achieve minimum outside air quantity
at each fan coil unit.
Floor Modulating/Isolation Dampers Control
Floor outside air isolation dampers serve a dual purpose, floor isolation and outside air control.
BMCS will monitor the status of each fan coil unit operation.
Fan coil units operating less than 24 hours shall be equipped with motorised isolation damper. When
fan coil unit’s fan is operating outside air motorised isolation damper is open. When fan coil unit’s
fan stop motorised isolation damper is closed.
BMCS will determine total minimum outside air quantity for each Level based on the operating
status of the fan coil unis and minimum outside air design quantity for each operating fan coil unit.
Floor outside air damper(s) will modulate by a P+I control loop to maintain calculated minimum
outside air quantity for all operating fan coil units set point (l/s), relative to an associated duct
velocity sensor.
23.13.03.04 Chilled Water Fan Coil Units
Overview
Fan coil units are cooling only connected to the chilled water system

CONTROLS
Each Fan Coil Unit (FCU) shall be controlled by an independent DDC “Application Specific
Controller” (ASC) linked with the local stand alone unit. FCU shall be programmed to provide a 1.0
deg C (adjustable) dead band between cooling and heating operation.
Start / Stop Control
Fan coil units serving general areas shall be started and stopped by the BMCS.
Fan coil units serving meeting / conference rooms shall be started and stopped by the BMCS at the
facilities manager’s PC or by local “ON” switch. When local switch is pressed “ON”, FCU will start
and operate for 2 hours. If additional operation is required, “ON” switch must be activated again.
Supply Air Temperature Control
Provide a room air temperature sensor/controller or return air temperature sensor/controller (for
FCU serving more than one room) for each fan coil unit.
Supply air temperature shall be modulated to maintain zone (space) or return air temperature at
selected set point by modulating chilled water control valve.
Room temperature set point adjustment shall be carried by a qualified technician only.
The room air set point and dead band between cooling operation and heating operation shall be fully
adjustable.
Fan coil units operating 8:00 to 18:00 shall be equipped with motorized outside air damper. This
damper shall open when respective fan coil unit’s fan operate and shall close when respective fan
coil unit’s fan stop.
23.13.03.05 Computer Room Air Conditioning System
Overview
Computer Room is air conditioned by two off (1 duty and 1 stand-by) chilled water Computer Room
Air Conditioning Units (CRAC).
Each CRAC unit shall be fitted with its own control system. No DDC control of CRAC units
operation is required.
Provide monitoring a DDC room air temperature sensor and room relative humidity sensors for
monitoring of Computer Room conditions.
Arrange for an alarm condition to register in the event of temperature and relative humidity
exceeding preset limit.
Standby-Function
With applications involving more than one unit, a standby-module can be configured, which is
sequenced over all present units. In case of failure on one of the units in operation, the automatic
inbuilt changeover in the controllers activates the standby-module and an alarm is generated. No
external devices shall be used for this operation to take place.
Peak Load Operation with Standby Unit
In case of temporary high room heat loads the controller can activate the standby module for a short
period of time to increase the cooling capacity. The standby unit is switched off automatically as
soon as the heat load has reached its normal size. No external devices shall be used for this operation
to take place.

CONTROLS
In applications, where two units are operating in duty-standby mode, the controller in the standby
unit shall remain active (with unit off) continually sensing conditions in the room. This ensures that
if conditions in the room rise to a certain level, the standby unit will automatically switch on to assist
in the cooling without the need to rely on the duty unit.
Unit Sequencing, Standby Functions for Units

The i/o controller enables a sequencing function with time-based and failure-based switch-over for
up to 31 units by data bus connection. The number of standby-units is variable. A peak load
operation can also be configured. No external devices shall be used for this operation to take place.
Depending on the number of units, the temperature and humidity sensors can be connected for the
calculation of average control values to ensure the environment is controlled simultaneously
avoiding units working against each other.
23.13.03.06 Kitchen Exhaust System
Kitchen Exhaust Fans (KEF-A/5-1) shall be started and stopped by the local on / off switch with
neon indicator light. The switch is to be surface mounted IP56 type. Final location to be agreed with
kitchen fit out contractor.
23.13.03.07 Garbage Room Exhaust Fan
This fan shall operate continuously.
23.13.03.08 Car Park Ventilation
The car park ventilation system shall have a user selectable, common 0-20mA or 4-20mA output(s)
per zone. The option to provide additional analogue outputs, up to one analogue output per channel,
shall be available. All analogue output signals shall be essentially linear. Alarm set-point levels shall
be fully field adjustable within the measuring range of the instrument and shall be initially set as
follows:
Two alarm levels shall be provided for each channel;
- 1st Alarm Level – 8 PPM

- 2nd Alarm Level – 25 PPM
Below 8ppm the output from the control panel shall be 4mA = 25% ventilation flow rate; between 8
and 25ppm the analogue outputs shall rise linearly from 0 or 4mA to a maximum 20mA at 25ppm =
100% ventilation flow rate. Above the second alarm level the output(s) shall remain at a maximum
of 20mA.
23.13.03.09 Operating Sequence
Fan logic control shall be incorporated to control the various fan operation at the various speeds.
Interface with the variable speed controllers for the fans shall be included.
Operating Sequence shall be as follows:
System minimum ventilation rate shall be 25% of total flow rate. If CO level remains below 8ppm
for 2 hours between 8.00pm and 5.00am, the ventilation system will shut down.
When the CO level rises above 8ppm for more than 4 minute the associated system shall be operated
at low speed.
For systems with analogue outputs; between 8 and 25ppm the analogue output shall increase linearly
between 0 or 4mA and 20mA. At maximum analogue output = 100% total flow rate.
If the CO levels rise above 25ppm, analogue outputs shall be at a maximum of 20mA for analogue
output systems.

CONTROLS
For analogue output systems, when the levels fall below 25ppm and above 8ppm, the analogue
output shall reduce linearly. For systems operating low/high speed fans, the high alarm relays shall
open to operate the fans at low speed, subject to the minimum run time having expired.
All time delays in the system shall be easily field programmable and the logic system required to
control the fans in the above sequence shall be mounted in the gas detection control cabinet located
adjacent to the associated motor control centres as indicated.
All signals, etc shall be interfaced back to the BMS system.
In fire mode, the car park ventilation fans are to operate at the rated maximums whilst maintaining a
negative operation pressure in the space to extract smoke.
23.13.03.10 Fire Mode
The complete air supply system shall shutdown during the fire mode operation.
Control of the fire mode operation shall be fail safe.
23.13.03.11 Run and Fault Lights
All drives for fans, air conditioning units etc shall be provided with run and fault lights.
23.13.03.12 After Hours Air Conditioning Requests
The BMCS shall be equipped with an after hours air conditioning call system.
The system shall:
Tenant Access
. Allow the tenant to override normal operating hours for a nominated area in their tenancy.
. Confirm the selection to the tenant at the time of order.
. Register the caller identification and actual run on a database.
. Provide access for the tenant to start, stop, user identification and total run time data base
information for their tenancy.
. Accept multiple after hours calls.
Operator Access
. Allow high level access to the BMCS including equipment status, space temperatures,
equipment on/off, set point alteration.
23.13.03.13 Other Mechanical Ventilation Systems
All mechanical ventilation systems shall be interlocked with their corresponding systems.
23.13.04 GRAPHICAL DISPLAY
Provide Microsoft Windows based building graphics display of alarms and monitoring of system
performance. The graphic l display shall include as a minimum:
. Building overview as “introduction” view

CONTROLS
. Minimum of one graphic per floor to indicate single floor plan overview, alarm points, sensor
locations, space temperature set point and actual temperatures
. Graphic for each dedicated outside air unit including heat recovery system
. Graphics for each operating theatre air handling system including heat recovery system
. Graphics for each air handling unit and fan coil unit
. Graphics for each CRAC unit
. Emergency chilled water system
. Building (secondary) chilled water pumps
. Each ventilation system (supply and exhaust)
. Fire alarm interface
. Lighting control interface
. Hydraulic plant interface
. Electric plant interface
. Security system interface
All graphic displays shall dynamically indicate all status points, sensor settings, actual temperatures,
pressure settings, damper positions, valve positions etc., to allow review of system operation and
performance.
Data stored and monitored within the BMCS shall be dynamically shown on the appropriate page
and include information relevant to the Operators role in maintaining correct operation of the system
as follows:
. AHU summary sheet

. FCU summary sheet
. CRAC summary sheet
. Ventilation systems summary sheet
. Mechanical switchboards summary sheet
. Valve positions
. Damper positions
. Miscellaneous energy and interface status
Dynamic information shall be updated at a maximum interval of 5 seconds.
Management reports will be generated from the FEP including total energy and all energy sub-
metering, monitoring, calculations, including graphical representation.
23.13.05 BMCS POINT SCHEDULE
Legend
DI - Digital In
DO - Digital Out
AI - Analogue In
AO - Analogue Out
HLI - High Level Interface (Software)
The following table indicates typical points to be controlled and monitored for each equipment type.
For multiple areas or multiple items of equipment, the points shall apply to each individual area or
item of equipment.
A minimum of 20% spare points shall be allowed for future connection.
23.13.05.01 Mechanical Services
POINT FUNCTION / DESCRIPTION TYPE No. OFF FIELD DEVICE / COMMENTS

SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Emergency chilled water system (CH-1, PCHWP-1, motorised valves – 5off))
Call for emergency chiller to start DI 1 From EMPOWER

CONTROLS
Emergency Chiller S/S DO 1 Relay

Chiller Status DI 1 Aux Contact
Chiller LCHW Temp. AI 1 Temp. Sensor
Chiller Return CHW Temp. AI 1 Temp Sensor
CW Entering Temp. AI 1 Temp. Sensor
CW Leaving Temp AI 1 Temp Sensor
Chiller Current AI 1 Current Transducer
Chiller Load Reset AO 1 Chiller Control Panel
Chiller Common Fault DI 1 Aux. Contact
Motorised Valves AO 5 Valve Actuator
Pump Start/Stop (PCHWP-B/5-1) DO 1 Relay
Pump Status (PCHWP-B/5-1) DI 1 Flow Switch
Secondary loop CHW Supply Temp AI 1 Temp. Sensor
Secondary loop CHW Return Temp. AI 1 Temp. Sensor
By pass chilled water temperature AI 1 Temp. Sensor
CHW Differential Pressure AI 2 Differential Press. Transducer

SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): AHU’s
OA Temp AI 5 Temp Sensor
SA Fan Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact
SA Fan Status DI 5 Aux Contact
SA Fan Speed Control AO 5 VSD
VSD Fault DI 5 VSD
Air Filter Status DI 5 Differential Pressure Transducer
SA Temp AI 5 Duct Temp. Sensor
Chilled Water Valve AO 5 Valve Actuator
Toilet Exhaust Fan Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact
Toilet Exhaust Fan Status DI 5 Pressure Switch
OA Damper AO 5 Damper Actuator
Exhaust Air Damper AO 5 Damper Actuator
HEPA Filter Status AI 1 Differential Pressure Transducer

SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Operating Theatre Air Handling Systems:
(AHU-B/5-1,2,3,4,5; EAF-B/5-1,2,3,4,5; HRP-B/5-1,2,3,4,5)
OA Temp AI 5 Temp Sensor
OH Humidity AI 5 Humidity Sensor
Room Temperature AI 5 Temp Sensor
Room Humidity AI 5 Humidity Sensor
Air Filter Status AI 5 Differential Pressure Sensor
SA Fan Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact
SA Fan Status DI 5 Aux. Contact
VSD Fault DI 5 VSD
Heat Recovery Pump Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact
Heat Recovery Pump Fault DI 5 Relay Contact

CONTROLS
EDH Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact

EDH Status (Fault) DI 5 Relay Contact
EDH Heater Staging - - 3-Stage Heating
Leaving Air Temp. AI 5 Temp Sensor
HEPA Diff. Pressure AI 5 Differential Pressure Sensor
Room Diff. Pressure AI 5 Differential Pressure Sensor
EA Fan Start/Stop DO 5 Relay Contact
EA Fan Status DI 5 Relay Contact
VSD Fault DI 5 VSD
Motorised Damper DO 5 Damper Actuator

SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Fan Coil Units (FCU) with room temperature sensor / controller (Building A – …. off)
FCU Start / Stop DO 114 Control Relay
FCU Status DI 114 Volt free contact
Room temperature AI 114 Room Temperature Sensor
Supply Air Temperature AI 114 Duct Temperature Sensor
Return Air Temperature AI 114 Duct Temperature Sensor
Chilled Water Control Valve AO 114 Valve Actuator

SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Fan Coil Units (FCU) with room temperature sensor / controller (Building B - ….off)
FCU Start / Stop DO 81 Control Relay
FCU Status DI 81 Volt free contact
Room temperature AI 81 Room Temperature Sensor
Supply Air Temperature AI 81 Duct Temperature Sensor
Return Air Temperature AI 81 Duct Temperature Sensor
Chilled Water Control Valve AO 81 Valve Actuator

SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Computer Room Units (CRAC-B/1-1, CRAC-B/1-2)
Temperature AI 1 HLI
Humidity AI 1 HLI
Water Under Floor DI 2 HLI
Room High/Low Temperature Alarm DI 2 Room Tem. Sensor
Room High/Low Humidity Alarm DI 2 Room Humid. Sensor
CRAC Unit Common Fault DI 2

SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): Car park Ventilation Fans
Fan start / stop DO 4 Control Relay
Fan Status DI 4 Voltage Free Contact
Fan fault DI 4
SA Fan Speed Control AO 4
VSD Fault DI 4

CONTROLS
23.13.05.02 Electrical Services
POINT DESCRIPTION TYPE NO. OFF COMMENTS
UPS Unit and Batteries, Building A Roof

UPS on Batteries DI 1
UPS Low Battery DI 1
UPS on Static By-pass DI 1
UPS System Fault DI 1
Battery Monitoring Fault DI 1
UPS Unit & Batteries, Building B Ground Floor IT Room
UPS on Batteries DI 1
UPS Low Battery DI 1
UPS on Static By-pass DI 1
UPS System Fault DI 1
Battery Monitoring Fault DI 1
MSB1
Essential Service DI 1
Emergency Service DI 1
General Light & Power DI 1
MSB2
Unmetered Tenancy DI 1
Medical Equipment DI 1
Mechanical Plant DI 1
Emergency Service DI 1
Diesel Generator
DB-DG DI 1
Generator Status (Auto/Manual) DI 1
High Water Temperature Alarm DI 1
High Water Temperature Shutdown DI 1
Low Oil Pressure Alarm DI 1
Low Oil Pressure Shutdown DI 1
Fail to Start Shutdown DI 1
Overspeed Shutdown DI 1
System Diagnostic Shutdown DI 1
Battery Status DI 1
Generator on Line DI 1
Fuel Tank
Bulk Tank High Fuel Alarm DI 1
Bulk Tank Extreme Low Level Alarm DI 1
Bulk Tank Leak Alarm DI 1
Day Tank Low Level Alarm DI 1
Day Tank High Level Alarm DI 1
Pump-1 Tripped DI 1
Pump-2 Tripped DI 1
Pump-1 Running DI 1
Pump-2 Running DI 1

CONTROLS
23.13.05.03 Fire Services

SYSTEM (EQUIPMENT): FIRE SERVICES
Fire Alarm Data
Smoke detector in alarm DI 1
Isolation Data
Any isolation of the system DI 1
Tamper switch activated (sprinkler / hydrant
DI 1
system)
Plant Data
Building plant in fire trip mode (general fire
DI 1
trip)
Inergen discharged alarm DI 1
Electric sprinkler/hydrant pump run/fail DI 1
Diesel sprinkler/hydrant pump run/fault DI 1
Sprinkler tank high/low level / temp. DI 1
Fault and Maintenance Data
Smoke detector in fault DI 1
Fire Indicator Panel in fault DI 1
EWIS in fault DI 1
23.13.05.04 Hydraulic Services
POINT DESCRIPTION TYPE NO. OFF COMMENTS

LPG
Shut Off DI 1
Gas Detector (Main Kitchen) DI 1
Stormwater / Sewer Pumps
High Level Alarm DI 2
Low Level Alarm DI 2
Low Level Tank Alarm DI 7
High Level Chilled Water Tank DI 2
23.13.06 RETURN FUNCTIONAL SPECIFICATION
Prior to the installation of controls, a return functional specification complete with control diagrams
and operation philosophy shall be prepared and submitted for approval showing full details of the
control systems proposed including the type of the various components, the electrical connections
thereto and any devices which are required for the correct operation of the control system. These
drawings shall show the interface between the DDC/BMCS and the electric/electronic control system
and to other services.
At the conclusion of the contract, final control diagrams shall be prepared showing all details of
components and control settings for inclusion in the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

23.14.00 BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMCS)
23.14.01 GENERAL
The Mechanical Trade and their BMCS Sub-Contractor shall be responsible for the design, supply,
installation, testing and commissioning of a complete controls system to achieve safe functional
operation of the plant as further described in the Schedules and elsewhere in this Specification.
Controls for the mechanical plant shall be provided by the following:
. the DDC/BMCS system (refer points list);
. direct from the FFCP/FIB (refer schedule of plant operable in fire mode).
The Building Management System (BMCS) shall be supplied, installed and commissioned to provide
the control functions to achieve the required automatic control of space conditions, monitoring and
control operation of plant within the tolerances specified in both normal and after hours mode as
detailed in the control operation clauses.
Separate electric/electronic control systems shall be supplied, installed and commissioned to provide
the control function required in fire mode and as detailed in the control operation clauses.
The two control systems shall be interfaced to facilitate normal and override fire functions as further
detailed in the Schedules.
Control systems shall be Control Systems International, Automated Logic, Honeywell or approval
equal.
Electronic controls shall be of the same manufacture and where this is not practical, details on the
proposed makes of control components shall be submitted for approval. Alternative systems may be
offered provided they:
. incorporate the specified interlocks and protective devices;
. have at least equal reliability;
. are fully described in the tender submission.
Unless otherwise specified, all DDC/BMCS control equipment shall be selected, supplied, tested and
commissioned by a DDC/BMCS controls' manufacturer and installation shall be by tradesmen
regularly engaged in the installation of automatic controls.
The setting and commissioning of controls shall be undertaken in conjunction with the testing and
balancing of the mechanical services installations and these two activities shall be fully co-ordinated.
All controls shall preferably be of the same manufacture and where this is not practicable details on
the proposed makes of controls should be submitted for approval.
All controls shall be LON compatible, the provider shall have a minimum of 5 years local experience
with this type of system.
Where any deviation from the specified (either hardware or software) is proposed, this shall be
clearly described in the tender and shall be subject to approval. If no such qualification is made at the
time of tender then it will be assumed that the DDC/BMCS System offered conforms entirely with
the specification.
Detailed control diagrams for each system shall be submitted for approval by the engineer before
commencing installation.

BUILDING MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (BMCS)
It is the intent of this specification to describe the basic architecture and performance requirements of
the Building Management System (BMCS). The BMCS shall be based on a distribution system of
fully intelligent, standalone controllers, operating in a multi-tasking, multi-user environment on a
true peer-to-peer, token passing Local Area Network (LAN), called the Controller LAN. All
“primary” equipment shall be served by standalone controllers residing directly on this Controller
LAN. System architectures with primary equipment controllers residing on master/slave (polling)
networks or sub-networks will not be acceptable. The Building Management System shall include
all work station software and hardware, Distributed Control Units (DCUs), Local Area Networks
(LANs) sensors, control devices, actuators, installation and calibration, supervision, adjustments and
fine tuning necessary for a complete and fully operational system.
The man/machine interface (terminal) with the system shall be a personal computer (PC) and shall be
capable of being connected to the system at any node on the network.
The system shall be capable of being addressed by multiple terminals simultaneously.
The complete system shall incorporate excess capacity for the purpose of future expansion, as further
specified.
23.14.02 OPERATOR INTERFACE
23.14.02.01 General
A personal computer (PC) shall be provided for high level user interface with the system.
The PC shall be provided located in the BMCS office indicated on the Tender drawings.
The terminal shall be capable of providing the user with the facility for remote system interrogation,
the storage of logged and alarm data and the annunciation of alarms and reports, the analysis of
recorded data from logging and alarms and the formatting of management reports.
The terminal shall also provide a backup record of outstation configuration and database.
The terminal shall support the automatic recovery of field controllers in the event of the loss of local
data.
The operation interface shall incorporate sufficient excess capacity to allow an increase of 10% in
the total number of each defined type of inputs/outputs.
The PC provided for the users terminal shall be 100% IBM compatible. The minimum hardware
requirements are as follows:
. The unit supplied shall have a minimum of 32 Mbytes of random access memory and 1.2
Gbytes of fixed disk storage, video cache of not less than 2 Mbytes, 2 serial (RS232) ports and
where applicable network connection cards. The processor used shall be Pentium 200MHZ
minimum.
. The monitor provided shall be an energy star compliant 17 inch model supporting a resolution
of not less than 1024 x 768 pixels, 256 colour and be provided with tilt and swivel facilities.
. A 3 button mouse shall be provided as a pointing device for day to day system interrogation.
A mouse mat shall also be provided.
. The keyboard shall be a 101/102 Enhanced QWERTY keyboard.
. A standard parallel (centronics) interface printer type Epson FX870 shall be provided local to
the users terminal or where an IT network exists, a printer shall be connected by the use of a
netport for utilisation by other PC's on the network. This shall be used for the printing of all

assigned alarms, reports etc., together with any user-requesting printing. Alarm routing may
be defined by priority level and time of day. Print preview functions shall be incorporated.
. A V32bis modem shall be provided to allow remote interrogation of the entire system for
remote support. The PSTN line will be provided by others.
. A separate portable plug-in keyboard and display shall be provided for the accessing of UNCs.
23.14.02.02 Printer(s)
Provide an 80-column hard copy printer which will support full graphic features and is rated at no
less than 100 cps. The printers shall use standard form fold paper with tractor feed and shall be
provided with two (2) boxes of paper. The printer shall be an Epson Model FX-870 or equivalent.
23.14.02.03 Modem
For PC work stations connected to the Controller LAN remotely via telephone lines, provide an
autodial/autoanswer modem with all cables and all communication interfaces required to provide the
specified functions.
23.14.03 LOCAL AREA NETWORKS (LAN)
23.14.03.01 Controller LAN
The BMCS shall provide communication between the DCU's over a Local Area Network (LAN).
The Controller LAN shall be a high speed "bus type" network over which information is transmitted
in a "global" fashion between all the nodes on the network.
The Controller LAN shall have the capacity to contain not less than 64 nodes as a minimum. Each
workstation, DCU, or "gateway" device shall represent a node to the network.
The Controller LAN shall connect the nodes in a fully distributed environment, each DCU operating
autonomously while communicating with all other nodes on the network. Controller LANs requiring
a communication controller (for any reason) will not be acceptable. LAN lengths in excess of
24,000 ft. shall be supported.
A break in the communication path of the Controller LAN shall be announced as an alarm and shall
automatically initiate a Controller LAN reconfiguration such that the resulting sections of the
Controller LAN continue to function as separate LANs. No loss of control shall result from such a
break in the Controller LAN.
23.14.03.02 Commercial LAN
Workstations on the Controller LAN may also reside on a higher tier "commercial" LAN. This
"commercial" LAN shall be based on Ethernet, and comply with IEEE 802.3 standards. Where a
"commercial" LAN is implemented, it shall be possible to connect multiple Controller LANs
together, with global data sharing across this commercial LAN.
Data speed shall not be less than 10 Megabaud.
The "commercial" LAN shall support up to 63 work stations, including as many as 8 dedicated
backup work stations serving to continuously backup the database on the other work stations. A
single workstation shall be able to be backed up by more than one backup workstation.
An operator at a workstation on the "commercial" LAN may connect to any other workstation on the
"commercial" LAN as if the operator were sitting at the other workstation.

Alarms and special event notices shall be routed to different work stations on the "commercial" LAN
based on time of day, and day of the week.
Operator password assignment shall be available on both a system-wide basis and a workstation-by-
workstation basis.
23.14.04 TRANSMISSION SYSTEM
The BMCS shall utilize the above LAN architecture to allow all of the Distributed Control Units to
share data as well as to globalise alarms. The Controller LAN shall be based on a peer-to-peer,
token passing technique with a data speed of not less than 19.2 Kb. Systems which require a
"master" communications controller or network manager for the Controller LAN are not acceptable.
23.14.04.01 Communication Techniques
The Controller LAN shall support node interface devices for the workstations which shall function as
a "gateway" to convert, buffer, and filter the Controller LAN data to the RS-232 data port of the PC
work station. These "gateway" devices shall support local hardwired workstations as well as auto-
answer/auto-dial modems and remote pagers. The "gateways" shall allow PC workstations to
interface to the Controller LAN at any point on the network directly or via telephone lines without
having to be connected to a DCU in order to communicate with the system. Communication over
telephone lines must be supported utilizing either external Bell 103 type modems or proprietary data
modems. Where external commercial modems are used, a Hayes Smartmodem shall be provided as
specified. Telephone lines will be provided by the owner. The system supplier shall include a
Controller LAN resident auto-dial/auto-answer modem and "gateway" to allow remote
communication with the system.
To ensure high throughput, data transmission shall use "packetised" communication techniques, such
that dozens of "messages" are contained in each "packet".
When one PC work station is connected to a remote site via a telephone line, additional PC work
stations at the same “service centre” location shall be able to share the same telephone line.
Allow remote sites to autodial PC workstations based on regularly scheduled intervals or after a
predetermined number of messages have been stored (operator selectable).
23.14.04.02 Network Support
The "turnaround time" for a global point to be received by any node, including operator stations,
shall be less than 3 seconds. The Controller LAN shall provide for automatic reconfiguration if any
station (Distributed Control Unit, PC work station, gateway, etc.) is added or lost. Should the
transmission cable be cut, the two sections shall reconfigure with no disruption to the system's
operation and without any operator intervention.
23.14.04.03 Network Trees & Summaries
Provide automatic, on-line configuration summaries listing each device or node on each tier of a
multi-tiered BMCS system architecture. Separate summaries shall exist for: Controller LAN,
Commercial LAN (if used), and MicroController (MC) network (if used). Each summary shall list
the point address/name, the device type, the device name, the revision level, and the revision date.
23.14.04.04 Fibre Optic Pathways
Fibre Optic media shall be used between buildings for the Controller LANs. Wherever the optical
fibre enters or leaves the building, provide a fibre to hard copper interface device. This Fibre Optic
Interface (FOI) shall be provided in a wall mounted enclosure. The FOI shall regenerate data prior
to transmitting this data to either the fibre or hard copper channels, so as not to result in the
degradation of signal and to minimise the accumulation of errors between multiple FOIs. The FOI
shall include "jabber" protection, such that continuous data from a defective component will not

destroy communications on the LAN. Provide visual indication of receiving and transmitting data
activity on the hardwired drop. Provide visual indication of data transmission on the fibre media,
jabber presence on fibre and hard copper channels, and bad signal quality on the hard copper
channel.
The fibre optic media shall consist of at least two fibres between each FOI, each transmitting in a
different direction, and connected in a ring architecture. Each FOI shall have two fibre transmit
ports and two fibre receive ports. Provide sensing and switching in the FOI so that in the event of a
fault on the fibre media, the LAN communication data will have an alternate path to maintain
communications with all other FOIs. Provide visual indication of data on the alternate fibre media as
well as loss of the primary path and loss of the alternate path.
Each FOI shall report a fault in its connected fibre path to the nearest DCU, for alarm notification
and failure mode activation.
23.14.05 FIELD HARDWARE
Distributed Control Units (DCU): All points in the system shall be monitored and/or controlled
through "intelligent" Distributed Control Units (DCU's). Each DCU in the system shall contain its
own microprocessor and memory with a minimum 300 hours battery backup. Each DCU in the
system shall be a completely independent stand-alone "master" with its own hardware clock calendar
and all firmware and software to maintain complete control on an independent basis. Each DCU
shall include the following capabilities:
. Acquire, process, and transfer information to the PC operator workstations or other DCU's on
the network.
. Accept, process, and execute commands from the other DCU's or other input devices, or
multiple PC work stations.
. Allow access to both data base and control functions by multiple workstations at the same
time.
. Record, evaluate, and report the changes of state and/or value that occur among points
associated with the DCU. If any operator work station or transmission network fails, but the
power to the DCU does not, the DCU shall continue to perform all control functions
associated with the points to which the DCU remains connected.
. Specifically, a DCU shall contain memory and processing capability to perform in a stand-
alone mode:
- Scheduled start/stop
- Adaptive optimised start/stop
- Duty cycling
- Automatic temperature Control
- Demand control via a sliding window, predictive algorithm
- Event initiated control
- Calculated point
- Scanning and alarm processing
- Full Direct Digital Control
- Trend logging
- Global communications
- Maintenance scheduling.
23.14.05.01 DCU Global Communications
Each DCU shall have the ability to transmit any or all I/O points as global points onto the network
for use by other DCU's and to utilize data from other panels as part of its database. To maximize
system throughput, and minimise unnecessary network traffic, analog inputs shall be transmitted

only after an operator specified change of value has occurred since the last broadcast value. This
change of value threshold shall be operator selectable on a per point basis.
23.14.05.02 DCU Field Input/Output Capability
The following point types must be supported by the DCU's.
. Discrete/digital input (contact status).

. Discrete/digital output (maintained, momentary, dual momentary, floating).
. Analog input (0-20 mA, or 0-5 VDC or 0-10VDC with 12-bit A/D conversion resolution
minimum).
. Analog output (0-10 VDC with 8-bit D/A resolution minimum).
. Pulse input capable of accepting 10 pulses/second and accumulating total.
. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) output capable of producing a pulse anywhere between 0-
655 seconds in duration with 0.01 second resolution.
Every discrete/digital output and PWM output shall have an HOA switch with individual feedback as
to the position of the switch, unless the DCU has an integral keypad/display device.
Each DCU shall have the ability to monitor, control or address not less than 300 data points.
23.14.05.03 DCU Point Scanning
It shall be possible to independently set the scan or execution speed for each point in the DCU to an
operator selected time from 1 to 254 seconds.
23.14.05.04 DCU Upload/Download Capability
Each DCU shall be able to download from or upload to any PC operator’s workstation. All point
data shall be modifiable from any authorized PC operators workstation and downloaded to the DCU
over the Controller LAN. It shall not be necessary to enter parameters locally at the DCU for control
programs to take effect. This upload/download shall be readily performed on a regular basis without
interrupting the control functions in the DCU. All upload/downloads shall be performed without the
operator workstation being taken "off-line", and shall be completed in no more than 15 seconds.
23.14.05.05 DCU Diagnostics
Provide diagnostics which support the following dynamic (one second refresh) parameters:
. Processor loading
. LAN Loading
. Memory data
23.14.05.06 DCU Test Mode Operation
Each DCU shall have the ability to place input/output points in a test mode. The test mode shall
allow control algorithms to be tested and developed on line without disrupting the field hardware and
controlled environment. The treatment of all I/O points in the test mode shall be as follows:
Scanning and calculation of all input points in test mode shall be inhibited. Manual control of input
points in test mode will allow setting the analog or digital input point to an operator determined test
value, which can be issued from any fixed or portable operator console.
It shall be possible to control all output points, but only the data base state/value shall be changed -
the external field hardware is left unchanged. Failure to provide test mode capability will preclude
acceptance.
23.14.05.07 DCU Local Operator Console

Furnish at each DCU location provisions for connection of a local operator's console. If the console
is not of the portable type, a permanent door mount type with display shall be provided at each DCU.
The console shall be capable of full global communications with all DCU's on the Controller LAN
when connected to any DCU on the Controller LAN. Systems not offering this global
communication capability shall be unacceptable under this specification. It shall be possible to
perform as a minimum the following functions through the local operator console:
. Set/display date.
. Set/display time.
. Display the status or value of all points connected to the DCU or any other DCU on the
Controller LAN.
. Control the outputs connected to the DCU or any other DCU on the Controller LAN.
. Enable/disable any or all automatic control outputs.
. Perform DCU diagnostic testing.
. Place any or all points in "Test" mode.
. Display DCU CPU "percentage processing time" so that system and DCU processor loading
may be determined. Also, display the amount of DCU programming memory available and
the amount currently used.
Where a portable, laptop, or notebook PC is provided as the local operator console, the operator
interface shall be identical to the primary PC work station, and require no additional training to
operate.
23.14.05.08 MicroController Interface
Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) shall be connected to the Controller LAN via a Micro
Controller Interface (MCI). The MCI shall be a DCU without any directly connected points. ASCs
shall be connected to the MCI via a high speed, RS-485 sub-network. For system reliability,
distribution of risk, and high throughput, not more than 64 ASCs shall be connected to any single
MCI, and this MCI shall not share processors or Controller LAN interfaces with a DCU that is
hardwired to primary equipment.
The MCI shall provide common, and memory intensive functions for locally connected ASCs,
including: time scheduling, custom or global calculations, and historical data collection. The
operator interface for all MCI database entry and application programs shall be fully integrated and
consistent with other DCUs.
The MCI shall support sub-networks consisting of counter-scanning loops for increased system
availability. Upon a single break (i.e., severed wire) the MCI shall scan the loop in both the primary
and secondary directions and maintain communications with all ASCs - not just those located
between the MCI and the fault.
23.14.05.09 Application Specific Controllers
Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) shall be utilized for zone or terminal equipment only.
Applications include:
. Fan coils, unit ventilators, small packaged AHUs, split system AHUs, rooftop AHUs
. Heat pumps
. VAV boxes
Application Specific Controllers shall function standalone for the local loop functions of the terminal
unit. Complete PID algorithms or fuzzy logic shall reside and execute at the ASC level.
23.14.05.10 Micro Controller Field Input/Output Capability
The following point types must be supported by the ASCs:
. Discrete/digital input (contact status).

. Discrete/digital output (maintained, floating).

. Analog input (temperature sensors with 8-bit A/D conversion resolution minimum).
. Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) output capable of producing a pulse anywhere between 0-
655 seconds in duration with 0.01 second resolution.
No Potentiometers, batteries, filters, or other maintenance items shall be present on the ASC. The
database entry and personality assignment of the ASC shall be fully integrated and consistent with all
other points in the system, whether resident in a DCU or an ASC. All programs shall be contained
on the ASC in firmware, and all databases shall be contained on the ASC in non-volatile NOVRAM.
All input and output points in the ASC shall be available for display, command, and on-line editing
at the primary PC work stations. Points unused by the local terminal unit application, may function
as a system point.
Triple set points shall reside in each ASC for both heating and cooling: Occupied, Unoccupied, and
Economy. Occupied and Unoccupied shall follow the time schedule, or other event initiator in the
MCI. Economy set points shall be activated to widen the Occupied deadband during periods of high
electrical demand, in lieu of duty cycling or load shedding the terminal equipment.
To ensure "tight" integration between all system hardware and software, as well as long term
component availability, the MCI, ASC, and ASC sensors shall be originally manufactured by the
same manufacturer who supplies the DCUs, Controller LAN, and workstation application software.
Private labelling of these components does not fulfill this requirement.
23.14.05.11 Distributed Lighting Control Panel
The Distributed Lighting Control Panel(s) (DLCUs) shall reside on the Controller LAN. Each
DLCU shall support up to 64 split coil lighting contactors, rated 277 Vac, 20 amp each. Software
shall allow up to 32 groups, or zones of lighting circuits for each DLCU. Each circuit shall be
operator assignable to any or all of the 32 groups. Circuits assigned to lighting groups shall not be
limited to circuits in the DLCU, but may include any circuits on the Controller LAN.
Provide a "wink" feature to any or all of the circuits (operator selectable), to warn occupants of
impending unoccupied (lights off) conditions.
Provide local switches for "all on" and "all off". Provide a minimum of six points which may be
wired for local override switches, people sensors, or photocells.
23.14.05.12 ViewCon
Where shown on the plans and at all remote sites, provide a wall mounted keypad display device
with the ability to view and control points. The ViewCon shall contain a liquid crystal display with a
minimum of 4 lines of 40 characters and a membrane keypad consisting of no less than eight “soft”
keys whose functions are defined by the display. This display shall be oriented to a casual user (i.e.
janitor, receptionist), who does not require the sophistication of a PC workstation, not the complexity
of a programmer’s or technician’s tool.
From the ViewCon an operator with an authorized password (user defined, 1000 available), shall be
able to:
. Obtain point status

. Command a point to change state
. Command a point into “test“ or “manual”
. View and acknowledge alarms
. Change set points
The ViewCon shall support standard (pre-defined) and custom (user-defined) pages, where a page is
a list of points in a Controller LAN controller. A scrolling feature shall be available to view a long
list of points. Custom pages shall be developed from a local or remote PC workstation using
standard editors. Provide for user-defined names for custom pages and assignment of any or all
points in a Controller LAN controller (i.e., DCU, MCI) to a custom page. The ViewCon shall
support a minimum of 50 custom pages. Any controller on the Controller LAN shall have its points

available for inclusion in a ViewCon’s custom page. The names of points as resident in the
controller’s database (i.e., up to 16 characters) shall be displayed in point summaries. As a minimum
provide the following pages on the ViewCon:
. All space temperatures

. All points in each Controller LAN controller
. All points in alarm in each Controller LAN controller
When not in use, the ViewCon shall display the time and date.
The ViewCon may be integral to a controller. When integral to a controller the following password
protected edit functions shall also be available to points in that controller only:
. Override time schedules

. Edit time schedules
. Establish Holidays and other “special days”
. Set alarm limits
23.14.05.13 Temperature Sensors
Provide thermistor or thin film silicon sensors for all temperature applications, except differential
chilled water for BTU calculation, where precision matched Platinum RTDs shall be used. Solid
state sensors shall be linear, drift free, and require only a one time calibration. Thermistors, or
similar non-linear temperature devices shall be linearized by a look-up table in the connected
controller. Resolution shall be better than .5 degrees F for zone or terminal equipment applications,
and better than .2 degrees F for DCU applications.
23.14.05.14 Intelligent Sensors
Where shown on the plans, provide “intelligent” space sensors for Application Specific Controllers
which have the following features:
. 3 digit (plus decimal) alphanumeric display

. A means to locally controller analog or digital points in the connected controller
. Local override and setpoint adjustment (within software limits)
. Occupancy status LED and On/Off push-button
. A “call” push-button that can be linked to an Event Initiated Program anywhere in the system
. Display of all local input and output points in the service mode for ASCs
. Display of up to 4 user defined “global” or system points (e.g., outside air temperature,
outside air RH, fan status)
. Password protection of access to service mode, with a selection of up to 1000 passwords for
ASC.
Space sensors shall have an integral port for connection of a portable “intelligent” sensor to
communicate with its ASC. This port and portable “intelligent” sensor may be used for initiating the
"test mode" locally to verify all ASC control sequences, and perform test and balancing functions.
To eliminate the downtime associated with rechargeable batteries, the portable “intelligent” sensor
shall receive its power from the sensor port.
23.14.06 BMCS SOFTWARE
23.14.06.01 General
This Trade shall provide all software required for efficient operation of all the automatic system
functions required by this specification. Software shall be modular in design for flexibility in
expansion or revision of the system. It is the intent of this specification to require provisions of a
system which can be fully utilized by individuals with no, or limited, previous exposure to PC's and
programming techniques and languages. If the system to be provided requires the use of any
modified BASIC, "C", PASCAL, or DRUM Language program, or writing "line" programming

statements to modify operation or strategy in the system, the vendor shall provide unlimited, no
charge, software modification and support for a period of five (5) years after the completion of the
project in addition to the warranty period specified elsewhere. Systems which are factory
programmed are unacceptable.
The software shall include a General Purpose Operating system, as well as Building Management
System Application software. All available vendor workstation application software shall be
provided with the system, and shall reside in each and every PC. "Unbundled" software packages
where the vendor can charge the user extra fees, or require dedicated workstations, or require system
rebooting for access, are unacceptable.
The software in the system shall consist of both "firmware" resident in the DCU's and "software"
resident in the operator workstations. The architecture of the system, and the application
software/firmware shall be distributed with no single system component responsible for a control
function for the entire Controller LAN. Each DCU shall contain the necessary firmware and I/O
capability to function independently in case of a network failure. No active energy management or
environmental control sequences shall be resident in the PC workstations. All PC workstations shall
be removable from the system without loss of control function - only alarm monitoring, long-term
history collection, and operator monitor/command/edit functions would be lost.
The primary operator interface to the system shall be through a graphical, "object oriented",
interactive presentation using a mouse and cursor for object selection and commands.
The system shall support an operator definable “default” system page. The default system page shall
be displayed upon system startup, operator activity time-outs, and when the system is not in use. This
default system page may be any one of the standard dynamic graphic pages, or may be a custom
display developed for this purpose. The operator shall be able to display their corporate logo,
emergency information, an index of all graphic pages, etc. as the default system page.
The cursor shall be a "floating arrow".
The system shall support "pop-up" windows for point commands. On selecting an object with the
cursor, a window shall open up to present the operator with choices corresponding to the operator's
password authorizations. These point commands shall include state changes, manual override of
application software, test mode activation and test value entry. This window shall include, for
reference, the point's descriptor (name), the point's hardware address, and alarm status.
The system shall support "pop-up" windows for point editing. On selecting an object with the
cursor, a window shall open up to present the operator with a list of active point database editors, if
permitted by the operators password level. Selecting one of these editors shall allow the operator to
modify the basic parameters associated with a point, as well as access any programs assigned to the
point (such as time schedules, calculations, events, etc.).
The system shall be based on interactive prompts and choices, using "dialog boxes" as opposed to
memorization of commands, "syntax", exact spellings, etc. This interactive prompt and choices
approach shall be used in monitoring, issuing commands, and editing. Command choices shall be as
simple as "clicking" the cursor over the correct word choice prompts (i.e., ON OFF), without typing
in the letters. Editing mode choices shall prompt with ranges or options (i.e., 16 CHARACTERS for
point name, or DIRECT/REVERSE for action).
23.14.06.02 Dynamic Graphic Flow Chart Programming
The operator shall have the ability to construct "dynamic" graphic flow charts of system control
sequences, while the system is on-line. This flow chart utility shall be usable both for on-line control
logic development (i.e., programming), and for live displays of the interactive process variables
occurring throughout the sequences of operations. Flow chart elements shall consist of "Icons"
selected from a "toolkit". Discrete Icons shall exist for:
. Each point type (AI, DO, etc.)

. Each DDC Module or Block

. Analog output PID

. Floating output PID
. Two position output (thermostatic control)
. Reset (with secondary input bias)
. High/Low selector (4 input, dual output)
. Relay
. Relay, Delay before break
. Relay, Delay before make
. Relay, Interval timer
. Each Application program appended to a point
. Calculations
. Event sequences
. Time schedules
. Demand control
. Trend
. Runtime
. Consumption
. Alarm inhibit/enable
. Micro control (AHU, Heat Pump, VAV, PID)
. "Lines" (values passed between DDC modules or points)
. Pages.
The cursor and mouse shall be used to place the Icons on the graphic, and to connect the Icons
(where meaningful) with "lines". "Lines" shall display the current state or value of data passing
between Icons, or Modules.
Text may be inserted into the graphic to describe the sequence of operation in sentence format. Once
completed the graphics shall be able to be printed out for permanent records.
During and/or after completing construction of the dynamic graphic flow chart, the cursor may be
placed on the Icon, and by "clicking" the mouse, the Icon may be exploded into the associated
database editor for adding, deleting, or modifying the point, module, or application program.
Similarly, the point may have its "pop-up" window called up to issue point commands, or overrides.
Systems requiring graphic programming languages which are off-line, or require time delays for
compiling, or which are not integrated into the primary operator work station are not acceptable.
23.14.06.03 Zoom
It shall be possible for an operator to locate any system point to monitor status, issue commands, or
edit associated database without knowledge of the point's name, address, or associated controller,
and without having to refer to a "tree" directory. The operator shall be able to zoom in on a building
in a campus graphic, zoom in on a floor in a building graphic, zoom in on a system in a floor plan
graphic, etc.
The system software shall be compiled for faster execution speeds and shall offer all of the following
features and capabilities:
23.14.06.04 Input/Output Capabilities
From any local PC workstation or any remotely connected PC work station, the system operator shall
have the capabilities through the keyboard/mouse to:
. Request dynamic displays of current values or status using a tabular or graphic format. A
global database sort utility shall allow an expanded tabular display of only the points on the
current graphic display. This expanded tabular display shall list point name, hardware address,
dynamic state or value, alarm status, override status, and test mode status.
. Command selected equipment to a specified state.
. Initiate logs and reports

. Change analog limits
. Add, delete, or change points within each DCU or application routine.
. Change point I/O descriptors, status, and alarm descriptors and engineering unit descriptors
while the system is on-line.
. Add new DCUs and MCs to the system while the system is on-line.
. Modify and set up maintenance scheduling parameters.
. Develop, modify, delete or display full range of colorgraphic displays providing dynamic,
animated displays. All development, editing and display work shall be performed with the
system fully on line and in full communications with the Controller LAN.
. Select discrete or analog sample data from the field to be automatically archived in the
assigned workstation.
A comprehensive report writer capability shall be provided in each workstation to sort and extract
data from the archived files and to generate finished custom reports. Reports shall be capable of
manual initiation and/or printout as well as automatic printout. The system will have the capability
to print reports on a daily, weekly, monthly, yearly or scheduled basis. The system will have the
capability to print reports as a result of an “event”. This report writer shall provide the capability for
statistical data manipulation and extraction. As a minimum the custom report writer must provide
the capability to generate four types of reports: 1) Statistical detail reports, 2) Summary reports, 3)
Trend graphic plots for up to four variables, 4) x-y graphic plots.
This report function shall be "on-line" for both development and printout, and shall not require
export to a third party spreadsheet program for execution.
In addition to this "on-line" function, the historical database shall be capable of being converted to
Data Interchange Format (DIF) for use in third party spreadsheet programs such as Lotus 1-2-3, for
off-line manipulation. Transmission to DIF files shall be manual, event driven, or automatic based
on operator selectable parameters including: time of day, frequency (daily, weekly, monthly, yearly),
scheduled days (32 days minimum). File transfer shall support "appending" new data to the existing
file data.
Support two printer operations. The alarm printer will print all alarm annunciation and return to
normal, operator acknowledgments, action messages, system alarms, operator sign-on and sign-off.
All operator control activities shall include the operator’s initials in the printed and disk record.
The data printer will be reserved for printing reports, page prints, and database prints. Both printer
functions shall be available from any PC workstation.
The operator will have the option of selecting daily, weekly or monthly as a scheduled frequency to
synchronize time and date in Distributed Control Units from the PC workstation. This function will
be performed for dial up as well as direct connected locations. This program shall accommodate
automatic daylight savings time adjustments.
The operator may print a selected Distributed Control Unit database whenever desired. The operator
shall be able to select any or all control parameters as needed. A "bindable" printout of the database
of each DCU (including MCs), with a floppy disk backup shall be submitted with "as-builds" as part
of the final acceptance procedure.
The CRT shall have a feature to indicate audibly and visually, Off-Normal conditions and messages
pending, whether in BMCS operating mode or third party software mode.
The operator may request a summary of all points on the Controller LAN currently in the "test"
mode or in an off-normal condition.

23.14.06.05 Operator Access
Operator access to the BMCS shall be via software password at every PC workstation and at each
DCU. Over 1000 passwords/operators shall be supported. The owner will not be constrained to
fixed password levels, but may enable any or all the following functions for any operator:
23.14.06.06 Command Functions
. View graphic pages

. Test-on/Test-off
. Point monitor
. Alarm acknowledgment
. Point control
. Manual override
. View summaries
. Exit from BMCS to DOS
23.14.06.07 Database Functions
. Passwords
. Graphic pages
. Report generator
. Trend sampling
. Message routing
. Off-line database editing
. DCU database save & restore
. On-Line database editing
. Holiday schedules
. DDC control modules
. Time schedules
. Event sequences
. Calculations
. Demand control parameters
. Micro controller parameters
. Runtime parameters
23.14.06.08 Database Creation and Support
The intent of this specification is to provide an BMCS system which will allow the owner to
independently perform his own modifications to the system from any operator work station. All
changes shall be done utilising standard procedures and must be capable of being done while the
system is on-line and operational. The DCU on the Controller LAN shall automatically check a PC
workstation's data base files upon connection to verify a current data base match. A utility shall
inform the operator if the DCU's database files do not match the backup files stored on the PC
workstation, along with the date of last DCU modification and date of last backup. The owner must
have as a minimum, the on line capability to:
. Add and delete points.
. Modify any point parameter.
. Determine which PC work station(s) points will be directed to, on a point by point basis.
. Change, add, or delete English language descriptors (i.e., name). System I/O points may be
identified either by name or by it's logical address. Up to 16 characters shall be available for
the English language descriptor, which shall be used in all control sequences. Use of a second
abbreviated point "name" for control sequences is unacceptable complexity.
. Add, modify, or delete alarm limits.

. Add, modify, or delete points in start/stop programs, trend logs, etc.
. Create custom relationship between points. A general purpose user utility shall be provided,
such that the user can implement software interlocks, calculations, etc.
. Assign application programs to points (as opposed to assigning points to programs).
. Obtain an "audit trail" of which application programs are controlling an individual point, on a
point by point basis.
. Create and/or modify DDC loops and parameters.
. Create and/or modify override parameters.
. Add, modify, and delete any applications program.
. Add, delete, develop and/or modify custom dynamic colour graphic displays utilizing either
custom symbols or system supported library of symbols. Graphics shall support at least
sixteen (16) colours and not less than sixty (60) outputs of real time, live dynamic data per
graphic. The system shall allow this dynamic graphic data to be displayed as an animated
symbol (i.e., when a pump starts the pipe fills up with water), an ASCII set (i.e., on-off), a
decimal (i.e., 96.3F), or as an analog bar graph. Each operator workstation shall support not
less than 1,000 separate graphic pages. This Trade shall include fifteen (15) developed
graphics as approved by the owner's representative for this project. The following graphic
pages shall be provided as a minimum:
. Index page of all graphics, with direct selection
. Floor plan of each floor, with zone temperatures
. Schematic of each unique system, with values and status
. Select a graphic screen refresh rate between 1 second refresh and 60 second refresh rate.
23.14.06.09 Operator Workstation
Any operator workstation shall:
. Accept data from the Controller LAN on an as needed basis without having to scan the entire
network of DCUs or MCs for updated point data.
. Interrogate the Controller LAN for updated point data when requested by the system operator.
. Allow operator command of equipment connected to DCUs and MCs.
. Allow operator to place specific DCUs and MCs in or out of service.
. Allow parameter editing of DCUs, MCs, and "gateway" nodes (limited only by an individual
operator's access assignments).
. Store duplicate data base on file for every DCU and MC and allow this database to be
downloaded to the remote panel while the system is on line.
. Control or modify specific programs on a per DCU, or MC basis.
. Develop, store and modify dynamic colour graphics utilizing system supplied mouse and
mouse supported software. It shall be possible for both mouse supported workstations and
non-mouse supported workstations to coexist on the same Controller LAN.

. Provide data archiving of assigned points throughout the system and to support overlaid
graphing of this data utilizing up to four (4) variables.
. To maintain system integrity, the operator shall have available an automatic DCU save utility.
The database of the DCUs shall be automatically uploaded to a workstation at 02:00 AM, for
backup purposes. This utility will function for both direct connect and dial-up work stations.
. The BMCS shall support not less than 15 operator workstations, each with simultaneous
access to the Local Area Network. Regardless of how the operator workstations are connected
to the Controller LAN (i.e., hardwired or via modem), the network shall support all specified
functions.
23.14.06.10 Alarm Processing
The BMCS shall have the following alarm processing features, all of which shall be owner definable
through the input keyboard:
. Each off normal condition shall cause an alarm and an appropriate message, including the
time of the alarm, system and point descriptor, alarm condition. The operator shall have the
capability to select, at any time, which state/value shall be considered alarms and which
alarms shall cause automatic dial-out to occur.
. Each critical alarm or change-of-state message shall be displayed. All Controller LAN
network alarm messages shall be stored on disk and may be reviewed on the CRT and/or
printed on operator selected printers at any time. It shall be possible to sort this alarm/change-
of-state database by date, time and/or item fields.
. An Alarm Summary shall show all new alarms and indicate which is the "best" graphic page
to select to act upon the alarm condition. Each alarm shall have its “priority” listed and all
alarms shall be displayed with highest priority first, then by reverse chronological order within
a priority.
. Provide an automatic page selection option for alarms. This feature (operator activated)
automatically selects and displays designated “best” graphic page for each alarm, even when
the operator is signed off. In the event of multiple alarms, the page associated with the most
recent highest priority alarm is displayed.
. Automatic user defined time delay of alarms during equipment start-up or shutdown shall be
provided to prevent nuisance and false alarms.
. Unique alarm delays on analog and discrete input points to prevent "flutter" alarms.
. The operator shall have the capability to route specific alarms to specific workstations, and/or
to specific pagers.
. Unacknowledged alarms will continue to blink even if they have "returned to normal". Only
operator acknowledgment can remove the blinking alarm indication. Red will signify points
in alarm while green will signify points in normal condition.
Each operator work station will have the ability to notify an operator of an alarm condition in one or
more points or controllers anywhere in the system. Alarm notification shall consist of:
. Automatic print of the alarm condition as described above.
. Display of an ICON indicating an alarm condition, including while in a third party program.
. Operator selectable audible alarm indication. The audible alarm may sound once, constant or
not at all, at owners option.

. Relay operation at the PC workstation, used to activate notification devices where the operator
will be too far from the PC to see visual indication, or the environment is too noisy to hear the
PC's audible. Provide a strobe light for alarm indication for all PC workstations located in
central plant areas.
23.14.06.11 Event Processing
The BMCS software shall have the ability to automatically initiate commands, user-defined
messages, take specific control actions or change control strategy and application programs as a
result of an event condition.
An event condition may be an analog high or low value crossing an operator defined limit, a change-
of-state, a specified state, or alarm occurrence, a return to normal or logical combinations of the
above. Events shall not be limited to alarm occurrences only but shall also include time, dates, as
specified system results. All event assignments or modifications shall be owner defined through the
input keyboard.
23.14.06.12 Automatic Restart
The DCU shall include a software program to automatically restart field equipment on a restoration
of power following a DCU power failure.
An owner defined time delay between individual equipment restart shall be provided. In addition,
the software program shall allow equipment to be energized or de-energized based upon the time of
day start/stop program in effect at the time of power restoration at the DCU.
23.14.06.13 Messages
The system shall be capable of automatically displaying or printing a user-defined message

subsequent to the occurrence of selected events. Events shall not be limited to alarm occurrences. It
shall be possible for the owner to construct independent messages for each DCU, each with as many
as 60 characters. The operator shall be able to:
. Compose, change, or delete any message

. Display or log any message at any time
. Assign any message to any event
23.14.06.14 Free Form Historical Reports
An operator shall be able to manually request reports from a console keyboard. All reports shall
have time and date and shall not be limited to "canned" or "standard" format. Data shall be gathered
from the field LAN's automatically and archived on owner selected workstations. The systems shall
include a report writer function which supports as a minimum the following functions:
. Long-term data archiving to hard disk
. Automatic directives to download to transportable media such as floppy diskettes or tapes for
storage
. Data selection methods to include data base searches, sorts, and manipulation
. Data extraction shall support mathematical manipulation
. Data reports shall allow development of XY curve plotting, tabular reports (both statistical
and summary), and multi-point timed based plots with not less than four (4) variables
displayed.
. Generating reports either normally at operator direction, or automatically under PC directions.

Both event driven and scheduled automatic reports shall be supported.

23.14.06.15 Prepared Historical Report
Provide an on-line, historical, database sort report utility, with the following features:
. Prompts to select data base sort by time, by date, by point (or range of points) with system
supplied default values of 24 hours, today, all Controller LAN points, respectively.
. Prompts for activating "conditional" sorts, including: changes-of-state, alarms, returns to

normal, operator sign on/off, operator acknowledgments, command errors, program control of
a point, test on/off, manual on/off, program control (ATC, Demand, Event) override, power
restore, LAN reconfiguration, controller off line, time/date modifications, and archive disk
memory 90% full, 95% full, and full.
. Single keystroke retrieval resulting in a report listing the most recent condition first, along
with the time, date, address, name, condition type, and value.
23.14.06.16 Parameter Save/Restore
The most current operating system including the most current parameter changes and modifications
will be stored on disk or diskette.
23.14.06.17 Data Collection
The operator workstation shall have the ability to automatically collect and store in disk files the
following information:
. Daily KWH consumption, peak demand, and time of peak demand for up to 32 KWH meters
over a 2-year period.
. Daily consumption for up to 30 meters over a 2-year period.
. Daily billable exclusive and shared override KWH consumption and billable override time as
well as non-billable exclusive and shared override KWH and non-billable override time for up
to 1024 zones over a 10-year period.
. Provide archiving of stored data for use with system supplied custom reports, (i.e., it shall be
possible to request the status of a temperature between 10/1/95 and 10/3/95 on an hourly
basis).
Archiving to disk shall automatically occur as long as the PC work station is ON and physically
capable of communicating with the Controller LAN(s), regardless of what programs are currently
being executed at the time data is needed to be stored to disk (i.e., an operator can be developing a
financial spread sheet in LOTUS (when the BMCS stores field trending information to disk--the
current LOTUS (program shall not be interrupted or halted) for archiving.
23.14.06.18 Graphic Display
On-Line graphic development shall be supported on all work stations connected to the LAN either as
"hard-wired" direct connect or via remote dial-in. The system shall support any mix of mouse
supported workstations or non-mouse workstations.
The systems graphic software shall provide the following minimum features:
. "Page Linking" such that it is possible to "zoom" into a specific AHU or any other page
through a sequence of graphics without using anything but the system mouse.
. Generate, store, and retrieve library symbols for use in generating graphic pages.
. Single or double height characters.

. Sixty (60) dynamic points of data per graphic page.
. Pixel level resolution. Graphics will be displayed on VGA monitors with a 640 X 480
resolution, minimum. Colour selections will be made from a colour bar consisting of 16
colours, with adjacent text description.
. Animated objects for discrete points (i.e., when a pump starts, the pipe fills with water or
when a damper shuts it goes closed on the screen).
. Analog bar graphs for analog points. The operator shall be able to locate up to 60 bar graphs
per graphic page, with options as to bar graph colour, dimensions, horizontal/vertical
orientation, and limit values.
. The real time value of each input or output from the DCU's DDC control block modules shall
be displayable on the colour graphic.
. An on-line "Draw" utility with a "toolkit" containing the following:
- Library Symbols - Fill

- Page Links - Line
- Undo - Point Values
- Box - Move
- Line Values - Circle
- Delete - Arc
. Provide for import of .PCX file format graphics developed in third party programs such as
Paintbrush. Such imported graphics shall be used as a "backdrop", so that all other dynamic
and animated system features may be superimposed on this graphic. Similarly, it shall be
possible to import CAD type drawings, by first converting the CAD drawing from .DXF
format to .PCX format.
23.14.06.19 Maintenance Management
Each DCU, acting in conjunction with the operator workstation's graphic displays, shall support a
maintenance management program on all specified points. This program as a minimum shall
provide the following:
. Discrete run time monitoring on per point basis. Run time shall be able to be accumulated on
two basis - since the beginning of time, and since last reset.
. Maintenance scheduling targets on specific equipment with auto annunciation, auto

scheduling and auto shutdown.
. Equipment safety targets which generate an alarm or user defined message if the equipment
has not been serviced and cleared in time. The program shall also allow automatic shut down
of the equipment if the safety limit is exceeded.
. CRT display of maintenance material needed including estimated labour.
. Single command reset on a per point basis.
23.14.06.20 Context Sensitive Help Screens
Provide a dedicated function key which will call up a context sensitive help screen associated with
the current keyboard/mouse input.
23.14.06.21 Application Sensitive Help Screens
Provide the capability to develop help screens tailored to job specific applications. These screens
shall be displayed by selecting an Icon from an associated graphic display.

23.14.06.22 Dedicated Function Keys
The system shall include the following dedicated function keys as a minimum:
. Function Key Help - definition of all function keys.
. System Help - context sensitive Help.
. Silence - silences new audible alarms
. Recall - re-enters deleted data during editing
. Alarm Summary - displays alarm summary screen to review or acknowledge alarms.
. Messages Summary - displays events screen to review or acknowledge system messages.
. Page Acknowledge - allows acknowledgment of all alarms that appear on a System Page,
DCU Summary, Page Summary, or Alarm Summary
23.14.07 DCU/MCI APPLICATION ROUTINES
23.14.07.01 General
A DCU shall include various software packages, each of which performs a specialized application
routine. All of the application routines listed shall be inter-active, compatible with and capable of
global operation as necessary. The use of any application routine shall not cause any other software
to malfunction.
23.14.07.02 Demand Monitoring and Load Shedding
Each DCU supports a program designed to control the electrical "demand" due to peaks in electrical
energy consumption.
The Demand program shall operate in a global fashion and shall be able to control outputs in any
DCU or ASC to maintain the Demand setpoint, regardless of which panel the meter is connected to.
Systems using a demand program that does not operate in a global fashion are unacceptable under
this specification. Systems containing multiple Controller LANs shall have this global function
occur between LANs as well.
The input to this program shall be a pulse count from the incoming power meter connected directly
to a pulse accumulator in a DCU.
Forecast demand (KW) shall be predicted by the sliding window method.
The system shall provide a minimum of 3 demand targets per demand meter. The system shall
automatically change targets based upon (1) time, (2) status of pre-selected points, or (3)
temperature.
Each load shall not only be assigned a load shed priority, but will be assigned a minimum "ON" time
and a maximum "OFF" time. All loads in any one priority level will be shed before loads of the next
priority level will be shed. Loads will be shed and restored on a "round-robin" basis. All parameters
shall be operator selectable and displayable via the CRT. The system shall provide for a minimum
of seven priority levels.
Equipment connected to Application Specific Controllers (ASCs) will have their occupied deadbands
widened in lieu of shedding the loads.

Demand forecasting shall be by the "sliding window" technique. "Ideal rate", "instantaneous" or
other non-forecasting demand programs using analog values for KW are not acceptable under this
specification.
To avoid overcorrecting (oscillation) by shedding and restoring loads for minor perturbations, a
control band (upper and lower limit) shall be included so that the load will be shed when the upper
limit is exceeded, and restored when the lower limit is reached.
A printed message shall be generated when the demand target upper limit is exceeded and all priority
loads have been shed. The demand exceeded alarm will also show on the CRT.
Maximum demand and its time of occurrence, and energy consumption for the day shall be stored at
midnight. Monthly consumption shall be stored and reset on a user selected day.
23.14.07.03 Automatic Time Scheduling (ATS)
Each DCU/MCI shall provide self-contained ATS programs for automatic start/stop/scheduling of
building loads. Each ATS program shall support up to seven (7) normal day schedules, seven (7)
"special day" schedules and two (2) temporary day schedules. The special days schedule shall
support up to 30 unique date/duration combinations. Each load shall support an individual time
program, as a minimum.
Each load shall be able to be assigned at least 16 control actions per day with 1 minute resolution.
Operator selectable time schedule operation choices shall include the following: Start, Optimised
Start, Stop, Optimised Stop, Cycle, Optimised Cycle.
A minimum of 30 holiday periods up to 99 days in length may be specified for the year.
It shall be possible to create "temporary" schedules up to a week in advance that will be in operation
only on the day or days specified.
Support a temporary "special day" date and duration to be broadcast to selected or all sites to account
for unusual situations Such as temporary operating hours or "snow days".
In addition to individual load scheduling, provide for group scheduling by designating equipment to
be linked to a "master" time schedule, for quick schedule changes of large groups of equipment
which follow a common schedule. The master schedule shall provide a choice of fixed start and stop
times by day, or plus and minus adjustments to the existing schedule, in minutes. Master schedules
shall provide a choice of immediate activation or activation at a later date and time.
Support control actions to be performed at any operator selectable time of day as well as at "sunrise"
and "sunset". Sunrise and sunset parameters shall be selectable based on time zone, latitude, and
longitude.
23.14.07.04 "Distributed" Start/Stop Time Optimisation (SSTO)
Each controlled point shall include an adaptive, self learning, software program to perform optimised
start-up and/or shutdown of selected equipment. The SSTO program shall start HVAC equipment at
the latest possible time and still allow the equipment to achieve the desired zone conditions by
occupancy time. The SSTO program shall also shut down HVAC equipment at the earliest possible
time before the end of the occupancy period, and still maintain desired comfort conditions.
The SSTO program shall perform optimised start/stop as a function of outside conditions and
individual inside conditions. The SSTO program shall be adaptive, self-tuning with the capability to
adjust to changing conditions unattended. Systems using global optimisation based on
"representative" inside conditions are not acceptable.
The system operator shall be able to, for each point under control of the SSTO program, establish
and modify the following parameters:

. The occupancy period

. The desired temperature at the beginning of the occupancy period
. The desired temperature at the end of the occupancy period
. The maximum earliest start allowed prior to the scheduled start of the occupancy period. The
actual system calculated time to start shall be displayable as a system value.
The Central Plant shall be started as the result of the first zone being activated by its distributed
SSTO program - not by a separate time based or optimised program.
23.14.07.05 Duty Cycle Control (DCC)
Each DCU shall include a software program to perform Temperature Compensated Duty Cycle
Control. The DCC program shall periodically stop and start loads, based on space temperature, and
according to various On/Off patterns. This temperature compensation consists of modifying the off
portion of the cycle based on operator specified comfort parameters. The total cycle time shall be
maintained by increasing the on portion of the cycle by the same amount that the off portion is
reduced. The result should be a net reduction in both the electrical demand and the energy consumed.
The BMCS operator shall be able to set and modify the following parameters for each individual
load.
. Minimum and maximum Off time

. On/Off time in one minute increments
. Time period from beginning of interval until load can be cycled
. Manually override the DCC program and place a load in an On or Off state
. Cooling Target Temperature (degs.) and Differential
. Heating Target Temperature (degs.) and Differential
. Cycle off adjustment (min./deg.) for both cooling and heating target temperatures.
23.14.07.06 Night Setback/Setup Program
Each DCU and MC shall provide software to automatically reduce the heating space temperature
setpoint or raise the cooling space temperature setpoint during unoccupied hours. The night setback
program shall be operated in conjunction and coordinated with the scheduled start/stop and optimum
start/stop programs.
23.14.07.07 Calculated Points
Each DCU/MCI shall provide the operator a means of defining calculations and totalisation
computed from monitored points (analog/digital points), constants, or other calculated points.
Calculations shall be executed at the uniquely assigned point scan rates.
The operator shall be able to employ any of the following arithmetic, algebraic, Boolean and special
function operations to define the computation:
. add . divide . Minute

. square root . not . Hour
. greater than . not equal . minutes past midnight
. subtract . negate . day of week
. and . month . exclusive or
. less than . greater than or equal to . enthalpy
. multiply . day . dewpoint
. or . year . Relative humidity
. equals . less than or equal to
Numeric values generated from the calculations shall be treated like any other analog value in that
alarm limits may be assigned to them. These values may be used in any DCU/MCI on the controller
LAN for any function that a "hardwired point" might be used (i.e., control sequences, set points,
targets, etc).

23.14.07.08 Event Initiated Programming (EIP)
Each DCU/MCI shall provide event initiated programs. An event may be initiated by any data point.
Triggering an EIP shall cause a series of control actions in a sequence, i.e., if point A reaches a Hi
alarm, start pumps 1 through 12. Up to 25 sequences can be defined. Each sequence may cause up
to 16 control actions. Sequences may be chained together.
The time interval between each control action shall be operator definable from between 0 to 3600
seconds. Each motor may lock out associated analog alarms when the motor is Off by programming
each desired analog point for alarm disable.
The output of a sequence may be an analog value.
The programming shall provide for "skip" logic without requiring any programming code or machine
type language input.
The system shall have the ability to verify completion of one action before proceeding to the next
sequential action. If proper states are not verified the EIP shall be able to skip to an operator
specified next action.
23.14.07.09 Direct Digital Control (DDC) Modules
Each DCU shall provide "Block" or "Modular" programming software so that the operator can easily
develop custom control strategies and sequences of operation, without learning a programming
language.
Control loops and sequences shall be defined using "modules" that are analogous to traditional
pneumatic or electric control devices. Modules may be linked together to form more complex control
strategies. The use of mathematical equations, "BASIC", or proprietary programming languages for
defining a DDC control loop is unacceptable.
The following types of modules shall be supported in firmware for each DCU in the system:
. PID controller with analog output or PWM output

. PID controller with floating (paired) output
. Two-position controller
. Primary and secondary reset schedule selector
. Hi/Low signal selector
. Single pole double throw relay
. Single pole double throw time delay relay with delay before break, delay before make and
interval time capabilities
Should a sensor fail or be taken out of service, the DDC program shall execute a user defined fail-
safe output.
The value or state of each of the lines which interconnect DDC modules shall be displayable on the
CRT graphic pages to allow logic diagrams of the DDC strategies to be shown with actual values.
23.14.07.10 Self Tuning PID Loops
Three methods of tuning PID Loops shall be available: Manual, Automatic, and Adaptive. To assist
the operator in tuning a DCU with Direct Digital Control PID or floating loops, a "tuning" utility
shall be provided that will allow the collection of data and tuning of the process in real time.
The tuning utility shall display the following information on the CRT upon operator request:
. Control loop being tuned

. Input (process) variable
. Output (control) variable
. Setpoint of loop

. Proportional band
. Integral (reset) Interval
. Derivative (rate) Interval
The above information shall be displayed on any PC workstation CRT in a graphical format with
automatic scaling such that the input and output variable are superimposed on a graph of "time" vs.
"variable". This program shall allow the operator to affect the output variable by modifying the
setpoint, gain, etc., and view the results on the display. In addition to viewing the results on the CRT,
it shall be possible to print the module parameters being tuned with the graph while it is being tuned.
Automatic Tuning
Provide DCUs with an on-line utility which may be manually turned on to "disturb" the process.
This utility shall then monitor the results and calculate new parameters for sample interval,
Proportional gain, Integral gain, and Derivative gain. This utility shall be usable during the
commissioning process to establish reasonable values, then turned off.
Adaptive Tuning
Provide DCUs with an on-line utility which may run continuously. Adaptive tuning shall be initiated
automatically whenever an operator defined change in the process (input) variable is detected. This
utility shall monitor the process (control loop) after a natural disturbance, and automatically
recalculate the Proportional gain, Integral gain, and Derivative gain. This utility shall be used to
keep a system tuned, as the equipment ages and occupancy and loads change, after commissioning.
Self Tuning Parameters
Provide the following operator selectable self tuning parameters to support automatic and adaptive
tuning:
. Adaptive control enabling point - the system point whose status determines whether adaptive
control is enabled or disabled.
. Maximum bump - output step change required to produce a change in the input, greater than
the noise level, but not so great as to damage equipment.
. Settling time - the time it takes the PID input (process variable) to settle down after a process
disturbance. For automatic tuning, the time interval between setting the PID output to the
control point and the beginning of the tuning cycle. For adaptive tuning, the minimum time
that will be observed between parameter calculations.
. Maximum overshoot - percent allowed
. Target damping - the desired reduction in the process variable overshoot from the first
overshoot (maximum overshoot) to the second, in percent.
. Noise band - the minimum process variable perturbation that will initiate an adaptive
calculation of the PID parameters, in percent of the input range.
23.14.07.11 Trend Logging
Each DCU/MCI in the system shall contain a trending program that will store samples of all of the
DCU/MCI data points. The trend log file will be updated in memory continuously at discretely
assignable intervals by the trend program. As the DCU/MCI data files begin to fill, the DCU/MCI
shall have the capability to automatically initiate an upload request and shall then store the data on
hard disk for future use. The trending program may also be "time synchronized" to start sampling at
an operator specified time each day and cease sampling at operator specified end times. The
sampling on the trend interval established by the operator shall allow sample resolution of one
minute. Sampling shall allow co-ordination with the "on" state of a specified point, i.e., sample when
"on", cease to sample when "off".

It shall be possible to display the trend samples for each DCU/MCI in the system from the operator's
workstation in a graphic format. The trend graph shall be automatically scaled and shall display at
least 60 samples of data in a plot of time vs. data on the operator workstation. It shall be possible to
print the graph at any time while being displayed on the CRT.
A system-wide twelve point trend log shall be available. This trend log shall support operator
selected sample intervals, print intervals, print start times, and print stop times.
23.14.07.12 Override
It shall be possible to override the normal schedules of the equipment being controlled on the
Controller LAN and, if required, the actual control sequences.
The override shall be initiated by all of the following:
. A touch tone phone through interactive digital voice prompts

. Local console
. Operator PC workstation
The touch-tone telephone interface unit shall be controller LAN resident and support network wide
after hours billing. The touch-tone telephone interface unit shall support up to 50 zones of control,
linking up to 100 discrete system points, and shall have the ability to generate after hour bills based
on both shared and common loads. Additional system access codes shall be provided for these
specialized functions:
. After hours maintenance for non-billable overrides.

. Supervisor for acquiring any point information.
. Manager for acquiring any point information and controlling any point.
For each zone, the following values must be stored on a daily basis:
. Non-billable exclusive KWH override.

. Non-billable shared KWH override.
. Non-billable override time.
. Billable exclusive KWH override.
. Billable shared KWH override.
. Billable override time.
When local LAN access is by way of a touch-tone telephone, the LAN shall provide for digitised
voice communication with the operator to include data exchange like temperatures, zone status,
override condition, programmed times, etc.
23.14.08 PAGER INTERFACE
It shall be possible for specific alarm events to initiate an automatic page via an interface to either a
modem connected to the P.S.T.N. pager network or to a local site paging system.
It shall be possible to set-up shift patterns with groups of pager holders and the hours they are
working and route alarms to persons in the shift pattern.
It shall be possible to send alarms to an individual pager.
It shall be possible to support multiple pager interfaces such as both dial up network and local site
paging.
All alarms shall be configured as part of this Contract.

As a minimum the page message shall contain the time, date, mnemonic and text describing the
alarm condition e.g. “AHU 1 Fail”.
The paging system shall record the last 100 paging events.
The number of pagers provided shall be five (5)
23.14.09 FUNCTIONAL REQUIREMENTS
23.14.09.01 Application Specific Controller Interface
The MCI shall be the ASC Interface platform. All members of the MicroRegulator product line, as
well as the Access Control (Door Processing Units - DPUs) product line for integrated access shall
live on the same sub-network.
The MCI shall support two channels of 32 controllers each. The MCI shall support a one second
scan rate of selected ASC points.
It shall not be necessary to calculate and enter Proportional, Integral, Derivative, or Interval values in
order to engineer, startup or commission the ASCs. The ASCs shall be shipped with default
parameters which can be adjusted if required. Standard default parameters will be different for each
application.
23.14.09.02 Application Specific Controller - Common Requirements
Inputs shall be software definable to accept Thermistor or Discrete Contact Closure. Outputs shall
be TRIAC, and shall support Two Position, Frequency Modulated, Pulse Width Modulated and
Floating.
Connectors for field wiring shall be easily removable without disconnecting the cabling.
LED indication shall be provided for communications status and controller self diagnostics status.
Setpoint bias, local override, and room temperature shall be available via the I/Stat or a plain
Thermistor based sensor, using the same terminals.
The room sensor shall support a HandHeld console. The I/Stat, when used as a HandHeld console,
shall plug into the room sensor.
The ASC shall be UL Listed for UL 916 Energy Management Systems. Any plastics used (i.e.,
cover, etc.) shall be UL Listed for UL 94-V0 (self extinguishing materials).
The ASC shall be field configurable for standalone operation, without power to the unit, using DIP
switches, or similar methods. DIP switch settings shall be capable of being overridden by the I/Stat,
Hand Held console or the PC operator station. The ASC shall operate with the new settings
immediately and not require a power cycle to initiate them. Each ASC shall ship from the factory
pre-programmed with common default values.
Editors, set points, addresses, etc. shall remain in NOVRAM or EEPROM, to ensure standalone
operation. It shall be possible to read and write to this memory, locally and remotely to make
changes to the default parameters. Parameters requiring ongoing changes will reside in RAM, and
default to the NOVRAM or EEPROM values.
The ASC shall contain a seven day software clock which shall be accurate to five (5) minutes per
day. This software clock is intended to be used for initial commissioning prior to connecting to an
MCI, as well as a "fallback" for when communication with the MCI is lost. The hardware clock in
the MCI shall automatically update the software clocks in the ASCs once per day, to ensure best
accuracy during occupancy hours. All "normal" operation shall be from the MCI's more accurate
clock.

Outside air sensor value will be available to all ASCs from a system point external to the ASC.
Where the ASC uses the outside air temperature value (e.g.; economizer) and communication is lost
with the source, the ASC will retain the last communicated value.
The ASCs shall support one step calibration of temperature sensors and velocity transducers.
Eliminate the need for a technician, test & balance trade, or owner to have to refer to look-up tables
or to interpolate "counts" in calibration or recalibration of an input or output.
Staging will be automatic. If one stage is required, analog outputs will vary between 0 and 100% as
the load calculation varies between 0 and 100%. If two stages are required, stage one analog output
will vary between 0 and 100% as the load calculation varies between 0 and 50%, and stage two
analog output will vary between 0 and 100% as the load calculation varies between 50 and 100%.
Digital outputs will also be staged and modulated using time proportioned modulation over a fixed
window (i.e., 5 or 10 minutes). If one stage is required the first stage will be on for 1/4 the time
window for a 25% load calculation, ½ the time window for a 50% load calculation, etc. If two stages
are required, the first stage will be on 100% at 50% load calculation, and the second stage will be on
for ½ its time window at 75% load calculation.
The currently active zone temperature set points (as biased by setpoint adjustment) shall be available
for dynamic displays, and use in other system applications.
The I/Stat shall be capable of displaying the current temperature setpoint in two modes. Dual mode
shall display the cooling setpoint if the ASC is in cooling and the heating setpoint if the controller is
in heating mode. Dual mode shall automatically display the correct setpoint. Adjusting the setpoint
from the I/Stat will only adjust the currently displayed setpoint. Single mode shall display the
temperature setpoint of the total controller. Heating and cooling set points shall be calculated from
this single value. Adjusting the Single Mode setpoint from the I/Stat will automatically adjust both
the heating and cooling set points accordingly.
The controller shall be provided with a verification mode that will demonstrate the complete end to
end thermodynamic performance of the control algorithm as the space temperature is manually
adjusted from below, through and above setpoint. This verification mode shall be capable of being
initiated from the I/Stat. The I/Stat shall also display the results of the verification process. Special
hand held devices or PC programs shall not be needed to perform this control algorithm verification.
Fans, compressors, heat stages, and the like shall have minimum on and maximum off times. It shall
be possible to lockout heating and cooling centrally. Fans shall be interlocked to operate when
stages of heat or cooling are operational.
Resident I/O database shall support minimum trip and close. Default minimum fan cycle times = 30
seconds and minimum compressor cycle time = 4 minutes. These values shall be adjustable.
Provide for points to be predefined based on how they are wired to certain terminals. For
applications which do not fully utilize all points in an application, the unused point may be any
defined for other applications resident in the MCI or other controllers.
23.14.09.03 HandHeld Console
This device shall communicate with the ASC via the room sensor. The HHC shall also connect to
the ASC and the MCI. The I/STAT shall be the HHC.
If batteries are used they shall be easily replaceable in the field, and shall maintain a charge
sufficient to last one full workday in normal use (ie., test and balance) and be able to recharge
overnight.
23.14.09.04 Workstation
Provide easy access to ASC editors.

Support copy of identical ASCs. This will copy all point names and parameters from a
representative ASC to similar ASCs. The ASC may be given a unique tag for all of its points, such
as "Room 35".
Dynamic editor will be in two (or more) pages. The top page will be the common items that the
average operator will require access to, such as setpoint and temperature readout. Page down,
requiring a higher password level provides access to additional information for the programmer type,
such as P,I, & D parameters.
There shall be an editor, should the operator want to delete standard options, such as the third stage
of heat, for applications with only two stages of heat.
23.14.09.05 Room Sensor
There shall be two versions: the I/STAT and the Slide/STAT.
Slide/STAT: This room sensor is to be attractive (white) and highly functional. A Hand Held
Console port shall be out of sight, and not require removal of cover. Provide versions with
thermistor only, thermistor plus push-button, thermistor plus push-button plus setpoint adjustment.
Single gang plate mounting option to be available.
The I/STAT display shall present the midpoint of the heating and cooling set points for normal
operation, and to avoid user confusion. Outside air temperature shall also be displayed, on request.
Setpoint bias and override shall be done by repeatedly pressing increase or decrease push buttons
where each push increments the setpoint display upward or downward by one degree, or one half
hour respectively. This sensor shall also support fan speed control (Variable and HI, LOW,
MEDIUM, OFF). This sensor shall provide sufficient Man Machine Interface to allow Factory setup
and testing of the ASC, as well as Testing & Balancing, without need for a Hand Held Console or a
portable PC.
23.14.10 FIELD DEVICES
23.14.10.01 General
A schedule of field devices shall be submitted, cross referenced to the points schedule showing the
total number and specification of the device to be supplied, which shall comprise the manufacturer,
model, range, accuracy, flow characteristics, working, operating and static pressure ranges, all as
applicable to the transducer or actuator. The BMCS specialist shall be responsible for the correct
output and positioning for sensors. Where sensor positions are indicated on drawings, he shall
advise any corrections to the engineer at an early stage of the project.
23.14.10.02 Temperature Sensors
Temperature sensors shall be platinum wire or thin film resistance temperature detectors (RTDs) or
thermistors. Performance limits shall be as follows:
(a) Accuracy: + 0.3ΕC max. for range up to 40ΕC.

+ 1.0ΕC max. for range up to 150ΕC.
(b) Repeatability: + 0.1ΕC max. for range up to 40ΕC.

(c) Long term drift: + 0.1ΕC max. for range up to 40ΕC.

+ .05ΕC max. for range up to 150ΕC.
(d) Time constant: + 0.1ΕC max. for range up to 40ΕC.


23.14.10.03 Current Transformers
Current transformers shall be used for run status indication signals on all pumps and fans.
Room temperature sensors shall be wall mounted, non-indicating type with a tamper proof cover.
Temperature sensors used for duct temperature sensing or sensing after heating or cooling coils shall
be extended element type with sufficient length of sensing element for winding several times across
the face of the coil or duct. Elements shall be securely mounted free of any thermal contact with
coils.
23.14.10.04 Humidity Sensors
Humidity sensors shall be 4-20 mA transmitters. The sensing element shall be a polymer, thin-film
capacitance type. Performance shall be at least equal to the following:
(a) Measuring range: 0:100% RH
(b) Accuracy at + 20oC including

calibration linearity and + 2% RH (0:90% RH)
repeatability errors. + 3% RH (90:100% RH)
(c) Temperature coefficient: + 0.05% RH/oC max.
(d) Time constant: 60 secs max. in still air.
Room humidity sensors shall be wall mounted, non indicating type with tamper proof cover. Sensors
used for duct humidity sensing or sensing after heating or cooling coils shall be extended probe type.
Return air and outside air humidity sensors shall include a heavy duty sinter filter over the sensing
element.
23.14.10.05 Differential Pressure Sensors (Low Pressure air)
Analogue pressure and differential pressure sensors shall be industrial quality, two wire, 4-20 mA
transmitters, having a mechanical design which provides a completely sealed metal diaphragm
between the sensed and reference volumes. Minimum performance requirements shall be as follows:
(a) Accuracy: + 0.5% (max) of calibrated span
(b) Repeatability: + 0.1% (max) of calibrated span.
(c) Dead band: 0.05% (max) of calibration span.
(d) Time constant: 1.5 seconds (max).
All differential pressure sensors shall have an allowable pressure difference rating exceeding the fan
shut-off head for the system in which they are installed. Similarly, pressure sensors shall have an
adequate safety margin between their allowable rated pressure and the maximum pressure they are
likely to be exposed to in service.
The measuring span of sensors shall be carefully chosen to maximise the accuracy of sensors in
service. A schedule of proposed sensor ranges shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval prior
to ordering sensors.
23.14.10.06 Damper Actuators
Damper actuators shall be of the solid state reversible proportional actuator type and be of sufficient
torque output to operate its damper against the air flow resistance at all points of its travel. Actuator
shall be selected on the basis of a maximum of 75% of manufacturer's rated output torque.

Actuator shall be complete with a weather resistant case when located in outside and relief air paths.
Damper motors shall be rigidly and centrally mounted at the drive side of the damper. Provide
additional bracing where necessary to provide the required rigidity.
Where actuators are driving dampers in smoke spill paths, actuators shall be mounted outside
ductwork and suitable mechanically robust drive linkages shall be provided. As a minimum, all
smoke spill dampers shall have two actuators, one fitted on each side of the damper.
Motor linkages shall be heavy duty type and shall be free from slack and/or spring in the mechanism.
Linkages and dampers shall be adjusted for smooth operation and the linkages shall be pinned to the
damper drive shafts.
All damper actuators shall be provided with a manual/off/auto test switch. The manual position shall
provide the exact opposite position to the "off" position and the test switch shall be located in the
adjacent MCC.
Where dampers must return to open or closed on power loss, e.g. fire mode dampers, they shall be
spring return type.
Damper activators shall be close coupled with an Input Signal of 4-20mA. All damper motors
associated with smoke spill, outside air and return air to comply with current British Standard and
other relevant standards. All activators shall have provision for manual override.
23.14.10.07 Motor Speed Controllers
The BMCS specialist shall be responsible for interfacing the system outputs to the motor speed
controllers, supplying any transducers or interface circuits as required.
23.14.11 COMMISSIONING
The BMCS specialist shall be responsible for the full commissioning of his system and any other
controls equipment supplied by him.
All safety interlocks, overrides and fail-safe conditions are to be operational prior to starting the
plant. Demonstrate as agreed with the engineer prior to starting plant in BMCS auto mode.
Fault conditions for all critical alarms, safety devices and control interlocks shall be simulated and
proved effective as soon as practical once BMCS control mode is selected.
Sensors shall be checked to ascertain accuracy within limits, pressure switches checked for switch
points and hysteresis. Humidity sensors shall be checked for accuracy using a wet/dry bulb
thermometer.
All the necessary test equipment and materials used in commissioning shall be supplied by the
BMCS specialist. All test equipment shall have valid test certificates.
Trend graphs will be provided to demonstrate the stable control of the plant. Simulated inputs will be
employed to check stability over the design environmental range.
The BMCS Trade shall include in their tender an allowance for system tuning via auto-dial or visit to
check correct operation of all plants which may exhibit changes in stability due to settling in or
seasonal conditions.
Commissioning documentation and schedules shall be submitted for approval during the design
phase showing each plant, point, interlock and control algorithms, and the stages of checks and
commissioning required. Each cleared item to have date and engineer reference. Completed copies

shall be available to the engineer prior to acceptance testing. A complete set of the commissioning
documentation is to form part of the system documentation.
Once any item of plant is commissioned and left running to the dictates of the BMCS, documentation
showing the overrides, control and software configuration shall be available on site at all times.
23.14.12 STANDBY FOR OTHER SYSTEMS TESTING
The BMCS specialist shall attend during the site test trials for the following systems and demonstrate
his system functions as specified elsewhere:
Fire Alarm
23.14.13 ACCEPTANCE DEMONSTRATIONS
The BMCS specialist shall give seven days notice to the engineer of his intention to provide the
acceptance demonstrations once the commissioning is complete. The operation of all safety
interlocks shall be tested and ten per cent of all points shall be selected by the engineer and
demonstrated for operation/accuracy. Should more than 1% fail performance test, a further ten per
cent may be selected. If above 1% fail he may at his discretion demand 100% demonstration. The
BMCS specialist shall supply sufficient man-power/test equipment, consumable items and portable
telephones to conduct the demonstration efficiently. Testing shall also incorporate an audit of the
wiring and hardware installation, demonstration of safety interlocks, start of system from power-
down and review of time schedules and alarm levels, grouping and selected control parameters.
23.14.14 SYSTEM HAND-OVER
The BMCS specialist shall ensure the following are completed at hand-over:
. Any snagging to be documented and agreed date determined for clearance.

. All passwords/PIN numbers, levels and operators recorded.
. Disk copies of all system and data files supplied.
. Complete sets of O&M manuals left with system, any agreed amendments/additions required
to be documented and a target date for completion agreed.
. Training of engineers and operators to be checked complete or program for completion
agreed.
23.14.15 DOCUMENTATION
23.14.15.01 Operation and Maintenance Manuals:
Four (4) copies of all final operating and maintenance manuals will be supplied two weeks prior to
Practical Completion in A4 binders. Preliminary copies shall be available for review by the Engineer
three (3) months prior to Practical Completion.
Operating Manuals shall comprise instructions on equipment safety checks, start-up and close-down
procedures, daily operation and full descriptions of operating features. Diagrams shall show the full
diagrammatical (network structures, outstations and peripherals) and physical layout of the system
and components.
Maintenance Manuals shall comprise full descriptive and maintenance details on each and every item
of equipment supplied. Suppliers and spare parts references, contacts, telephone numbers, and
addresses shall be supplied where relevant. Wiring schedules shall show the connection of each item
of equipment to the field equipment. Datasheets and maintenance instructions shall be provided for
each item of equipment. Diagrams showing the configuration of all control and monitoring schemes,
identifying the modules used, their interconnections and setting parameters, copy printouts showing
the individual outstation module configurations and sequences.

All drawings relating to the BMCS will be supplied A3/A4 sizes bound into A4 ring binders. These
shall include system, outstation and user terminal configuration diagrams, listings and flow charts.
23.14.16 SITE/USER TRAINING
The BMCS specialist shall supply the following training for the clients engineering staff.
General engineering staff:(3 number of people).
On-site; specific system structure, outstations locations, control strategy overviews. Operation of
user terminals, adjustments, trend graphs and alarm handling. Other networked components.
23.14.17 MAINTENANCE CONTRACT
The warranty period shall run for twelve months following hand-over, during which time the
following facilities shall be available to the client.
(a) Call-out within 24 hours and same day if before 10.00am

(b) Replacement and labour for defective parts.
(c) Fault diagnosis and rectification.
(d) Three support visits each of one full working day to advise operation, check system tuning
and generally ensure the plant is operating to specification.
(e) On line modem support for the warranty period.
The tenderer shall provide a quotation along with his bid for a full maintenance contract to
commence after warranty providing all the facilities as described above.
This maintenance contract shall be broken down covering the cost associated with comprehensive
maintenance for the following three years further to the warranty period.

23.15.00 NOISE AND VIBRATION
23.15.01 GENERAL
All systems, equipment, pipework and ductwork shall be selected, manufactured and installed for
quiet and vibration free operation in accordance with the requirements of this Specification and
within the noise and vibration criteria as specified for individual items of equipment, acoustic lining
and vibration isolation. Any mechanical plant noise and/or vibration which can be heard and/or felt
and which exceeds the specified room design criteria, shall be rectified with no variation to the
contract sum.
In general, the following principal precautions shall be taken to ensure that minimum noise and
vibration emanates from the plant installed under this contract.
. All rotating machinery shall be accurately balanced statically and dynamically.
. Centrifugal and reciprocating rotating equipment such as fans and pumps shall be mounted on
vibration absorbing mountings. Inertia bases shall be provided where specified or shown on
the drawings.
. All connections to rotating machinery, or assemblies containing machinery shall be rendered

flexible by anti vibration hangers supporting ducting and piping systems, flexible connections
between ductwork and fans and, only with approval, with flexible connections between pipes
and pumps.
. Adequate provision shall be made to take up vibration in bends and pipe runs, wherever
possible. Adequate provision shall be made to take up vibration in bends and pipe runs,
wherever possible.
. Acoustic seals shall be provided where all pipes, ducts and conduits penetrate plantrooms or
acoustic walls.
. All fans, pumps, and similar equipment shall have speeds not greater than specified.
. All duct interiors, air outlets, dampers and similar air distribution equipment shall be free from
raw edges of metal, sharp screw ends or pop rivets projecting into the air stream.
. All ductwork shall be provided with radius fittings, turning vanes, shoe takeoffs, etc to
minimise regenerated noise within the air systems.
. Fire dampers, where velocity exceeds 5m/s in the duct shall be of the curtain type and
mounted out of the air stream by providing transition as necessary to the entering and leaving
side of the damper.
. Balancing dampers shall be sized and located to allow systems to be balanced without creating
regenerated noise at the damper.
. Rotating equipment shall be statically and dynamically balanced and installed on bases
designed to accommodate vibration isolators. Inertia bases shall be used where specified.
23.15.02 NOISE MEASUREMENTS
If noise from the plant is obviously excessive due to noisy bearings or scraping of rotating parts in
guards or housings or other similar malfunctions, then the equipment shall be repaired or replaced
without first carrying out noise measurements. Noise measurements shall only be required if
excessive noise is evident, as determined by the Engineer, in which case the noise measurement tests
shall be carried out by the Mechanical Trade. If such measurements show that noise from items of
equipment exceeds the sound power levels specified, or alternately if no sound level is specified and

NOISE AND VIBRATION
the noise exceeds the manufacturer's catalogue data, then the cost of noise measurements shall be the
Mechanical Trade’s responsibility, at no extra cost to the Contract.
If the noise measurement tests are carried out at the request of the Engineer and it is determined that
noise from items of equipment does not exceed the specified sound power levels or alternatively
does not exceed the manufacturer's catalogue rating then the cost of the noise measurements shall be
chargeable as an extra to the Contract.
Noise measurements shall be made at the completion of the installation and after the system has been
balanced. Noise measurements shall be made with a sound level meter and octave band filter set of
approved manufacture. The meter shall be calibrated prior to and after noise measurements.
Noise measurements shall be made no closer than 1 metre from any air outlet or intake or wall and at
a height of at least 1 metre from the floor.
23.15.03 NOISE RATING NUMBERS
The noise spectrum for a given environment shall be compared against the Noise Rating Curve so
that the noise can be evaluated throughout the audible range. The curve that lies on or slightly above
the plot of the noise in each octave band is considered to be the Noise Rating Number (N) associated
with the particular noise. A single figure number (N) can then be used to describe the noise in an
area around a given noise source.
Throughout this project a tolerance of 2 dB above the maximum Noise Rating Curve, in any two
octave bands, is proposed to be acceptable. Noise levels that are in excess of the specified maximum
curve and this tolerance will be considered unacceptable.
Where a noise level in any octave band exceeds the noise level in a neighbouring octave band by 5
dB, or more, a pure tone or discreet frequency will be considered to exist and the noise rating curve
will apply here with no tolerance.
23.15.04 INTERNAL NOISE LEVELS
Noise from mechanical plant inside the development should not exceed the levels given in the
performance criteria. Unless stated otherwise, the noise level criteria should not be exceeded with
the plant operating under normal operating conditions and at start-up for intermittently operating
plant items.
Noise from all plant during a fire emergency shall not exceed 80 dB(A) within fire isolated
passageways. Noise levels inside the fire control room shall not exceed 65 dB(a) during a fire
emergency.
23.15.05 EXTERNAL NOISE LEVELS
23.15.05.01 Property Boundaries
Noise levels emitted by the mechanical plant at all property boundaries and nearby buildings on
adjacent properties shall meet the requirements of:
1. The DHCC
2. Any other relevant Statutory Authority
23.15.06 PLANT NOISE LEVELS

NOISE AND VIBRATION
The Mechanical Trade shall ensure that systems are installed, adjusted and balanced so that
excessive noise is not created and the scheduled internal and external noise levels are complied with.
23.15.07 VIBRATION PRODUCED BY PLANT
All plant equipment shall be isolated from the building structure in such a manner that noise and
vibration is not transmitted through the structure.
Anti-vibration equipment will be manufactured by a specialist company acceptable to the Consultant,

and with standard ratings information available.
Anti-vibration equipment shall comply with Seismic code for zone 2A.
23.15.08 TESTING ON COMPLETION
Following installation, if requested, carry out noise and vibration level tests to confirm compliance.
The locations selected for measurement shall be nominated. Noise levels should be measured in the
worst affected part of the occupancy.
The sound level meters used for the noise tests shall be an authority certified Sound Level Meters -
Precision.
If the noise or vibration levels exceed those specified, carry out rectification work and remeasure
noise levels to demonstrate compliance with the specification. All testing and rectification work is at
the Mechanical Trade’s expense.
23.15.09 NOISE GENERATED BY THE AIR DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM
Noise from the air distribution system should be minimised by:
1. Selecting grilles, diffusers, dampers and accessories to meet the specified noise levels.
2. Balancing the system using dampers on duct branches, with dampers at grilles being used for
minor adjustment of air volumes. Where excessive noise levels are due to noise generated at
dampers near grilles, the branch dampers should be re-adjusted to eliminate excessive
dampering and noise at the grilles.
3. Installing ductwork with a minimum number of bends, offsets, etc. Flexible ducts should not
be kinked or have excessive bends, particularly near grilles, etc. Ensure there are no
protrusions inside the duct that could generate noise. Unless indicated otherwise, install
turning vanes in tees and bends or use long radius bends to minimise turbulence.
4. Seal duct joints adequately so there is no noise resulting from air leakage.
23.15.10 STRUCTURE BORNE NOISE AND VIBRATION
The Mechanical Trade shall minimise the transmission of vibration to the building structure to
ensure the noise and vibration criteria are achieved by:
1. Statically and dynamically balancing rotating plant and equipment. Out of balance should not
exceed 0.03mm kg/kg of rotating element after installation. Where specified, provide
balancing test certificates.
2. Providing isolation mounts or hangers for vibrating plant and equipment.
3. Providing inertia blocks where indicated to limit the vibration amplitude.

NOISE AND VIBRATION
4. Isolating piping, electrical conduit, etc subject to vibration from the building structure.
5. Providing flexible connections where ducts and piping is connected to vibrating plant and
machinery.
6. Pipes running through risers not be supported on plasterboard riser walls.
Submit a schedule of isolation mounts indicating make, model, rated load and static deflection,
actual load and static deflection, unloaded height, fully loaded height.
23.15.11 ANTI-VIBRATION MOUNTS AND ISOLATORS
23.15.11.01 Selection of Equipment Isolation Mounts
The following requirements are minimum requirements and must be confirmed by the specialist
manufacturer’s representative as being adequate for the particular equipment proposed by the
Contractor.
Isolation mount type and minimum static deflection should be in accordance with the following table
(refer below for isolator types).
Plant Isolator Type Minimum Static

Deflection
In-line Centrifugal Fans and Small Axial
Fans (<450mm diameter) M3/H1 10mm
Axial Fans >450mm diameter M4 25mm
Centrifugal Fans M4 25mm
Pumps M4 50mm
Chillers M4* 50mm
Air Conditioning Units <1500 l/s M3/H1 10mm
Air Conditioning Units >1500 l/s M4 25mm
* with an additional 10mm thick ribbed neoprene pad between the chiller leg and the isolator (99%
isolation)
23.15.11.02 Piping Isolation Mounts
Piping within 25m of the pumps, cooling towers or chillers shall be vibration isolated using type M4
or H2, 25mm static deflection isolators.
23.15.11.03 Isolation Mount Types
Type M1 - Waffle Pad Mounts
Waffle pad mounts shall be: minimum 17mm thick neoprene rubber (nitrile rubber where oil
contamination is possible); cross ribbed with alternately raised ribs on both faces of the pad; loaded
within the load range of the isolator with a minimum static deflection of 1.5mm.
Type M2 - Multiple Layer Waffle Pad Mounts
Multiple layer waffle pad mounts incorporating; specified number of layers of Type M1 Waffle Pad
Mount; 1.5mm thick metal shim plate between the pad layers; minimum of 1.5mm static deflection
per layer.
Type M3 - Neoprene Mounts

NOISE AND VIBRATION
Neoprene mounts should be selected to give the static deflections under load nominated for the item
of plant and incorporate: separate steel top and base plates completely embedded in elastomer;
elastomer colour coded for identification of load rating; non-skid mounting surfaces; bolt holes for
bolting down plant.
Type M4 - Spring/Neoprene Mounts
Spring/neoprene mounts should be selected to give the static deflections under load nominated for
the item of plant and: be laterally stable without any housing or other lateral support; be capable of
an additional travel to solid of at least 50% of the rated static deflection; incorporate a levelling
facility; a spring diameter not less than 0.8 of the loaded height; incorporate a 6mm thick neoprene
base pad to isolate acoustical frequencies. Isolators exposed to weather should have zinc plated
springs and housings coated with a flexible epoxy to prevent corrosion.
23.15.11.04 Isolation Hanger Types
Neoprene hanger elements should be selected to give the static deflections under load nominated for
the item of plant and incorporate: separate steel top and base plates completely embedded in
elastomer which should interlock in the event of fire or mechanical failure; elastomer colour coded
for identification of load rating; hole for locating hanger and a lip to locate the element within the
mounting hole.
Type H1 - Neoprene Hangers
Neoprene hanger elements should be selected to give the static deflections under the load nominated
for the item of plant and incorporate: Type HE1 - Heoprene Hanger Element located within a
galvanised steel cage with provision for threaded hanger rods to screw into the hanger element;
provide sufficient clearance around the threaded hanger rod to ensure it cannot touch the hanger
cage.
Type H2 - Spring/Neoprene Hangers
Spring/neoprene hangers should be selected to give the static deflections under load nominated for
the item of plant and: be laterally stable without any housing or other lateral support; be housed in a
galvanised steel cage; be capable of an additional travel to solid of at least 50% of the rated static
deflection; incorporate a levelling facility; a spring diameter not less than 0.8 of the loaded height;
incorporate a neoprene base pad to isolate acoustical frequencies. Isolators exposed to weather
should have zinc plated springs and housings coated with a flexible epoxy to prevent corrosion and
self-draining cups.
23.15.12 EQUIPMENT BASES
Mount equipment on rigid bases. The bases shall be sufficiently rigid not to deform under the
weight of the machinery or during operation and reduce the effectiveness of the isolation mounts.
23.15.13 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNTS
The mounts shall be levelled once the equipment is fully loaded in its operating condition with a
minimum clearance between the machine and the structure of 20mm and adjusted to ensure that the
isolators are loaded correctly. Ensure that the isolators are not bridged by mounting bolts or contact
between any part of the machine or an un-isolated part of the isolation mounts and the structure.
The number and spacing of the mountings shall be selected to minimise machine rocking. Static and
dynamic forces during operation and start-up shall be considered when selecting the mounts.
Where there is a possibility of significant lateral loads occurring use hold down bolts, lateral
restraints, or housed mounts to locate equipment.

NOISE AND VIBRATION
23.15.14 PENETRATIONS
Duct, pipe and electrical penetrations through walls, floors etc shall not:
1. Decrease the required sound rating isolation rating of the wall, floor, ceiling, etc.
2. Allow the transmission of vibration from pipes and ducts to the wall, floor, etc.
Flexible ducts shall not be taken through full height walls. Where ducts pass through above ceiling
barriers or full height walls, the duct should be treated so as not to decrease the acoustic rating of the
partition.
Seal ducts and pipes penetrating slabs, walls and above ceiling baffles as per details shown on the
drawings.
23.15.15 SILENCERS - GENERAL
23.15.15.01 Silencers
Performance
Submit with the tender performance data based on laboratory testing detailing silencer insertion loss,
self generated noise, radiated noise, pressure drop and dimensions. Refer attached schedule for
minimum performance requirements.
Construction
General
Acoustic silencers shall be manufactured by an approved specialist manufacturer and shall comprise:
1. A minimum 1.6mm thick galvanised outer casing, stiffened as required to ensure that
deformation of the silencer does not occur during installation and operation.
2. Acoustically absorbent internal splitters constructed of perforated zincanneal steel sheet with
acoustically absorbent, heavy density mineral fibre infill. The ends of the splitters shall be
shaped to minimise air flow resistance and regenerated noise.
3. Heavy gauge flanges where the silencer is to be connected to ducting. Flanges shall be
corrosion protected with an approved finish.
Allow for duct transition sections before and after the silencers, if required. Select and install
silencers to ensure that air flow generated noise levels do not cause exceedences of the specified
levels. Where silencers are installed in risers, behind louvres, etc seal around the perimeter of the
silencer to the building opening with minimum 1.6mm thick sheet metal, fixed and caulked in a
similar manner to that indicated in the PB duct penetration detail.
Silencers for Kitchen Exhaust Ducts and Similar
Wherever possible, quiet running kitchen exhaust fans are to be selected for kitchen exhausts to
avoid the need for silencer treatment. Where required, silencers used in kitchen exhaust ducts or
other ducts carrying contaminated air shall have a 12um thick Melinex sheet between the splitter
perforated metal facings and the absorptive infill to prevent the ingress of grease, dirt, etc into the
infill material. Connect silencers to ductwork and maintain access so that the silencers are easily
removable for cleaning.
23.15.15.02 Silencers Exposed to Moisture

NOISE AND VIBRATION
Use hydrophobic grade rockwool absorbent lining faced with perforated zincanneal steel sheet in all
silencers and all internally insulated ductwork carrying moisture laden air or that are internally
exposed to the weather.

23.16.00 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
23.16.01.01 GENERAL
On completion of the installation, submit a programme to the Engineer, itemising the systems and
the proposed dates for conducting acceptance tests.
Start up, operate, test and adjust the systems in accordance with the agreed programme. The setting
up of major equipment shall be supervised by the manufacturer's representative, who shall remain on
site until the equipment is operating satisfactorily. Advise and co-ordinate with the manufacturer's
representatives so that all testing is carried out according to the agreed programme.
When the Mechanical Trade is satisfied that a system is operating satisfactorily, he shall test the
system and forward a copy of the recorded test results to the Engineer. Acceptance tests will be
witnessed by the Engineer when he considers the Mechanical Trade’s test results to be satisfactory.
The Mechanical Trade’s representative, who shall be qualified to commission the installation, shall
remain on site until the plant is operating to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
The Engineer will make two complete tests of all equipment if necessary. If the equipment fails the
second test and if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Mechanical Trade has not made any serious
endeavour to correct the fault, all further tests will be charged at current A.C.E.A. Hourly Rates plus
expenses and such charges will be deducted from the Mechanical Trade’s price.
23.16.02 TESTING
23.16.02.01 General
The plant and its components shall be given the following tests and such other tests as the Engineer
considers necessary to bring the plant into running order. The Engineer shall be given reasonable
notice, generally not less than seven (7) days, regarding the nature of tests, the time and location.
Test requirements for each component shall be either as specified under the particular component's
clause or where not specified shall be in accordance with the requirements of the relevant BS Codes,
Statutory Regulations and the following.
All materials, instruments, power and labour necessary for the tests shall be provided and paid for by
the Mechanical Trade who shall ensure that mechanical trades experienced in balancing and
commissioning of mechanical services are employed, or alternatively, the services of a specialist
balancing company shall be engaged.
Acceptance tests of individual system components shall be undertaken by accredited representatives

of the particular component's manufacturer or supplier.
Acceptance tests, incorporating water circulating systems, must be undertaken with each system's
circulating supply water maintained at its specified operating temperature.
Acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer and compliance with the drawings and
specifications and code requirements shall be certified.
Test instruments shall be checked for accuracy by a N.A.T.A. approved laboratory not more than one
(1) month prior to their anticipated use and copies of the calibration certificates showing the degree
of accuracy shall be supplied to the Engineer prior to acceptance testing.
Minimum requirements are as follows:
. Test all plant components and system operations to ensure that all specified requirements have
been achieved.

TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
. Balance all air and water circulating systems.
. Provide the Engineer with copies of these test and balance results prior to offering the plant
components and systems for acceptance testing.
The established air and water circulating system balance and test results for the compressor sets shall
be submitted to the Engineer on the standard test and/or balance data sheets for approval along with
the Commissioning Programme.
23.16.02.02 Medical Gases
Refer to Medical Gases section within this document for testing requirements.
23.16.02.03 Control, Instrumentation, Gauges
The operation, correct settings, sequences and interlocks of all controls shall be demonstrated.
Recalibration and modification of controls shall be carried out as necessary up to expiry of Defects
Liability Period to maintain manufacturer's specified tolerances.
The operation of all DDC and BMCS hardware and software shall be demonstrated.
Hand instruments shall be provided as necessary to check and log readings for which permanent
gauges and instruments may not have been installed.
. speed of all pumps, motors, fans etc

. overload settings of motors and voltage tests
. air pressure drops through all coils, air filters, silencers, louvres etc.
. ambient and internal dry and wet bulb temperatures
. temperatures and water flow rates of all coils, chillers, boilers, etc.
23.16.03 WITNESSING OF ACCEPTANCE TESTING BY THE ENGINEER
The Engineer shall be given 7 days notice of all acceptance tests and as a minimum requirement,
arrangements shall be made for the Proprietors Representative to witness the following tests:
. Air balance results

. Refrigerant compressor site tests
. Fire safety systems' tests
. Pipework pressure tests
. DDC and BMCS tests
. Air conditioning system capacity tests.
. Air conditioning operation tests
The Mechanical Trade shall submit his proposed Testing Procedure to the Engineer for approval not
less than seven (7) days prior to the anticipated commencing date of the test.
23.16.03.01 MSSs and Control Panels
The operation of all indicating and recording instruments and associated equipment (relays,
indicating lights with associated flashers) to be provided under all working conditions. Resistance
measurements on all motors and starters shall be recorded.
23.16.04 COMMISSIONING
Prerequisites for achieving "Practical Completion" shall include the acceptance by the Engineer that
the following commissioning activities have been satisfactorily completed.

(i) Establishment of the settings and operation of all automatic controls and ancillary
devices, safety interlocks and the like.
(ii) Air balancing of all air handling systems.
All air handling system components shall be cleaned to remove all dust and foreign matter prior to
energising the fans.
The balancing method proposed shall ensure that the manually adjustable volume control (balance)
dampers installed in the ductwork are used to establish the primary balance. Each air outlet's integral
damper shall only be used to "trim" the terminal air flow rate.
Supply air outlets shall be adjusted to provide an air distribution pattern to accommodate the
maximum cooling demand load.
The air quantities shall be balanced to within plus ten percent (10%) minus zero percent (0%) of
those specified.
For purposes of establishing the air balance:
(a) all air handling systems must be operating concurrently;
(b) the building is clean and sealed with all partitions and ceilings in place;
(c) all components of the air handling systems are installed, e.g. air registers, grilles;
(d) the resistance across filter banks, where installed, shall be simulated to provide the means of
the initial and final resistance of the filter bank.
(iii) Water balancing of all water circulation systems:
Each system shall be sequentially:
(a) pressure tested;
(b) drained to ensure the complete removal of all foreign matter;
(c) chemically cleaned and drained. The services of a reputable water treatment company shall be
engaged to undertake this treatment.
(d) vented to remove all non condensibles.
Each system shall be balanced with the circulating supply water maintained at its specified operating
temperature.
All pressure and flow actuated controls, relief devices, bleeds, vents and drains shall be checked and
proven to operate.
All water flow rates shall be adjusted to within plus ten percent (10%), minus zero percent (0%), of
the specified flow rates at the peak design condition for the valve.
(iv) Acceptance testing of all plant components and systems.
All acceptance testing shall be undertaken in accordance with the requirements specified under the
Clause 'Testing' herein. Acceptance tests on any one (1) system shall be subject to the satisfactory
completion of all work associated with items (i), (ii) and (iii). Acceptance tests on any one (1)
operating system shall be undertaken with all specified systems operating concurrently.
The Mechanical Trade is responsible to provide the Consulting Engineer the copies of all data
recorded during testing and commissioning of the installations with all necessary inspection

certificates from local Authorities, pressure test certificates and performance curves or tables for the
following items:
. all chillers
. all fans, pumps, air filters, heaters
. all air conditioning units
. medical gases systems
. other specific equipment as required
(v) Plant/System Operation
On completion of all acceptance testing, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, all specified systems
shall be run continuously for a minimum period of 12 hours. Any faults detected during this period
shall be immediately rectified and the specified running period recommenced.
23.16.05 POST COMMISSIONING OPERATION
On occupation of the premises the Proprietor shall operate all systems and the Mechanical Trade
shall make available the services of experienced technicians for the training and guidance of the
Proprietor.
Recordings shall be taken of temperatures and room indicators and controls adjusted.
23.16.05.01 Capacity Tests
If the installation is completed at a time when the ambient or such like conditions preclude the
completion of capacity tests, the work may be deemed "practically complete" subject to the approval
by the Engineer.
The outstanding capacity tests shall be undertaken, during the Defects Liability Period at a time
selected by the Engineer when the plant is and has been in unserviced operation for more than seven
(7) days.
The air conditioning system/s shall be tested on a day when the wet bulb temperature is equal to or
greater than the specified design wet bulb temperature or when, subject to the Engineer's approval,
the ambient wet bulb temperature approaches the design wet bulb temperature sufficiently close to
allow the tests to be undertaken.
Outside air and return air dampers shall be adjusted to give the specified entering wet bulb
temperature whilst maintaining the design air quantity.
Recording instruments shall be provided by the Mechanical Trade during the Defects Liability
Period, for a period of two (2) weeks during both summer and winter to ensure the plant is
maintaining specified conditions. Records and logs of performance shall be presented in triplicate to
the Engineer.
23.16.05.02 Final Checks
Prior to the issue of the 'Final Certificate' verify the performance of all safety and control functions
of each system by way of a certified report from the respective Manufacturers, Contractors or
Suppliers. Such checks shall be undertaken not earlier than one (1) month before the scheduled
expiry date of the Defects Liability Period.

23.17.00 WARRANTY AND SERVICE
23.17.01 GENERAL
The Mechanical Trade shall commence a comprehensive preventative maintenance programme at the
time of handing-over the installation.
At hand-over the Mechanical Trade shall instruct person/s nominated by the Proprietor of the correct
operation of the plant. One week’s notice shall be given to the engineer of intention to start-up.
Instructions shall continue until a Certificate of Practical Completion is issued.
23.17.02 DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD
(1) During the Defects Liability Period, the Proprietor will operate all building services, plant and
equipment and may take an active part in the maintenance of equipment, even though under
the control and direction of the Mechanical Trade. The Mechanical Trade shall maintain a
maintenance log throughout the Defects Liability Period.
(2) All scheduled, preventative and statutory maintenance work shall be carried out by the
Mechanical Trade during this period in accordance with the recommendations of the
Manufacturers, Code requirements and as detailed in the operation and maintenance manuals.
The Mechanical Trade shall send experienced and qualified technicians to site at periods
covered in the routine maintenance schedule or as required for testing. They shall carry out all
service, routine adjustments, replacements, cleaning and lubrication needed to keep the whole
installation operating in a first class condition. They shall report to the Proprietor or his
nominated representative on arrival, receive any instructions about the work and issue a
written report on their activity and the condition of the installation both to the Proprietor and
the Engineers within five days.
(3) The Mechanical Trade shall maintain the installation and make good any defect in
workmanship or materials during the Defects Liability Period. The Mechanical Trade shall
also be prepared to send a suitable technician to site at one hour's notice throughout the
Defects Liability Period to meet any emergency calls for service at any time. The Mechanical
Trade shall work continuously during all hours of any day as required to effect the fastest
possible restoration of normal system operation in the event of breakdown.
(4) The Mechanical Trade shall supply complete lists of spare parts normally held in
Manufacturer's stocks with sufficient details to permit accurate ordering by telephone. The
Mechanical Trade shall also supply additional spare parts if specified and shall deliver them
into store on site, properly packed and preserved.
The Mechanical Trade shall supply at the time of commissioning all special tools and
equipment which may be required for routine operation, maintenance adjustment or cleaning
of the installation as recommended by the equipment manufacturers.
No work or operation shall be carried out by the Mechanical Trade at any time in the building
after hand-over without the full knowledge and prior approval of the Proprietor.
23.17.03 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
The Mechanical Trade shall supply two (2) hard copy and soft copies on CD in both PDF and
Microsoft Word formats of the Operating and Maintenance Instructions. Hard copies shall be bound
in a blue vinyl hard back folder with stamped lettering on its cover and spine. The instructions shall
be in the form of a manual. A draft manual shall be submitted for approval by the Engineer prior to
Practical Completion. No plant will be deemed practically complete until the manuals have been
approved.

WARRANTY AND SERVICE
The format and content of each manual shall, as a minimum, comply with the following
requirements:
Section A - Index
Shall comprehensively list all elements and sub-elements of the subject matter.
Section B - Introduction and General Description
Shall comprehensively describe:
. the scope of work executed.
. the function and composition of each system.
Section C - Description of Operations
. the correct method of operating all manually controlled items of plant for all specified modes
of operation, including start-up, shutdown and emergency procedures.
. the operation of all automatic control systems.
Section D - Maintenance Instructions
. all procedures necessary to undertake the preventative and corrective maintenance of all items
of plant installed under the Contract.
. details of proposed water treatment, plant inspection and cleaning of plant items, including
relevant schedules.
The maintenance procedures shall be based on manufacturers recommendations.
The minimum frequency of these procedures will be twelve per annum, one of which will be
procedures prescribed for "annual" inspections.
Section E - Schedule of Installed Equipment and Equipment Suppliers
Shall comprehensively list details of all items of equipment installed and the equipment suppliers
and/or agents. Such details shall include the original purchase order and/or invoice number of each
component having a manufacturer's warranty extending beyond the expiry of the Defects Liability
Period.
Section F - Manufacturer's Literature
Original copies only of all relevant literature shall be supplied to the Engineer. Characteristic
performance curves of pressure against flow rate for fans, pumps, valves and the like shall each have
the appropriate system operating point indicated thereon.
Section G - Commissioning and Capacity Test Results
Shall include the following information, such information having been accepted and approved by the
Engineer:
. commissioning and capacity test results;

. factory test data results;

. medical gases validation results;

. air and/or water balance results;
. calculations verifying achievement of the specified performance requirements;
. schedules of control set points and balancing valve settings.
Where capacity tests have not been undertaken at the time of 'Practical Completion', provision shall
be allowed in each manual to include these results after the tests have been completed during the
Defects Liability Period, together with a set of the "Work as Executed" drawings.
Each of the above sections shall be provided with a title page which shall incorporate a robust thumb
index tab to facilitate easy accessing.
All information in the manuals shall be clearly set out on A4 standard size pages, which shall be
loose leaf bound into robust covers, so as to permit easy reading of any page. The covers and each
page shall be sealed within a laminate of durable clear plastic to the approval of the Engineer.
The final "marked up" proof copy of the draft manual shall be returned to the Engineer with the final
copies.
23.17.04 AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS
The Mechanical Trade shall provide "as installed drawings" prepared to comply with current British
Standard in the following formats and numbers:
. 2 sets included within the maintenance manuals.
. 1 off CD with drawings in DWG and PDF formats.
They shall show:
. Plan layout of all floors.
. Plan layout and sections of all plants and machinery.
. Piping layout.
. Power wiring and control diagrams.
. Details of construction of all custom made components not covered by manufacturer's

instructions.
. System diagrams, including schematic controls and piping circuits.
. Framed schematic drawings of air and water systems mounted in plantroom.
23.17.05 ROUTINE MAINTENANCE
The Mechanical Trade shall provide all materials, labour, tools and services necessary to service the
plant during the Defects Liability Period.
Servicing provided shall comply with recommendations of the approved operating instructions and
shall include regular oiling and/or greasing of all fans, electric driving motors and all other
machinery in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. The servicing shall also include
regular cleaning of all filtering elements and electrical switchgear in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendations.
The Mechanical Trade shall check and adjust the following:

23.17.05.01 All Plant
Monthly
. Contact Building Manager for air conditioning problems and check plant log book and service
reports.
. Visually inspect all plant and report any malfunctions and faults to the Building Manager.
. Obtain approval for any additional work deemed necessary to ensure the continuity of
operation of the plant.
Note: This work shall not include work which can reasonably be done as part of the next
two monthly service.
. This inspection should normally not take more than 30 minutes.
23.17.05.02 Air Handling Units
Six Monthly
. Check panels, doors and fastenings for security, repairs, leaks.
. Remove rubbish from Conditioner housing.
. Ensure insulation is secure and repair as necessary.
. Resecure insulation with fixing equal to or better than original.
. Replace defective internal lights.
. Inspect drain trays for leaks and clear drains. All drains must drain and cleaning when the fan
is off. Scrub trays with a broom and disinfect with Sodium Hypochlorite (around 15% active
ingredients by volume) or laundry bleach. Personnel handling Sodium Hypochlorite should
wear protective clothing including an approved type of face mask.
. Inspect casing for corrosion and water or air leaks and carry out necessary remedial work.
. Inspect flexible connections and repair as necessary.
. Check for leaks on coils and piping connections and repair as necessary.
. Lubricate damper hinges and check linkages are secure.
Note: Incorrectly adjusted or creased dampers and insecure linkages are a frequent cause of
the inability for air conditioning plant to provide room conditions or perform satisfactorily.
Annually
. Vent water coils.
. Inspect coils for dirt build up.
. Inspect coil fins for damage and comb if necessary.
. Externally clean coils with soft brush or air jet. Do not use hot water or steam on refrigerant
coils.
. Report on condition of equipment.

23.17.05.03 Vibration Isolators
Annually
. Inspect vibration isolators and replace if damaged.
. Check isolators for incorrect settings on jacking bolts and re-adjust if necessary.
. Check that isolators are not short-circuited by electrical conduits, guards, debris etc.
. Ensure mounts are clear of oil or water.
23.17.05.04 Fans (Supply, Return and Exhaust)
Two Monthly
. Check fan operates.
. Check fan for vibration, bearing noise or overheating.
. Adjust belt tension as necessary. Check for wear and replace if necessary.
. Inspect and repair flexible duct connections.
. Check belt guard firmly in place.
Six Monthly
. Lightly lubricate bearings to Manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure that the same Make
and Type of lubricant are used on each occasion.
. Lightly lubricate any vane controls or dampers.
. Check couplings for tightness.
. Check anti-vibration mounts are securely fixed and operating correctly.
Annually
. Check impeller and drive pulleys are tight on shaft. Tighten if necessary.
. Check pulley alignment. Re-align to Manufacturer's tolerances.
. Remove corrosion and repair paintwork and lightly grease bright steel.
. Check couplings for alignment.
. Measure and record fan output.
. If accessible, clean fan blades.
. Check access panels for air leaks. Replace seals if leaking.
23.17.05.05 Pumps
Two Monthly
. Check pump and motor for vibration and bearings for noise or overheating.
. Change duty pumps (if applicable).

. Inspect pump gland and adjust if necessary. Packed glands to drip slowly, rather than run dry.
Ensure that spray from pump shafts does not escape from well or enclosure. It may be
necessary to manufacture an additional sheetmetal guard.
. Check gland well drain is clear.
Six Monthly
. Operate pump suction and discharge valves.
. If pressure gauge fitted, check operating pressures to ensure strainer is clean. Checking shut
off head and comparing this with normal pressure will indicate degree of strainer fouling.
. Check guards are securely in place.
. Visually check pump coupling. When checking coupling note if it is shredding rubber or
other damage has occurred. Repair as required.
. Vent pump if valve fitted.
. With pump running lightly lubricate bearings of pump and motor.
. Lightly grease bright steel shaft.
. Generally clean pump and motor assembly.
Annually
. Clean pump strainer.
. Check coupling bushes for wear. If worn replace bushes and check pump motor alignment.
. Inspect exposed surfaces for corrosion, repair paintwork as necessary.
. If required, replace packing or mechanical seal using recommended packing or seals.
Note: Re-assemble insulation after any work requiring its removal.
23.17.05.06 Air Handling Units, Filters, Fans, Electrical Switchboards, Refrigeration

Pipework (Split Systems Only), Vibration Isolators, Controls, Condensers
Six Monthly
. Check refrigerant charge through sight glass where fitted.
Annually
. Fit set of gauges to refrigeration circuit. Record readings.
. Check and adjust refrigerant charge. Record readings.
. Clean air cooled condenser coils, examine for damaged fins. Comb as necessary.
. Check loading of compressor. (This may have to be done during summer).
. Clean fan side of evaporator coil.
. Check casing for corrosion. Clean, dry and make good any paintwork.

. Check for broken frame supports. Repair as necessary.
. Check power wiring on contactors, overloads, terminal block and at compressor motor
terminal.
. Compressor contactor contacts should be checked for wear.
23.17.05.07 Refrigeration Pipework
See "Insulation"
23.17.05.08 Controls
Two Monthly
. Note the type of control system in operation and refer to Control Manufacturer's data for any
specific setting alterations and/or adjustments.
. Measure and record conditioned space wet and dry bulb temperatures.
. Measure and record wet and dry bulb temperatures for supply, return and outside air.
. Adjust thermostat only after authority has been given. Give controls time to settle down after
adjustment has been carried out. When setting and/or calibrating, work in conjunction with
the Refrigeration system to ensure that required settings and differentials are obtained. Do not
adjust or move control settings to start and/or stop the cooling cycle.
. Check and adjust time setting of programme on time clocks.
Annually
. Check operation and settings of controls.
. Check thermostat positions are not affected by local heaters, store equipment or supply air
diffusers. Advise if irregularities found.
. Liaise with fire protection Maintenance Contractor (if necessary) to test the mode of operation
of the mechanical services in the event of a fire.
. Check temperature (and humidity if controls exist) in each Zone or sub-zone. Check
calibration and operation of sensors, thermostats, humidity sensors and pressure controllers.
. Check modulating motor mountings and secure if necessary.
. Check linkages for tightness and restroke if loose.
. Clean and lubricate spindle linkages and ensure pivots are free.
. Check that dampers and louvres are free, stroked correctly and shut tightly. Adjust or
lubricate if not correct especially minimum fresh air.
. Minimum fresh air levels of a maximum of 10% of total fan capacity is to be achieved through
fixed fresh air dampers and not through stroking of dampers.
23.17.05.09 Electrical Switchboards, Electrical Wiring
Two Monthly
. Check for any sign of burnt, hot connections and burnt contacts on starters and relays. Clean,
tighten and rectify.

. Replace any faulty indicator lights.
. Examine general condition of conduits, connectors, switches and wiring, especially in the
damp and outdoor areas.
. Check time clocks are in correct adjustment.
Annually
. Inspect, clean or replace, if necessary, contacts or faulty relays.
. Check overload rating against motor nameplate rating, notify any discrepancies.
. Check connections (a) motors, (b) switchboards, (c) or equipment/contactors subject to

variation. Tighten or rectify as necessary.
. Examine external switches etc. for damage to seals and replace if necessary.
. Check time delays by operating plant and observing delays.
. Check all fuses for correct rating and ensure that spare fuses for all sizes are available in or
near the switchboard.
. Replace any labels that have fallen off or been removed.
. Check and rectify, where necessary, any damaged cable or bus bar insulation. Obtain
additional approval for repairs expected to take more than ½ hour.
. Vacuum clean switchboard interiors.
. Check conduits securely fixed.
. Examine and rectify panel and floor seals. Rectify and locking deficiencies. Seals may need
to be replaced at next service if material is to be ordered.
. Report where wiring diagram considered to be incorrect. Also report where no diagram
exists.
23.17.05.10 Plantrooms
. Check that fresh air intakes are not blocked by stores equipment. Report any storage of stores
material in the plantroom to the Regional Building and Maintenance Manager. Check that
Cleaners equipment or similar smelling products are not stored in plantrooms which are used
as fresh air plenums.
Annually
. Advise of any building repair work necessary.
23.17.05.11 Water Treatment
Carried out by nominated Water Treatment Contractor.
23.17.05.12 Corrosion Protection
All water systems are to be treated with chemicals to control organic fouling, suspended solids, scale
formation, corrosion and PH level. The chemicals shall be dosed on a continuous basis for
condenser water systems and slug dosed for hot and chilled water system. The chemicals used in the
condenser water system shall be suitable for discharge into the sewer system. The chemical

treatment contractor shall contact the local sewerage authority to seek their approval for the
chemicals to be discharged into the sewer. A copy of this approval shall be filed in the Store
Maintenance Procedure Manual. Chromate chemicals are generally unacceptable to sewerage
authorities.

23.18.00 SCHEDULES OF PERFORMANCE
23.18.01 GENERAL
The performance schedules of equipment has been prepared as a guide for tendering purposes and
generally represent minimum acceptable values.
Fan static pressures and pump-heads have been estimated on the basis of the indicated layout and
average losses through typical equipment. These shall be verified for the tendered equipment with
the Sub-Contractor offering all equipment selections to suit his actual calculated conditions.
Insertion losses indicated for silencers are also minimum indicative values, intended for tendering
purposes only. The successful tenderer shall calculate the final insertion losses on the various
systems, based on equipment selection and final duct layout.
When selecting fan coil units, the air quantities and temperatures may be revised to suit the
manufacturers equipment rating, however, these shall not effect the statutory requirements and
system performance.
23.18.02 Chillers - Air Cooled

23.18.03 Circulating Water Pumps
23.18.04 Air Handling Units (Including Heat Recovery)
23.18.05 Air Handling Units (Including Heat Recovery) Fan Schedule
23.18.06 Air Handling Units (Without Heat Recovery)
23.18.07 Chilled Water Fan Coil Units (FCU’s)
23.18.08 Computer Room – Chilled Water
23.18.09 Fans
23.18.10 Medical Air/Surgical Air Compressor Schedule
23.18.11 Medical Vacuum Pump
23.18.12 Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging System
23.18.13 Electric Duct Heaters
23.18.14 Plate Heat Exchangers (Water to Water)
23.18.15 Motor Control Centres

SCHEDULES OF PERFORMANCE
23.18.02 CHILLERS – AIR COOLED
GENERAL EVAPORATOR COMPRESSOR EL. DATA

Selected
Chilled Chilled Maximu Ambient Compr. Starter Total Elect.
Minimum Maximum Chiller Rev
Chiller Chiller Water Water Fouling m Temp. Type Type Chiller Requirement
Refrigerant Rundown Water Model
Tag Output Factor Working kW
Load IN / OUT Flow PD
Pressure
(-) (-) (kWR) (%) (C) (l/s) (m2C/kW) (kPa) (kPa) (‘C) (-) (-) (kW) ph/V/Hz (-) (-)
CH-B/5-1 R134a 617 12.5 14.5/5.5 16.4 0.01800 25 40 50 Screw VSD 297.6 3/400/50 YCAV0819EA50 01
NOTES: 1. Cooling capacity must be infinitely variable by means of capacity slide controlled by chiller’s microprocessor system
2. Flow switch must be supplied by chiller’s manufacturer.
3. Single point supply for each chiller.

23.18.03 CIRCULATING WATER PUMPS
GENERAL PUMP DATA MOTOR DATA

Max. Impeller Min
Design Estimated Head Pump Type Min Pump Motor Motor Protection Motor
Ref. Pump Location Pump Dia. Motor Rev.
Flow (Note 1) (Note 6) Efficiency Drive (Note 4) Efficiency
Speed (Note 2) Power
(-) (-) (l/s) (kPa) (-) (Note 3 (rpm) (mm) (kW) (vsd/dol) (IP…) (ST or HI)
HRP-A/5-1 Building A-Level 5 2.0 100 C Note 3 1450 Note 2 0.75 DOL IP 56 ST 01
SCHWP-B/B1-1 Basement B1 28 400 A Note 3 1450 Note 2 30 VSD IP 56 ST 01
PCHWP-B/5-1 Building B – Level 5 16.4 350 A Note 3 1450 Note 2 7.5 VSD IP 56 ST 01
PCHWP-B/5-2 Building B – Level 5 16.4 350 A Note 3 1450 Note 2 7.5 VSD IP 56 ST 01
HRP-B/5-1 Building B-Level 5 0.26 80 C Note 3 1450 Note 2 0.25 DOL IP 56 ST 01
NOTES:
1. Pump heads are estimated for tender purposes only. The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the actual system head and selection of an appropriately rated pump.
2. Pump selection shall have mid range impeller selection or at least one impeller change without the need for motor change
3. Pump efficiency should be as close as possible to the pump best efficiency and should not deviate more than 5% from the pump best efficiency.
4. Motor protection: IP55 - indoor installations. IP56 - outdoor installation.
5. Motor efficiency: standard (ST) or high (HI) efficiency motors to AS/NZS1359.5:2000 (test method B) Only motors above 15.0 kW should be high efficiency motors.
6. Pump Type: A - centrifugal, split casing, back pullout design
B - centrifugal, double suction pump
C- in line pump

23.18.04 AIR HANDLING UNITS (INCLUDING HEAT RECOVERY)
Heating coil (COIL 1) Cooling coil (COIL 2) Cooling coil (COIL 3)

AHU
Air Air Capacity Air Air Capacity Air Air Capacity Rev
Reference Air Max Max Air Max Max Max Max
ON OFF Tot/Sens W.F. ON OFF Tot/Sens W.F. ON OFF Tot/Sens W.F.
Flow WPD APD Flow WPD APD WPD APD
Coil Coil Coil Coil Coil Coil
(-) (l/s) ‘(C) ‘(C) (kW) (l/s) (kPa) (Pa) (l/s) ‘(C) ‘(C) (kW) (l/s) (kPa) (Pa) ‘(C) ‘(C) (kW) (l/s) (kPa) (Pa)
AHU-A/5-1 5500 26 41 100 2.0 30 30 7500 46.1/29 35/26.3 100/100 2.0 40 100 35/26.3 14.0/13.9 386/189 10.3 40 100 01
AHU-B/5-1 825 24 36.5 12.3 0.26 30 30 925 46.1/29 35/26.3 12.3/12.3 0.26 40 100 35/26.3 13.0/12.9 50/24 1.4 40 100 01
AHU-B/5-2 825 24 36.5 12.3 0.26 30 30 925 46.1/29 35/26.3 12.3/12.3 0.26 40 100 35/26.3 13.0/12.9 50/24 1.4 40 100 01
AHU-B/5-3 825 24 36.5 12.3 0.26 30 30 925 46.1/29 35/26.3 12.3/12.3 0.26 40 100 35/26.3 13.0/12.9 50/24 1.4 40 100 01
AHU-B/5-4 825 24 36.5 12.3 0.26 30 30 925 46.1/29 35/26.3 12.3/12.3 0.26 40 100 35/26.3 13.0/12.9 50/24 1.4 40 100 01
AHU-B/5-5 825 24 36.5 12.3 0.26 30 30 925 46.1/29 35/26.3 12.3/12.3 0.26 40 100 35/26.3 13.0/12.9 50/24 1.4 40 100 01
AHU-B/5-6 6000 26 39.5 96 2.0 30 30 7000 46.1/29 35/26.3 96/96 2.0 40 100 35/26.3 14.0/13.9 360/176 9.6 40 100 01

23.18.05 AIR HANDLING UNITS (INCLUDING HEAT RECOVERY) FAN SCHEDULE
FAN MOTOR
AHU
Reference Est. Max
Fan Air Imp. Motor Motor Starting
Tot Fan
Type Flow Dia Rating Class Method
Static Speed
(-) (-) (l/s) (Pa) (RPM) (mm) (ph / kW)) (-) (vsd / dol)
AHU-A/5-1 BC 7500 750 960 - 3/15 F VSD
AHU-B/5-1 FC 925 700 960 300 3/2.2 F VSD
AHU-B/5-2 FC 925 700 960 300 3/2.2 F VSD
AHU-B/5-3 FC 925 700 960 300 3/2.2 F VSD
AHU-B/5-4 FC 925 700 960 300 3/2.2 F VSD
AHU-B/5-5 FC 925 700 960 300 3/2.2 F VSD
AHU-B/5-6 BC 7000 750 960 - 3/11 F VSD
Notes: 1. Fan type: BC – backward curved

FC – forward curved
2. System static is an estimated value only and excludes AHU pressure drops but includes unit mounted bag filter.
The Contractor shall be responsible for ascertaining the actual system resistance and selection of an appropriately rated fan.

23.18.06 AIR HANDLING UNITS (WITHOUT HEAT RECOVERY)
GENERAL DATA COOLING COIL FAN MOTOR
AHU “ON”
“ON” Coil Est. Max Rev
Reference Area AHU Air Outside Coil Capacity Max Max Fan Imp. Motor Motor Starting
Temp. W.F. Tot Fan
Served Location Flow Air Temp. Tot/Sens WPD APD Type Dia Rating Class Method
(WB) Static Speed
(DB)
(-) (-) (-) (l/s) (l/s) ‘(C) ‘(C) (kW) (l/s) (kPa) (Pa) (-) (Pa) (RPM) (mm) (ph / kW)) (-) (vsd / dol) (-)
AHU-A/G-11/0 Dining Ceiling 3100 500 27 19.8 85/53 2.3 15 120 Cent. 450 960 800 3/5.5 F DOL 01
AHU-A/G-22/0 Waiting Ceiling 3100 500 23 17 56/38 1.5 15 120 Cent. 400 960 800 3/5.5 F DOL 01
AHU-A/G-38 Lounge Ceiling 1800 200 23 17 33/22 0.9 15 120 Cent. 400 960 600 3/4.0 F DOL 01
AHU-A/G-60/0 Kitchen Ceiling 1850 1850 46 29 116/64 3.1 20 120 Cent. 550 960 600 3/4.0 F DOL 01
AHU-B/2-31/0 Packing, Wash & Sort Ceiling 1350 400 23 17 25/17 0.7 15 120 Cent. 600 960 500 3/4.0 F DOL 01

23.18.07 CHILLED WATER FAN COIL UNITS (FCU’S)
GENERAL DATA COOLING COIL ELECTR. DATA

“ON”
FCU FCU Minimum Coil Capacity Chilled Maximum Operating Run in Selected
Area FCU Electrical Motor
Tag Supply Outside Temp. Tot/Sens Water Water Hours Emergency FCU Rev
Served Location Require. Size
Air Qty. Air Qty. Flow PD Mode Model / Size
DB/WB
(-) (-) (-) (l/s) (l/s) (C) (kW) (l/s) (kPa) (1/3) ph (kW) (10/24)h (y/n) (-) (-)
FCU-A/B2-08 Body Hold Body Hold 600 0 23/18 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/B2-08 EHS Pharmacy Store EHS Pharmacy 600 0 23/18 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/B1-1 Energy Transfer Station ETS Room 2000 50 32/26 28.3/24 0.75 10 3ph 1.5 N 39TDH-18 01
FCU-B/B1-2 BMS Room BMS Room 600 0 23/18 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/G-13/0 Office Corridor - Ceiling 750 80 22.1/17.7 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/G-34 Main LV Switch Corridor - Ceiling 550 0 23/18 12.1/10.2 0.32 5.5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/G-03 Comm’s Room Airlock - Ceiling 600 0 23/18 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-09/0 Waiting & Corridor Store - Ceiling 800 115 21.9/17.5 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-17.1 DIC Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 30 22.6/17.8 20.7/17.6 0.55 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-17.2 DIC Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 30 22.6/17.8 20.7/17.6 0.55 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-25/0 Clerks, Linen & Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 800 60 22.4/17.8 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-34/0 Manifold Rooms Gas Manifold 600 0 23/18 14.7/12.5 0.39 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-37/0 Renal Dialysis Fluid Store - Ceiling 600 70 22.1/17.6 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-38/0 Renal Dialysis Lounge - Ceiling 500 70 21.9/17.6 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/G-39/0 Renal Dialysis Fluid Store - Ceiling 500 70 21.9/17.6 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/G-42/0 CAPD & East Offices Corridor - Ceiling 700 90 22/17.6 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-03 Comm’s Room Airlock - Ceiling 600 0 23/18 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-09/0 Waiting & Corridor Store - Ceiling 800 115 21.9/17.5 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
GENERAL NOTES: 3. Unit airflow and capacity based on “low” speed fan.
1. Cooling coil flow based on 5.5/14.5C chilled water temperature IN/OUT 4. 1ph = 200V/50Hz, 3ph = 400V/50Hz
2. Unit selection (model and size) based on a “CARRIER” catalogue.

23.18.07 CHILLED WATER FAN COIL UNITS (FCU’s) Cont.

“ON”
DB/WB
FCU-B/G-47/0 Consult & Office Waiting - Ceiling 810 100 22/17.6 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-54.1 Pharmacy Pharmacy - Ceiling 750 50 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-54.2 Pharmacy Pharmacy - Ceiling 750 50 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-56 Pharmacy Out Patient - Ceiling 750 50 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-59/0 Workshop & Store Store - Ceiling 800 60 22.4/17.8 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-72/0 NUM & Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 800 45 22.6/17.8 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/G-75 Lobby & Airlock Corridor - Ceiling 680 150 21.2/17.3 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/1-01 Lobby Ceiling 525 210 19.8/16.7 8.3/7 0.22 5.3 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/1-06.1 Link Bridge Ceiling 650 50 22.4/17.8 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/1-07/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 550 100 21.5/17.4 8.3/7 0.22 5.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/1-08/0 Offices Ceiling 160 60 20/16.8 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/1-13/0 General Area Ceiling 185 40 21.3/17.3 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/1-17/0 Waiting A /Support EMG Ceiling 320 100 20.5/17 5.3/4.5 0.14 4.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/1-24/0 Waiting B/Nurse Bases Ceiling 600 220 20.1/16.8 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/1-28/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 700 110 21.7/17.5 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/1-30/0 Offices Ceiling 465 160 20.2/16.9 7.5/6.4 0.2 4.7 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/1-37/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 300 40 21.9/17.6 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/1-39/0 Offices Ceiling 180 40 21.2/17.3 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/1-42/0 Nurse Base/Sub Wait Ceiling 180 130 17.2/15.7 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


“ON”
DB/WB
FCU-A/1-43/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 610 100 21.7/17.5 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/1-53 Laser Ceiling 125 40 20.4/17 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/1-62/0 Gym Ceiling 360 50 21.9/17.6 5.7/4.8 0.15 4.9 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/1-64/0 Physio Therapy Offices Ceiling 165 40 21.1/17.2 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/1-74 Clinic Support Meeting Rm Ceiling 180 120 17.7/15.9 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/1-80 Laboratory Ceiling 110 20 21.5/17.4 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/1-96 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 160 20 22/17.6 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-B/1-1/0 Lobby Lobby - Ceiling 700 60 22.3/17.7 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-03 Comm’s Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 30 22.6/17.8 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-6.1 Bridge Lobby - Ceiling 650 50 22.4/17.8 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-6.2 Bridge Lobby - Ceiling 650 50 22.4/17.8 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-9/0 Gamma Camera & Lab Corridor - Ceiling 700 45 22.5/17.8 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-26/0 Admin & Corridor Waiting - Ceiling 750 60 22.4/17.7 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-30 Head of Dept. Corridor - Ceiling 600 30 22.6/17.8 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-36/0 Radiographers Corridor - Ceiling 600 45 22.4/17.8 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-37/0 PACS & Processing Room Corridor - Ceiling 300 45 21.8/17.5 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-B/1-39 Video Fluoroscopy Corridor - Ceiling 720 45 22.5/17.8 11.7/9.9 0.31 4.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-43 Brachy. Therapy Corridor - Ceiling 300 30 22.2/17.7 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


“ON”
DB/WB
FCU-B/1-44/0 CT Control Room CT Ceiling 750 45 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-45.1 CT/Ang CT - Ceiling 750 45 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-45.2 CT/Ang CT – Ceiling 750 45 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-52/0 Ultrasound 2 Service Lob - Ceiling 400 30 22.4/17.8 6/5.1 0.16 3.9 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/1-59/0 Ultrasound 1 Linen - Ceiling 780 60 22.4/17.8 12.4/10.6 0.33 5.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-62 Records Room Ceiling 600 30 22.6/17.8 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-65/0 Office & Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 700 45 22.5/17.8 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-68/0 Nurse Base, Store & Corr. Tech. Store - Ceiling 780 60 22.4/17.8 12.4/10.6 0.33 5.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-78/0 X-Ray & Store Corridor - Ceiling 450 30 22.5/17.8 7.2/6.1 0.19 4.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/1-80/0 Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 750 45 22.5/17.8 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-83/0 CT/Ang Store - Ceiling 750 30 22.7/17.9 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/1-84 CT Control Room Store - Ceiling 500 35 22.4/17.8 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/1-86/0 CT/Ang Service Lob - Ceiling 830 45 22.6/17.8 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/2-01/0 Lobby Ceiling 380 120 20.5/17 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/2-06 VIP Single Bedroom Ceiling 240 50 21.3/17.3 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/2-08 VIP Single Bedroom Ceiling 300 50 21.7/17.5 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/2-11 Guest Bedroom Ceiling 180 50 20.8/17.1 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/2-12/0 Royal Suite 2 Ceiling 420 50 22/17.6 7.2/6.1 0.19 4.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/2-20/0 Royal Suite 1 Ceiling 510 50 22.2/17.7 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/2-30/0 Recep/Nurse Base Ceiling 395 140 20.2/16.9 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


“ON”
DB/WB
FCU-A/2-35 Single Bedroom Ceiling 300 55 21.5/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/2-43 Single Bedroom Ceiling 270 55 21.4/17.3 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/2-59 VIP Single Bedroom Ceiling 405 60 21.8/17.5 6/5.1 0.16 3.9 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/2-67/0 Bev Pantry/Clean Utility Ceiling 400 90 21.2/17.3 6/5.1 0.16 3.9 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/2-72/0 NUM/Interview Room Ceiling 310 60 21.5/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/2-82 Treatment Room Ceiling 120 20 21.7/17.5 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


“ON”
DB/WB
FCU-B/2-3 Comm’s Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 0 23/18 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/2-18/0 Lab, Teleconference & Lob Lobby - Ceiling 700 70 22.2/17.7 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/2-20 Seminar Corridor - Ceiling 450 60 21.9/17.6 7.2/6.1 0.19 4.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/2-23 Seminar Kitchen - Ceiling 450 60 21.9/17.6 7.2/6.1 0.19 4.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/2-24/0 Corridor Lobby - Ceiling 750 70 22.3/17.7 12.1/10.2 0.32 5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/2-26 CSSD Store Ceiling 300 0 23/18 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-B/2-40/0 Office & Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 500 50 22.2/17.7 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/2-49 Chemistry/Haematology Ceiling 800 80 22.2/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/2-51/0 Phlebotomy, Wait & Staff Wait - Ceiling 650 60 22.3/17.7 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/2-53/0 Reception & Waiting Corridor - Ceiling 800 80 22.2/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/2-56 Blood Bank Ceiling 500 30 22.5/17.8 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/2-60.1 Auditorium Corridor - Ceiling 700 250 20.1/16.9 11.3/9.6 0.3 4.5 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/2-60.2 Auditorium Lobby - Ceiling 800 250 20.5/17 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/2-63/0 Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 800 80 22.2/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/2-65 Microbiology Ceiling 160 20 22/17.6 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-B/2-88.1 Bridge Lobby - Ceiling 330 30 22.3/17.7 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/3-01/0 Lobby Ceiling 380 120 20.5/17 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/3-09 Bladder Training Nurse Ceiling 85 20 21.1/17.2 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/3-10 Bladder Training Ceiling 300 55 21.5/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/3-15/0 Urology Clinic Recep Ceiling 380 110 20.7/17.1 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


“ON”
DB/WB
FCU-A/3-17 Consult/Exam Ceiling 175 20 22.1/17.6 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/3-33/0 Recep/Nurse Base Ceiling 395 140 20.2/16.9 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/3-35 HDU Single Bedroom Ceiling 300 55 21.5/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/3-47/0 NUM/Interview Room Ceiling 310 60 21.5/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/3-53/0 Bev Pantry/Clean Utility Ceiling 290 90 20.5/17 4.9/4.2 0.13 3.7 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01


“ON”
DB/WB
FCU-A/3-87/0 PA & Head of Urology Ceiling 165 20 22/17.6 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/3-89 Royal Suite 3 Ceiling 460 65 21.9/17.5 7.5/6.4 0.2 4.7 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/3-3 Comm’s Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 60 22.2/17.7 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/3-15 Staff Common Room Corridor - Ceiling 500 60 22/17.6 7.9/6.7 0.21 5.2 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/3-17/0 Change Rooms Ceiling 400 100 21/17.2 6/5.1 0.16 3.9 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/3-19 Corridor Store - Ceiling 800 80 22.2/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/3-20 Store Ceiling 400 30 22.4/17.8 6/5.1 0.16 3.9 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01
FCU-B/3-46 Procedure Room Ceiling 600 0 23/18 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/3-50/0 Reporting & Corridor Corridor - Ceiling 810 70 22.3/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/3-60/0 Entry Ceiling 600 70 22.1/17.6 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/3-63/0 Nurse Base Corridor - Ceiling 810 80 22.2/17.7 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/3-64/0 Recovery Nurse Base Ceiling 810 90 22.1/17.6 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/3-65/0 Bed Rooms Corridor - Ceiling 600 60 22.2/17.7 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/4-01 Lobby Ceiling 440 50 22.1/17.6 7.5/6.4 0.2 4.4 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/4-04 Apartment 1 Ceiling 580 60 22.2/17.7 8.7/7.4 0.23 5.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-06 01


“ON”
DB/WB
FCU-A/4-11 Apartment 4 Ceiling 600 60 22.2/17.7 9/7.7 0.24 3.8 1ph 0.6 N 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/4-17/0 Breakout & Pantry Ceiling 210 50 21.1/17.2 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 N 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/4-23.1 Link Bridge Ceiling 650 50 22.4/17.8 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/4-23.2 Link Bridge Ceiling 650 50 22.4/17.8 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/4-24 Open-plan Offices Ceiling 800 90 22.1/17.6 12.8/10.9 0.34 5.4 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/4-25/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 640 80 22/17.6 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/4-26 Meeting Room Ceiling 200 60 20.6/17 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/4-32/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 540 60 22.1/17.6 8.3/7 0.22 5.5 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/4-34 Open-plan Offices Ceiling 580 80 21.9/17.6 8.7/7.4 0.23 5.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/4-36/0 Perimeter Offices Ceiling 450 60 21.9/17.6 7.5/6.4 0.2 4.4 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/4-43/0 Offices Ceiling 570 130 21.2/17.3 8.7/7.4 0.23 5.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/4-45 Chairman Ceiling 330 65 21.4/17.4 5.3/4.5 0.14 4.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/4-47 Board Room Ceiling 380 120 20.5/17 6/5.1 0.16 5.2 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/4-48/0 PA & Corridor Ceiling 300 30 22.2/17.7 5.3/4.5 0.14 4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/4-50/0 Hospital Dir & Marketing Ceiling 460 50 22.1/17.7 7.5/6.4 0.2 4.7 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01
FCU-A/4-52 Reception Ceiling 165 60 20.1/16.8 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/4-53 Clinical Director Ceiling 120 20 21.7/17.5 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/4-54 Pantry Ceiling 165 70 19.6/16.6 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01
FCU-A/4-62 EHS Board Room Ceiling 480 160 20.3/16.9 7.9/6.7 0.21 4.9 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-06 01


“ON”
DB/WB
FCU-B/4-7 Comm’s Room Lobby - Ceiling 600 0 23/18 10.2/8.6 0.27 3.8 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/5-01.1 Hydraulic Plant Room Ceiling 650 100 21.8/17.5 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/5-01.2 Hydraulic Plant Room Ceiling 650 100 21.8/17.5 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/5-02.1 Mech AHU Plant Room Ceiling 650 100 21.8/17.5 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/5-02.2 Mech AHU Plant Room Ceiling 650 100 21.8/17.5 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/5-05.1 UPS Ceiling 650 20 22.8/17.9 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-A/5-05.2 UPS Ceiling 650 20 22.8/17.9 10.9/9.3 0.29 4.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/5-1 Mechanical Plant Room Mechanical Plant 1375 0 32/26 19.2/16.3 0.51 6.1 3ph 1.1 N 39TDH-14 01
FCU-B/5-2 Hydraulic Plant Room Hydraulic Plant 1020 0 32/26 15.1/12.8 0.4 6.1 3ph 1.1 N 39TDH-14 01
FCU-B/5-3 Medical Gases Plant Room Gases Plant 900 0 32/26 13.6/11.5 0.36 6.1 1ph 0.6 Y 39TDH-09 01
FCU-B/5-4 GSM Room GSM Room 135 0 23/18 4.5/3.8 0.12 3.4 1ph 0.37 Y 39TDH-04 01

23.18.08 COMPUTER ROOM UNITS – CHILLED WATER
‘ON” coil Net Cooling Chilled Chilled Maximum Ext. Heating Humidifier Elect. Selected
CRAC Water Water Fan Static Duty Cap. Requirement Make / Model
Discharge Cond. Capacity Water Rev
Tag Air Flow
DB/WB GTH/TSH IN / OUT Flow PD
(-) (-) (C) (kW) (C) (l/s) (kPa) (l/s) (Pa) (kW) (kG/h) ph/V/Hz (-) (-)
CRAC-B/G-58.1 Down Flow 24/17 52/45 5.5/14.5 1.4 30 4185 80 - - 3/400/50 LIEBERT RCD 01
CRAC-B/G-58.2 Down Flow 24/17 52/45 5.5/14.5 1.4 30 4185 80 - - 3/400/50 LIEBERT RCD 01
NOTES:
1. External static is an estimated value only. The Contractor shall be responsible for final calculation of fan static pressure.
2. Net Cooling Capacity = (Total Cap. – Fan input power)
3. Maximum cooling coil face velocity – 2.5m/s
4. Selection based on Atlas by Liebert Technical Data Manual
5. Maximum water pressure drop include both coil and flow control valve.

23.18.09 FANS
Impeller
Fan Fan Estimated Fan Maximum Diameter Motor Starting Motor
Application Location Selected Model Revision
Reference Duty Tot. Static Type Speed Class Method rating
(-) (-) (-) (l/s) (Pa) (-) (rps) (mm) (-) (dol / vsd) (-) (ph/kW) (-)
TEF-A/5-1 Toilet Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 5500 450 ILMF 960 800 F DOL MMD806/4 3/5.5 01
KEF-A/5-1 Kitchen Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 2400 400 ILAX 2880 500 F DOL APO502AA5/17 3/2.2 01
EAF-A/5-1 Garbage Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 100 300 ILMF 2520 244 F DOL TD-1300/250 Hi 1/0.18 01
EAF-A/B1-1 Car Park Exhaust E/A Fan Room 1 20000 450 ILAX 960 1800 F VSD AP1806DA6/14 3/15.0 01
EAF-A/B1-2 Grease Arrestor Exhaust E/A Fan Room 1 180 350 ILC 1450 250 F DOL TEF-315 1/0.27 01
SAF-A/B1-1 Car Park Supply S/A Fan Room 1 15000 450 ILAX 960 1600 F VSD AP1608FP12/18 3/15.0 01
EAF-B/B1-1 Car Park Exhaust E/A Fan Room 2 18600 450 ILAX 960 1800 F VSD AP1808FP12/15 3/15.0 01
SAF-B/B1-1 Car Park Supply S/A Fan Room 2 14000 450 ILAX 960 1600 F VSD AP1606DP6/13 3/11.0 01
EAF-B/B2-1 Hydraulic Dilution Room B1 Fan Room 50 350 ILC 1450 200 F DOL TE3-200 1/0.12 01
EAF-B/5-1 Sterile Store Mechanical Plant Room 800 300 ILC 1450 450 F VSD PCD454ER 3/0.75 01
EAF-B/5-2 Operating Theatre Mechanical Plant Room 800 300 ILC 1450 450 F VSD PCD454ER 3/0.75 01
EAF-B/5-6 Toilet Exhaust Mechanical Plant Room 6000 400 ILAX 1450 1000 F DOL AP1004GA6/14 3/4.0 01
EAF-B/5-7 Safety Cabinet Mechanical Plant Room 150 250 ILC 1450 200 F DOL PCD354DD 3/0.55 01
EAF-B/5-10 IT/Comm’s Rooms Mechanical Plant Room 400 300 ILC 1450 400 F DOL PCD404ER 3/0.45 01
EAF-B/5-11 Batch Washer Mechanical Plant Room 300 300 ILC 1450 400 F DOL PCD354DD 3/0.37 01
Fan Type ILAX ILC ILMF DWDI SWSI CRU ARU MFRU PF
Description In line In line In line mixed Double width double Single width single inlet Centrifugal roof unit Axial roof unit Mixed flow roof unit Propeller Fan
axial centrifugal flow inlet

23.18.10 MEDICAL AIR (4 BAR) / SURGICAL AIR (7 BAR) COMPRESSOR SCHEDULE
Ref. Designation Quantity Type Capacity Mounting Power Supply Data Brand/Model Accessories
(LPM) /
Compressor Rating (kW) / Voltage Phase Frequency
Compressor (Hz)
Medical Air 1 Duplex 840 Floor 7.5 400 3 50 Medaes / or Receiver / after cooler
approved equal drier pre.carbon / bacterial
dust filter
Surgical Air 1 Duplex 630 Floor 7.5 400 3 50 Medaes / or Receiver / after cooler
approved equal drier pre.carbon / bacterial
dust filter

23.18.11 MEDICAL VACUUM PUMP SCHEDULE (450MM HG)
(LPM)s
Rating (kW)/ Voltage Phase Frequency
Pump (Hz)
Vacuum Pump 1 Triplex 1140 Floor 2.2 400 3 50 Medaes / or Bacterial filter vacuum
approved equal pump panel 1500L
vacuum vessel

23.18.12 ANAESTHESIA GAS SCAVENGING SYSTEM SCHEDULE
(LPM) /
Pump Rating (kW)/ Voltage Phase Frequency
Pump (Hz)
Vacuum Pump 1 Duplex 500 Floor 0.55 400 3 50 Medaes / or Bacterial filter vacuum
approved equal pump panel

23.18.13 ELECTRIC DUCT HEATERS (EDH)
Ref Air Duct Fan Cap. Steps Rev

Flow Size Interlock
(-) (l/s) (mm x mm) (-) (ph/kW) (-) (-)
EDH-B/5-1 925 600x600 Yes 3/12 3 01
EDH-B/5-2 925 600x600 Yes 3/12 3 01
EDH-B/5-3 925 600x600 Yes 3/12 3 01
EDH-B/5-4 925 600x600 Yes 3/12 3 01
EDH-B/5-5 925 600x600 Yes 3/12 3 01

23.18.14 PLATE HEAT EXCHANGERS (WATER TO WATER)
Secondary Circuit
Ref Location Capacity Primary Circuit Notes Rev.
Fluid Temp Water Max Press. Fluid Temp. Water Max Press.
Type in/out) Flow Drop Type In/out Flow Drop
(kPa)
(kW) (0C) (l/s) (kPa) (0C) (l/s)
HEX-A/5-1 Building A – Level 5 Plant Room 60 Chilled Water 5.5/14.5 1.6 30 Chilled 34.5/20 1.0 25 - 01
Filtered/Cold
Water
HEX-A/5-2 Building A – Level 5 Plant Room 60 Chilled Water 5.5/14.5 1.6 30 Chilled 34.5/20 1.0 25 - 01
Filtered/Cold
Water
HEX-B/5-1 Building B – Level 5 Plant Room 60 Chilled Water 5.5/14.5 1.6 30 Chilled 34.5/20 1.0 25 - 01
Filtered/Cold
Water
HEX-B/5-2 Building B – Level 5 Plant Room 60 Chilled Water 5.5/14.5 1.6 30 Chilled 34.5/20 1.0 25 - 01
Filtered/Cold
Water

23.18.15 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES (MCCS)
Supply Type: Board Form: Degree of Protection Starting Method: The following are required on the switchboard:
Normal Form 1 – Secondary mechanical panels IP43 – for indoor installed MCC dol–direct on line (<11.0kW) 1. Fire alarm light indicating fire signal to MCC.
Emergency Form 2 – Drive and control section IP65 – for outdoor installed MCC vsd – variable speed drive 2. Run / Fault lights indicating MCC power available or fault
Form 3A – Fire drive MCC with more than 1 drive Soft – soft starters (for motors 3. Power analyses which provides the following as a minimum:
Form 3B – Main plant MCC power dist section 15 kW and above ) Voltage, Current, Max. Demand, kWh and power factor
4. Lamp test button
Motor Control Centre Tag Supply Type Boards Form to IEC 439-1 Board Protection: Board Color: Incoming Supply – Circuit Beaker Size
MCC-A/B1-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps
Equipment Run
Equipment Equipment Motor Elect Starting Start/Stop Run/ Hand / FIB
Equipment running status In
Description Location Power Supply Method Signal Fault Off/Auto Override
Tag (duty/stand-by) Fire Rev
From Lights Switch Facility
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
SAF-A/B1-1 Supply Air Fan S/A Fan Room 1 15 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y Y Y 01

23.18.15 MOTOR CONTROL CENTRES (MCC) Cont.
MCC-A/B1-2 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps
Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
EAF-A/B1-1 Car Park Exhaust E/A Fan Room 1 15 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y Y Y 01
EAF-A/B1-2 Grease Arrestor Exhaust E/A Fan Room 1 0.27 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-A/B2-08 Fan Coil Unit Body Hold 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

MCC-A/G-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps
Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
FCU-A/G-13/0 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-A/G-34 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
AHU-A/G-11/0 Air Handling Unit Ceiling 5.5 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
AHU-A/G-38 Air Handling Unit Ceiling 4.0 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
AC-A/G-01 Air Curtain Ceiling 0.3 1ph duty DOL - Y Y N/A N/A 01
AC-A/G-02 Air Curtain Ceiling 0.3 1ph duty DOL - Y Y N/A N/A 01

MCC-A/1-1 Normal Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps
Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
FCU-A/1-01 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-A/1-06.1 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-A/1-07/0 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
MCC-A/1-1 – continued on following page

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

MCC-A/5-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps
Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
AHU-A/5-1 Air Handling Unit Mechanical Plant Room 15 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
HRP-A/5-1 Heat Recovery Pump Mechanical Plant Room 0.75 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
TEF-A/5-1 Toilet Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 5.5 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
KEF-A/5-1 Kitchen Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 2.2 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
EAF-A/5-1 Garbage Exhaust Fan Mechanical Plant Room 0.18 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

MCC-B/B1-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps
Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
FCU-B/B2-08 Fan Coil Unit EHS Pharmacy Store 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
SAF-B/B1-1 Supply Air Fan S/A Fan Room 2 11 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y Y Y 01

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
FCU-B/B1-1 Fan Coil Unit Energy Transfer Station 1.5 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
EAF-B/B1-1 Car Park Exhaust E/A Fan Room 2 15 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y Y Y 01
SCHWP-B/B1-1 Chilled Water Pump Energy Transfer Station 30 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y Y Y 01

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
FCU-B/B1-2 Fan Coil Unit BMCS Room 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

MCC-B/G-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps
Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
FCU-B/G-03 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-B/G-09/0 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-B/G-17.1 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
CRAC-B/G-58.1 Computer Room A/C IT Floor 3.0 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
CRAC-B/G-58.2 Computer Room A/C IT Floor 3.0 3ph stand-by DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
AC-B/G-75.1 Air Curtain Ceiling 0.3 1ph duty DOL - Y Y N/A N/A 01
AC-B/G-75.2 Air Curtain Ceiling 0.3 1ph duty DOL - Y Y N/A N/A 01

MCC-B/1-1 Emergency Form 2 IP 43 Orange outside / White inside ….. Amps
Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
FCU-B/1-1/0 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-B/1-03 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-B/1-6.1 Fan Coil Unit Ceiling 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
MCC-B/1-1 – continued on following page

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
AHU-B/2-31/0 Air Handling Unit Ceiling 4.0 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
Have provision for 10 extra fan coil units for future tenancies

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
FCU-B/5-1 Fan Coil Unit Mechanical Plant 1.1 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-B/5-2 Fan Coil Unit Hydraulic Plant 1.1 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-B/5-3 Fan Coil Unit Gases Plant 0.6 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
FCU-B/5-4 Fan Coil Unit GSM Room 0.37 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
AHU-B/5-1 Air Handling Unit Mechanical Plant 2.2 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
PCHWP-B/5-1 Chilled Water Pump Mechanical Plant 7.5 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
PCHWP-B/5-2 Chilled Water Pump Mechanical Plant 7.5 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
HRP-B/5-1 Heat Recovery Pump Mechanical Plant 0.25 1ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
CH-B/5-1 Emergency Chiller Emergency Chiller Plant 297.6 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
MCC-B/5-1 – continued on following page

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
EAF-B/5-1 Sterile Store Exhaust Mechanical Plant 0.75 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
EAF-B/5-2 Operating Theatre Exhaust Mechanical Plant 0.75 3ph duty VSD BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
EAF-B/5-6 Toilet Exhaust Mechanical Plant 4.0 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
EAF-B/5-7 Safety Cabinet Exhaust Mechanical Plant 0.55 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
EAF-B/5-10 IT/Comm’s Rooms Exhaust Mechanical Plant 0.45 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01
EAF-B/5-11 Batch Washer Exhaust Mechanical Plant 0.37 3ph duty DOL BMCS Y Y N/A N/A 01

Equipment Run
Mode
(-) (-) (-) (kW) (1/3ph) (-) (-) (-) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (Y/N) (-)
MA-B/5-1 Medical Air Gases Plant 11 3ph duty & standy-by DOL - Y Y Y N 01
SA-B/5-1 Surgical Air Gases Plant 7.5 3ph duty & standy-by DOL - Y Y Y N 01
V-B/5-1 Medical Vacuum Gases Plant 4 3ph duty & standy-by DOL - Y Y Y N 01
AGSS-B/5-1 Anaesthetic Scavenging Gases Plant 2.2 3ph duty & standy-by DOL - Y Y Y N 01

23.19.00 TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE

MECHANICAL SERVICES
SCHEDULE OF SUB-CONTRACTORS
SUB-CONTRACT COMPANY
. Piping
. Ducting
. Insulation
. Electrical
. Automatic Controls
. Painting
. Water Treatment
. Commissioning
. Medical Gases
Tenderer: …………………………………………………………………………………………………..
Signed by: …………………………………………… Title: …………………………………………
Witness: …………………………………………… Title: …………………………………………
Date: ………………………………………………………………..…………………………… 2006
S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE

269
TECHNICAL DATA SCHEDULE

MECHANICAL SERVICES
SCHEDULE OF SUB-CONTRACTORS
EQUIPMENT NO. MANUFACTURER MODEL
. BMCS
. Air Handling Units
. Fans
. Attenuators
. Air Diffusers & Grilles
. Filters
. Water Treatment
. Pumps
. Chillers
. Medical Gas
. Air Curtains
Tenderer: …………………………………………………………………………………………………..
Signed by: …………………………………………… Title: …………………………………………
Witness: …………………………………………… Title: …………………………………………
Date: ………………………………………………………………..…………………………… 2006
JOL/IH.2664S5896MA
S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE

270

Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning &amp Bms

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning &amp Bms

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SPECIFICATION S040804D1MA

HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING & BMS

VOS Group Pty Limited

Tel: +61 2 9956 8080

VOS Group Consulting Engineers

Tel: +971 4 397 9645

Verified by: John O’Leary Signed:__________________________ Date: 19/07/2006

Approved by: Geoff Taylor Signed:__________________________ Date: 19/07/2006

Rev No. Description of Revision Date Approved

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 2

23.00.00 HEATING, VENTILATING, AIR CONDITIONING AND BMCS 14

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 3

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 4

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 5

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 6

23.06.12.02 Testing of Water Pipework Systems 80

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 7

23.10.03.03 Blast Cleaning 100

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 8

23.11.12 Anaesthetic gas scavenging disposal system 119

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 9

23.12.18.18 Local Isolating Switches 143

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 10

23.14.05 FIELD HARDWARE 175

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 11

23.14.09.03 HandHeld Console 196

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 12

23.17.00 WARRANTY AND SERVICE 213

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 13

23.01.01 INTRODUCTION AND INTENT

All materials and equipment shall be provided by a manufacturer experienced in such

23.01.02 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 14

The sub-contract documents comprise:

(b) Mechanical Drawings. As listed in Clause 23.02.03

(c) Particular Conditions: Procurement, Contracting and General Requirements Refer to

23.01.03 SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

23.01.03.01 Sub-Contractor to Inform Himself

23.01.03.02 Drawings and Information Supplied by the Engineer

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 15

23.01.03.04 Obvious Work

23.01.03.05 Equipment Variations After Tendering

23.01.03.06 Standards, Quality of Work and Materials, Submittals and Approval

. British Standards (BS) and Codes of Practice (BSCP)

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 16

All major equipment tested and commissioned on site shall be undertaken by a

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 17

23.01.03.09 Provisional Sums

23.01.04 NO OBJECTION CERTIFICATES (NOCS)

23.01.05 AUTHORITY PERMITS, FEES, INSPECTIONS AND NOCS

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 18

23.02.01 DESCRIPTION OF PROJECT

. Building A (Ground, Levels 1, 2, 4 and roof)

23.02.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORKS

. Air conditioning of Medical and Administration areas.

23.02.03 DRAWINGS BY ENGINEER

The following drawings shall form part of this Specification

Drawing No. Title

M-01 Legend, General Notes and Drawing List – Mechanical Services

S040804D1MA UROLOGY, NEPHROLOGY, DIABETES AND DIAGNOSTIC IMAGING CENTRE 19

M-06 Building B – Ground Floor – Mechanical Services Layout

23.02.04 SCOPE OF WORK